2012 what will happen and other related items

Locations of Deep Underground Military Bases in America ¨C American Holcaust in

2009-07-11T14:51:00.000-07:00

Locations of Deep Underground Military Bases in America ¨C American Holcaust inthe Making?and 800 FEMA concentration camps in America and Are FEMA Concentration Camps aMyth?America staysthe way it is with many still being relatively well off, and still possessingfirearms. Only the people of America can stop the coming American Holocaust fromoccurring.In America alone there are over 120 Deep Underground Military Bases situatedunder most major cities, US AFBs, US Navy Bases and US Army Bases, as well asunderneath FEMA Military Training Camps and DHS control centers.There are also many Deep Underground Military Bases under Canada. Almost all ofthese bases are over 2 miles underground and have diameters ranging from 10miles up to 30 miles across!They have been building these bases day and night, unceasingly, since the 1940s.These bases are basically large cities underground connected by high-speedmagneto-levity trains that have speeds up to 1500 MPH. Several books have beenwritten about this activity.The average depth of these bases is over a mile, and they again are basicallywhole cities underground. They have nuclear powered laser drilling machines thatcan drill a tunnel seven miles long in one day. (Note: The September, 1983 issueof Omni (Pg. 80) has a color drawing of ¡®The Subterrene,¡¯ the Los Alamosnuclear-powered tunnel machine that burrows through the rock, deep underground,by heating whatever stone it encounters into molten rock.)The Black Projects sidestep the authority of Congress, which as we know isillegal. There is much hard evidence out there. Many will react with fear,terror and paranoia, but you must snap out of it and wake up from thebrainwashing your media pumps into your heads all day long.Are you going to be a rabbit in the headlights, or are you going to stand up andsay enough is enough? The US Government through the NSA, DOD, CIA, DIA, ATF,ONI, US Army, US Marine Corp, FEMA and the DHS has spent in excess of 12trillion dollars building the massive, covert infrastructure for the coming OneWorld Government and New World Religion over the past 40 years.There is the Deep Underground Military Base underneath Denver InternationalAirport, which is over 22 miles in diameter and goes down over 8 levels. It¡¯sno coincidence that the CIA is relocating the headquarters of its domesticdivision, which is responsible for operations in the United States, from theCIA¡¯s Langley headquarters to Denver.Constructed in 1995, the government and politicians were hell bent on buildingthis airport in spite of it ending up vastly overbudget. Charges of corruption,constant construction company changes, and mass firings of teams once they hadbuilt a section of their work was reported so that no ¡°one¡± group had any ideawhat the blueprint of the airport was.Not only did locals not want this airport built nor was it needed, buteverything was done to make sure it was built despite that. Masonic symbols andbizarre artwork of dead babies, burning cities and women in coffins comprise anextensive mural as well as a time capsule ¨C none of which is featured in theairport¡¯s web site section detailing the unique artwork throughout thebuilding.DIA serves as a cover for the vast underground facilities that were built there.There are reports of electronic/magnetic vibrations which make some people sickand cause headaches in others.There are acres of fenced-in areas which have barbed wire pointing into the areaas if to keep things in, and small concrete stacks that resemble mini-coolingtowers rise out of the acres of nowhere to apparently vent underground levels.The underground facility is 88.3 square mile deep. Basically this UndergroundBase is 8 cities on top of each other!The holding capacity of such leviathanic bases is huge. These city-sized basescan hold millions and millions of people, whether they are mind controlled,enslaved NWO World Army Soldiers or innocent and enslaved surface dwellers fromthe towns and cities of America and Canada.There is Dulce Base, in New Mexico. Dulce is a small town in northern NewMexico, located above 7,000 feet on the Jicarilla Apache Indian Reservation.There is only one major motel and a few stores.It¡¯s not a resort town and it is not bustling with activity. But Dulce has adeep, dark secret. The secret is harbored deep below the brush of ArchuletaMesa. Function: Research of mind related functions, genetic experiments, mindcontrol training and reprograming.There are over 3000 real-time video cameras throughout the complex athigh-security locations (entrances and exits).There are over 100 secret exits near and around Dulce. Many around ArchuletaMesa, others to the south around Dulce Lake and even as far east as Lindrith.Deep sections of the complex connect into natural cavern systems.Level 1 ¨C garage for street maintenance. Level 2 ¨C garage for trains,shuttles, tunnel-boring machines and disc maintenance. Level 3 ¨C everyone isweighed, in the nude, then given a jump suit uniform.The weight of the person is put on a computer I.D. card each day. Change in overthree dollars requires a physical exam and X-ray. Level 4 ¨C Human research in¡®paranormal¡¯ areas ¨C mental telepathy, mind control, hypnosis, remoteviewing, astral traveling ¨C etc.The technology is apparently here to allow them to know how to manipulate the¡®Bioplasmic Body¡¯ Development of a laser weapon that can remotely cause burnsand discomfort on it¡¯s target.They can lower your heartbeat with Deep Sleep ¡®Delta Waves,¡¯ induce a staticshock, then reprogram, Via a Brain- Computer link. Level 5 -security is severe.Armed guards patrol constantly, and in addition to weight sensitive areas there(are) hand print and eye print stations.Here, is the device that powers the transfer of atoms. Level 6 ¨C Level 6 isprivately called ¡®Nightmare Hall¡¯. It holds the genetic labs. Experiments doneon fish, seals, birds, and mice that are vastly altered from their originalforms.Then there is the Greenbrier Facility, in White Sulfer Springs, West Virginiaunder the Greenbriar Resort. The Continuity of Government facility intendedsince 1962 to house the United States Congress, code-named Casper, is located onthe grounds of the prestigious Greenbrier resort.The bunker is beneath the West Virginia wing, which includes a complete medicalclinic. Construction of the facility, which began in 1959, required 2.5 yearsand 50,000 tons of concrete.The steel-reinforced concrete walls of the bunker, which is 20 feet belowground, are 2 feet thick. The facility includes separate chambers for the Houseof Representatives and the Senate, as well as a larger room for joint sessions.These are located in the ¡°Exhibit Hall¡± of the West Virginia Wing, whichincludes vehicular and pedestrian entrances which can be quickly sealed by blastdoors. They don¡¯t even hide this one, and it¡¯s even a tourist attraction.The Underground vault was built to meet the needs of a Congress-in-hiding ¨C infact the hotel is a replica of the White House. The underground area has achamber for the Senate, a chamber for the House and a massive hall for jointsessions.Although the hotel says it gives tours of the 112,000 square area daily, theinstallation still stands at the ready, its operators still working under coverat the hotel. The secrecy that has surrounded the site has shielded it both frompublic scrutiny and official reassessment.Most Americans will not believe that an American Holocaust will happen untilthey see it happening with their own eyes.Till then, it is just another strange conspiracy theory for them to laugh at.This is no laughing matter.When it happens, it will be to late to stop it. President Bush has already saidhe will ¡°use foreign troops¡± on the streets of America if another Islamicterrorist attack occurs, because there may not be enough US Military personnelto cope with the massive urban chaos and panic that will obviously ensue if itoccurs.Also, the US Government has been involved covertly in the creation of an army ofloyal, brainwashed soldiers of the future. They will have cybernetic andmicrochip implants and will fight anywhere in the world, without question, withtotal loyalty and without hesitation or fear.These soldiers were created at Brookhaven National Laboratories BNL, theNational Ordinance Laboratories NOL and the Massachussetts Institute ofTechnology MIT, and covertly transferred under DOD and NSA control and planning.Many of these soldiers are stationed in the Deep Underground Military Bases likethe one under Denver International Airport. All of this information has beenresearched, and it has taken much effort to fit it together properly.There are many mag-lev subterraenean train networks that stretch from the thesecomplexes and go out to other underground bases. All soldiers working in thesebases are microchipped and under total Psychotronic Mind Control.Of the missing ¡°Milk Carton People¡± that the FBI used to post on milk cartons,some were taken to these underground bases for genetic experimentation,microchipping, psychotronic mind control and cybernetic implantations for futureuse as brainwashed soldiers of the NWO.Every year in America hundreds of thousands of people go missing. The creationof a total Global Fascist Police State by the Illuminati will happen if we donot all wake up and see what is happening.I find it amazing that so many Americans, Scandanavians and Western Europeansrefuse to believe that there are millions of UNISF and UNMNTF Troops in America.Under the Partnerships For Peace Program PFPP set up by President Bill Clintonin early 1993, thousands of troops a month have been coming into America.These Fascist criminals parade as our friends and leaders, while stripping awaydemocratic rights that will be replaced with a Corporatist and Fascistdictatorship, unless people, and especially Americans, wake up now. Here are thelocations of some Deep Underground Military Bases in America:ALASKA1. Brooks Range, Alaska2. Delta Junction, Alaska 2a. Fort Greeley, Alaska. In the same Delta Junctionarea.ARIZONA1. Arizona (Mountains) (not on map) Function: Genetic work. Multiple levels 2.Fort Huachuca, Arizona (also reported detainment camp) Function: NSA Facility2. Luke Air Force Base3. Page, Arizona Tunnels to: Area 51, Nevada Dulce base, New Mexico4. Sedona, Arizona (also reported detainment camp) Notes: Located under theEnchantment Resort in Boynton Canyon. There have been many reports by people inrecent years of ¡°increased military presence and activity¡± in the area.5. Wikieup, Arizona Tunnels to: Area 516. Yucca (Mtns.), ArizonaCALIFORNIA1: 29 Palms, California Tunnels to: Chocolate Mts., Fort Irwin, California(possibly one more site due west a few miles)2: Benicia, California3. Catalina Island, California Tunnels to: I was told by someone who worked atthe Port Hueneme Naval Weapons Division Base in Oxnard that they have heard andit is ¡®common rumor¡¯ that there is a tunnel from the base to this Island, andalso to Edwards Air Force Base, possibly utilizing old mines. .4. China Lake Naval Weapons Testing Center5. Chocolate Mountains, California Tunnels to: Fort Irwin, California6. Death Valley,California Function: The entrance to the Death Valley Tunnel isin the Panamint Mountains down on the lower edge of the range near Wingate Pass,in the bottom of an abandoned mine shaft. The bottom of the shaft opens into anextensive tunnel system7. Deep Springs, California Tunnels to: Death Valley, Mercury, NV, Salt LakeCity8. Edwards AFB, California Function: Aircraft Development ¨C antigravityresearch and vehicle development Levels: Multiple Tunnels to: Catalina IslandFort Irwin, California Vandenburg AFB, California Notes: Delta Hanger ¨C NorthBase, Edwards AFB, Ca. Haystack Buttte ¨C Edwards, AFB, Ca.9. Fort Irwin, California (also reported detainment camp) Tunnels to: 29 Palms,California Area 51, Nevada Edwards AFB. California Mt. Shasta, California10. Helendale, California Function: Special Aircraft Facility Helendale has anextensive railway/shipping system through it from the Union Pacific days whichruns in from Salt Lake City, Denver, Omaha, Los Angeles and Chicago11. Lancaster, California Function: New Aircraft design, anti-gravityengineering, Stealth craft and testing Levels: 42 Tunnels To: Edwards A.F.B.,Palmdale12. Lawrence-Livermore International Labs, California The lab has a Human GenomeMapping project on chromosome #19 and a newly built $1.2 billion laser facility13. Moreno Valley, California Function unknown14. Mt. Lassen, California Tunnels to: Probably connects to the Mt. Shasta maintunnel.15. Mt. Shasta. Function: Genetic experiments, magnetic advance, space and beamweaponry. Levels: 5 Tunnels to: Ft. Irwin, California North16. Napa, California Functions: Direct Satellite Communications, LaserCommunications. Continuation of Government site. Levels: Multi-level Tunnels to:Unknown Notes: Located on Oakville Grade, Napa County, Ca. 87 Acres17. Needles, California Function unknown18. Palmdale, California Function: New Aircraft Design, anit-gravity research19. Tehachapi Facility (Northrop, California ¨C Tejon Ranch Function: Levels: 42Tunnels to: Edwards, Llona and other local areas Notes: 25 miles NW of LancasterCalifornia, in the Tehachapi mountains.20. Ukiah, California Function unknownCOLORADO1. Near Boulder, Co. in the mountains Function unknown2. Cheyenne Mountain -Norad -Colorado Springs, Colorado Function: Early Warningsystems ¨C missile defense systems ¨C Space tracking Levels: Multiple Tunnelsto: Colorado Springs, Function: Early warning systems, military strategy,satellite operations Levels: Multiple NORAD is a massive self-sustaining¡®city¡¯ built inside the mountain Tunnels to: Creede, Denver, Dulce Base,Kinsley.3. Creede, Colorado Function unknown Tunnels to: Colorado Springs, Colorado ¨CDelta, Colorado ¨C Dulce Base, New Mexico4. Delta, Colorado Function unknown Tunnels to: Creede Salt Lake, Utah5. Denver International Airport (also a detainment camp) Function: Militaryresearch, construction, detainment camp facilities Levels: 7 reported Tunnelsto: Denver proper, Colorado and Rocky Mountain ¡°safehousing¡±, ColoradoSprings, Colorado (Cheyenne Mtn.)6. Falcon Air Force Base, Falcon, Colorado Function: SDI, Satellite ControlLevels: Multiple Tunnels to: Colorado Springs, possibly more.7. Fort Collins, Colorado Function: Suspect high precision equipmentmanufacturing for space.8. Grand Mesa, Colorado Function unknown9. Gore Range Near Lake, west of Denver, Co. Function: Library and Central DataBank10. San Juan Valley, Colorado Hidden beneath and in an operating Buffalo RanchFunction unknown11. Telluride, Colorado Function unknown12. University of Denver, Co (Boulder area) Function: Genetics, geology/miningas related to tunneling and underground construction.13. Warden Valley West of Fort Collins, CO Function Unknown Tunnels to: MontanaGEORGIADobbins Air Force Base, Marrietta GA Function: test site for plasma andantigravity air craft, experimental crafts and weaponsINDIANAKokomo, Indiana Function Unknown Notes: for years people in that area havereported a ¡°hum¡± that has been so constant that some have been forced to moveand it has made many others sick.It seems to come from underground, and ¡°research¡± has turned up nothingalthough it was suggested by someone that massive underground tunneling andexcavating is going on, using naturally occurring caverns, to make anunderground containment and storage facility.KANSAS1. Hutchinson, Kansas Function unknown Tunnels to: Kinsley, Nebraska2. Kansas City, Kansas Function unknown Notes: Entrance near Worlds of Fun3. Kinsley, Kansas Function unknown Tunnels to: Colorado Springs, Colorado;Hutchinson, Kansas; Tulsa Kokoweef Peak, SW California Notes: Gold stored inhuge cavern, blasted shut. Known as the ¡°midway city¡± because it¡¯s locatedhalfway between New York and San Francisco.MARYLANDEdgewood Arsenal, Maryland (from Don) Martins AFB, Aberdeen Proving Ground,MarylandMASSACHUSETTSMaynard MA, FEMA regional center. Wackenhut is here too.MONTANABozeman, Mont. Function: GeneticsNEVADAArea 51 ¨C Groom Lake ¨C Dreamland ¨C Nellis Air Force Base Area 51 was said toexist only in our imaginations until Russian satellite photos were leaked to USsources and it¡¯s amazing how you can get photos all over of it now, evenposters.They¡¯ve been busy little bees building this base up. Function: Stealth andcloaking Aircraft research & development. ¡®Dreamland (Data RepositoryEstablishment and Maintenance Land) Elmint (Electromagnetic Intelligence),Biological weapons research and genetic manipulation/warfare storage, ColdEmpire, EVA, Program HIS (Hybrid Intelligence System),BW/CW; IRIS (InfraredIntruder Systems), Security: Above ground cameras, underground pressure sensors,ground and air patrol2. Blue Diamond, Nevada Function unknown3. Fallon Air Force Base area (the flats, near Reno) ¡°American City¡±restricted military sites southwest of Fallon4. Mercury, Nevada Function unknown5. Tonopah, Nevada Function unknown 69: San Gabriel (mountains) On Western sideof Mojave Desert Function unknown Notes: Heavy vibrations coming from under theforest floor which sounds like geared machinery. These vibrations and sounds arethe same as heard in Kokomo, Indiana and are suspected undergroundbuilding/tunneling operations.NEW MEXICO1. Albuquerque, New Mexico (AFB) Function unknown Levels: Multiple Tunnels to:Carlsbad, New Mexico Los Alamos, New Mexico Possible connections to Datil, andother points.2. Carlsbad, New Mexico Functions: Underground Nuclear Testing Tunnels to: FortStockton, Texas. Roswell3. Cordova, New Mexico Function unknown4. Datil, New Mexico Function unknown Tunnels to: Dulce Base5: Dulce Base, New Mexico. Tunnels to: Colorado Springs, Colorado Creed,Colorado Datil, N.M. Los Alamos. Page, Arizona Sandia Base Taos, NM.Dulce underground alien facility:6. Los Alamos, New Mexico Functions: Psychotronic Research, Psychotronic WeaponsLevels: Multiple Tunnels to: ALB AFB, New Mexico Dulce, New Mexico Connectionsto Datil,Taos7. Sandia Base, New Mexico Functions: Research in Electrical/magnetic PhenomenaLevels: Multiple Tunnels to: Dulce Base Notes: Related Projects are studied atSandia Base by ¡®The Jason Group¡¯ (of 55 Scientists). They have secretlyharnessed the ¡®Dark Side of Technology¡¯ and hidden the beneficial technologyfrom the public.8. Sunspot, NM Function unknown9. Taos, New Mexico Function unknown Tunnels to: Dulce, New Mexico; Cog,Colorado Notes: Several other sidelines to area where Uranium is mined orprocessed.10. White Sands, NM Function: Missile testing/design Levels: Seven knownNEW HAMPSHIREThere may be as many as three underground installations in New Hampshire¡¯shills, according to reports.NEW YORKNew York, New York Function unknown Tunnels to: Capitol Building, D.C.OHIOWright-Patterson Air Force Base ¨C Dayton, Ohio Function: Air Force Repository.Rumored to house stealth technology and prototype craftOREGON1. Cave Junction, Oregon Function: Suspected Underground UFO Base Levels: Atleast one Notes: Suspected location is in or near Hope Mountain. Near ApplegateLake, Oregon, just over into California. Multiple shafts, access areas to over1500 feet depth. Built using abandoned mine with over 36 known miles of tunnels,shafts.2. Crater Lake, Oregon Tunnels: possible to Cave Junction3. Klamath Falls, Oregon4. Wimer, Oregon (Ashland Mt. area) Function: Underground Chemical StorageLevels: At least onePENNSYLVANIARaven Rock, Pa (near Ligonier) Function: working back up underground Pentagon ¨Csister site of Mt. Weather Notes: 650¡ä below summit, 4 entrances.TEXAS1. Calvert, Texas Function unknown2. Fort Hood, Texas (also reported detainment camp) Levels: Multiple3. Fort Stockton, Texas Function: Unknown Tunnels to: Carlsbad, New MexicoUTAH1. Dugway, Utah Function: Chemical Storage, Radiation storage.2. Salt Lake City Mormon Caverns Function: Religions archives storage. Levels:Multiple Tunnels to: Delta, Colorado & Riverton, WyomingVIRGINIAMount Poney ¨C Near Culpepper, Virginia Function unknownWASHINGTON1. Mt. Rainier, Washington Function unknown. Levels: Multiple Tunnels to:Unknown Yakima Indian Reservation Function unknown Notes: Southeast of TacomaWashington, on the Reservation, in an area 40 by 70 miles. Unusual sounds fromunderground (Toppenish Ridge). Low flying Silver Cigar shaped craft seen todisappear into the Middle fork area of Toppenish creek.Washington DC: The Function: Part of a massive underground relocation system tohouse select government and military personnel in the event of cataclysmicevent. Tunnels to: New York City; Mt. Weather.WEST VIRGINIAGreenbrier Facility, White Sulfer Springs, West Virginia under the GreenbriarResort.WYOMINGRiverton, Wyoming Function unknown Tunnels to: Salt Lake, Utah Denver, Colorado.
Sat Jul 11, 2009 12:58 am

FEMA has 800 detention facilities and camps all fully operational and

2009-07-11T14:45:00.000-07:00

The following article is from the Friends of Liberty website:There over 800 prison camps in the United States, all fully operational andready to receive prisoners. They are all staffed and even surrounded byfull-time guards, but they are all empty. These camps are to be operated by FEMA(Federal Emergency Management Agency) should Martial Law need to be implementedin the United States and all it would take is a presidential signature on aproclamation and the attorney general¡¯s signature on a warrant to which a listof names is attached. Ask yourself if you really want to be on Ashcroft¡¯s list.The Rex 84 Program was established on the reasoning that if a ¡°mass exodus¡± ofillegal aliens crossed the Mexican/US border, they would be quickly rounded upand detained in detention centers by FEMA. Rex 84 allowed many military bases tobe closed down and to be turned into prisons.Operation Cable Splicer and Garden Plot are the two sub programs which will beimplemented once the Rex 84 program is initiated for its proper purpose. GardenPlot is the program to control the population. Cable Splicer is the program foran orderly takeover of the state and local governments by the federalgovernment. FEMA is the executive arm of the coming police state and thus willhead up all operations. The Presidential Executive Orders already listed on theFederal Register also are part of the legal framework for this operation.The camps all have railroad facilities as well as roads leading to and from thedetention facilities. Many also have an airport nearby. The majority of thecamps can house a population of 20,000 prisoners. Currently, the largest ofthese facilities is just outside of Fairbanks, Alaska. The Alaskan facility is amassive mental health facility and can hold approximately 2 million people.Now let¡¯s review the justification for any actions taken¡Executive Orders associated with FEMA that would suspend the Constitution andthe Bill of Rights. These Executive Orders have been on record for nearly 30years and could be enacted by the stroke of a Presidential pen:¡EXECUTIVE ORDER 10990allows the government to take over all modes of transportation and control ofhighways and seaports.EXECUTIVE ORDER 10995allows the government to seize and control the communication media.EXECUTIVE ORDER 10997allows the government to take over all electrical power, gas, petroleum, fuelsand minerals.EXECUTIVE ORDER 10998allows the government to seize all means of transportation, including personalcars, trucks or vehicles of any kind and total control over all highways,seaports, and waterways.EXECUTIVE ORDER 10999allows the government to take over all food resources and farms.EXECUTIVE ORDER 11000allows the government to mobilize civilians into work brigades under governmentsupervision.EXECUTIVE ORDER 11001allows the government to take over all health, education and welfare functions.EXECUTIVE ORDER 11002designates the Postmaster General to operate a national registration of allpersons.EXECUTIVE ORDER 11003 allows the government to take over all airports andaircraft, including commercial aircraft.EXECUTIVE ORDER 11004 allows the Housing and Finance Authority to relocatecommunities, build new housing with public funds, designate areas to beabandoned, and establish new locations for populations.EXECUTIVE ORDER 11005allows the government to take over railroads, inland waterways and publicstorage facilities.EXECUTIVE ORDER 11051specifies the responsibility of the Office of Emergency Planning and givesauthorization to put all Executive Orders into effect in times of increasedinternational tensions and economic or financial crisis.EXECUTIVE ORDER 11310grants authority to the Department of Justice to enforce the plans set out inExecutive Orders, to institute industrial support, to establish judicial andlegislative liaison, to control all aliens, to operate penal and correctionalinstitutions, and to advise and assist the President.EXECUTIVE ORDER 11049assigns emergency preparedness function to federal departments and agencies,consolidating 21 operative Executive Orders issued over a fifteen year period.EXECUTIVE ORDER 11921allows the Federal Emergency Preparedness Agency to develop plans to establishcontrol over the mechanisms of production and distribution, of energy sources,wages, salaries, credit and the flow of money in U.S. financial institution inany undefined national emergency.It also provides that when a state of emergency is declared by the President,Congress cannot review the action for six months. The Federal EmergencyManagement Agency has broad powers in every aspect of the nation.General Frank Salzedo, chief of FEMA¡¯s Civil Security Division stated in a 1983conference that he saw FEMA¡¯s role as a ¡°new frontier in the protection ofindividual and governmental leaders from assassination, and of civil andmilitary installations from sabotage and/or attack, as well as prevention ofdissident groups from gaining access to U.S. opinion, or a global audience intimes of crisis.¡± FEMA¡¯s powers were consolidated by President Carter toincorporate the¡National Security Act of 1947allows for the strategic relocation of industries, services, government andother essential economic activities, and to rationalize the requirements formanpower, resources and production facilities.1950 Defense Production Actgives the President sweeping powers over all aspects of the economy.Act of August 29, 1916authorizes the Secretary of the Army, in time of war, to take possession of anytransportation system for transporting troops, material, or any other purposerelated to the emergency.International Emergency Economic Powers Actenables the President to seize the property of a foreign country or national.These powers were transferred to FEMA in a sweeping consolidation in 1979.Where are these camps?ALABAMAOpelika ¨C Military compound either in or very near town.Aliceville ¨C WWII German POW camp ¨C capacity 15,000Ft. McClellan (Anniston) ¨C Opposite side of town from Army Depot;Maxwell AFB (Montgomery) ¨C Civilian prison camp established under OperationGarden Plot, currently operating with support staff and small inmate population.Talladega ¨C Federal prison ¡°satellite¡± camp.ALASKAWilderness ¨C East of Anchorage. No roads, Air & Railroad access only. Estimatedcapacity of 500,000 Elmendorf AFB ¨C Northeast area of Anchorage ¨C far end ofbase. Garden Plot facility.Eielson AFB ¨C Southeast of Fairbanks. Operation Garden Plot facility.Ft. Wainwright ¨C East of FairbanksARIZONAFt. Huachuca ¨C 20 miles from Mexican border, 30 miles from Nogales Rex ¡®84facility.Pinal County ¨C on the Gila River ¨C WWII Japanese detention camp. May berenovated.Yuma County ¨C Colorado River ¨C Site of former Japanese detention camp (nearproving grounds). This site was completely removed in 1990 according to somereports.Phoenix ¨C Federal Prison Satellite Camp. Main federal facility expanded.Florence ¨C WWII prison camp NOW RENOVATED, OPERATIONAL with staff & 400prisoners, operational capacity of 3,500.Wickenburg ¨C Airport is ready for conversion; total capacity unknown.Davis-Monthan AFB (Tucson) ¨C Fully staffed and presently holding prisoners!!Sedona ¨C site of possible UN base.ARKANSASFt. Chaffee (near Fort Smith, Arkansas) ¨C Has new runway for aircraft, new campfacility with cap of 40,000 prisoners Pine Bluff Arsenal ¨C This location alsois the repository for B-Z nerve agent, which causes sleepiness, dizziness,stupor; admitted use is for civilian control. Jerome ¨C Chicot/Drew Counties ¨Csite of WWII Japanese camps Rohwer ¨C Descha County ¨C site of WWII Japanesecamps Blythville AFB ¨C Closed airbase now being used as camp. New woodenbarracks have been constructed at this location. Classic decorations ¨C guardtowers, barbed wire, high fences. Berryville ¨C FEMA facility located east ofEureka Springs off Hwy. 62. Omaha ¨C Northeast of Berryville near Missouri stateline, on Hwy 65 south of old wood processing plant. Possible crematory facility.CALIFORNIAVandenburg AFB ¨C Rex 84 facility, located near Lompoc & Santa Maria. Internmentfacility is located near the oceanside, close to Space Launch Complex #6, alsocalled ¡°Slick Six¡±. The launch site has had ¡°a flawless failure record¡± andis rarely used. Norton AFB ¨C (closed base) now staffed with UN according tosome sources. Tule Lake ¨C area of ¡°wildlife refuge¡±, accessible by unpavedroad, just inside Modoc County. Fort Ord ¨C Closed in 1994, this facility is nowan urban warfare training center for US and foreign troops, and may have some¡°P.O.W. ¨C C.I.¡± enclosures. Twentynine Palms Marine Base ¨C Birthplace of theinfamous ¡°Would you shoot American citizens?¡± Quiz. New camps being built on¡°back 40¡å. Oakdale ¨C Rex 84 camp capable of holding at least 20,000 people.90 mi. East of San Francisco. Terminal Island ¨C (Long Beach) located next tonaval shipyards operated by ChiCom shipping interests. Federal prison facilitylocated here. Possible deportation point. Ft. Irwin ¨C FEMA facility nearBarstow. Base is designated inactive but has staffed camp. McClellan AFB ¨Cfacility capable for 30,000 ¨C 35,000 Sacramento ¨C Army Depot ¨C No specificinformation at this time. Mather AFB ¨C Road to facility is blocked off bycement barriers and a stop sign. Sign states area is restricted; as of 1997there were barbed wire fences pointing inward, a row of stadium lights pointedtoward an empty field, etc. Black boxes on poles may have been cameras.COLORADOTrinidad ¨C WWII German/Italian camp being renovated. Granada ¨C Prowers County¨C WWII Japanese internment camp Ft. Carson ¨C Along route 115 near Canon CityCONNECTICUT, DELAWARENo data available.FLORIDAAvon Park ¨C Air Force gunnery range, Avon Park has an on-base ¡°correctionalfacility¡± which was a former WWII detention camp. Camp Krome ¨C DoJdetention/interrogation center, Rex 84 facility Eglin AFB ¨C This base is over30 miles long, from Pensacola to Hwy 331 in De Funiak Springs. High capacityfacility, presently manned and populated with some prisoners. Pensacola ¨CFederal Prison Camp Everglades ¨C It is believed that a facility may be carvedout of the wilds here.GEORGIAFt. Benning ¨C Located east of Columbus near Alabama state line. Rex 84 site ¨CPrisoners brought in via Lawson Army airfield. Ft. Mc Pherson ¨C US ForceCommand ¨C Multiple reports that this will be the national headquarters andcoordinating center for foreign/UN troop movement and detainee collection. Ft.Gordon ¨C West of Augusta ¨C No information at this time. Unadilla ¨C DoolyCounty ¨C Manned, staffed FEMA prison on route 230, no prisoners. Oglethorpe ¨CMacon County; facility is located five miles from Montezuma, three miles fromOglethorpe. This FEMA prison has no staff and no prisoners. Morgan ¨C CalhounCounty, FEMA facility is fully manned & staffed ¨C no prisoners. Camilla ¨CMitchell County, south of Albany. This FEMA facility is located on Mt. Zion Rdapproximately 5.7 miles south of Camilla. Unmanned ¨C no prisoners, no staff.Hawkinsville ¨C Wilcox County; Five miles east of town, fully manned and staffedbut no prisoners. Located on fire road 100/Upper River Road Abbeville ¨C Southof Hawkinsville on US route 129; south of town off route 280 near OcmulgeeRiver. FEMA facility is staffed but without prisoners. McRae ¨C Telfair County¨C 1.5 miles west of McRae on Hwy 134 (8th St). Facility is on Irwinton Avenueoff 8th St., manned & staffed ¨C no prisoners. Fort Gillem ¨C South side ofAtlanta ¨C FEMA designated detention facility. Fort Stewart ¨C Savannah area ¨CFEMA designated detention facilityHAWAIIHalawa Heights area ¨C Crematory facility located in hills above city. Area ismarked as a state department of health laboratory. Barbers Point NAS ¨C Thereare several military areas that could be equipped for detention / deportation.Honolulu ¨C Detention transfer facility at the Honolulu airport similar inconstruction to the one in.Oklahoma (pentagon-shaped building where airplanescan taxi up to).IDAHOMinidoka/Jerome Counties ¨C WWII Japanese-American internment facility possiblyunder renovation. Clearwater National Forest ¨C Near Lolo Pass ¨C Just milesfrom the Montana state line near Moose Creek, this unmanned facility is reportedto have a nearby airfield. Wilderness areas ¨C Possible location. No data.ILLINOISMarseilles ¨C Located on the Illinois River off Interstate 80 on Hwy 6. It is arelatively small facility with a cap of 1400 prisoners. Though it is small it isdesigned like prison facilities with barred windows, but the real smoking gun isthe presence of military vehicles. Being located on the Illinois River it ispossible that prisoners will be brought in by water as well as by road and air.This facility is approximately 75 miles west of Chicago. National Guard trainingarea nearby. Scott AFB ¨C Barbed wire prisoner enclosure reported to exist justoff-base. More info needed, as another facility on-base is beieved to exist.Pekin ¨C This Federal satellite prison camp is also on the Illinois River, justsouth of Peoria. It supplements the federal penitentiary in Marion, which isequipped to handle additional population outside on the grounds. Chanute AFB ¨CRantoul, near Champaign/Urbana ¨C This closed base had WWII ¨C era barracks thatwere condemned and torn down, but the medical facility was upgraded andadditional fencing put up in the area. More info needed. Marion ¨C FederalPenitentiary and satellite prison camp inside Crab Orchard Nat¡¯l WildlifeRefuge. Manned, staffed, populated fully. Greenfield ¨C Two federal correctional¡°satellite prison camps¡± serving Marion ¨C populated as above. ShawneeNational Forest ¨C Pope County ¨C This area has seen heavy traffic of foreignmilitary equipment and troops via Illinois Central Railroad, which runs throughthe area. Suspected location is unknown, but may be close to Vienna and Shawneecorrectional centers, located 6 mi. west of Dixon Springs. Savanna Army Depot ¨CNW area of state on Mississippi River. Lincoln, Sheridan, Menard, Pontiac,Galesburg ¨C State prison facilities equipped for major expansion and close oradjacent to highways & railroad tracks. Kankakee ¨C Abandoned industrial area onwest side of town (Rt.17 & Main) designated as FEMA detention site. Equippedwith water tower, incinerator, a small train yard behind it and the rear of thefacility is surrounded by barbed wire facing inwards.INDIANAIndianapolis / Marion County ¨C Amtrak railcar repair facility (closed);controversial site of a major alleged detention / processing center. Althoughsome sources state that this site is a ¡°red herring¡±, photographic and videoevidence suggests otherwise. This large facility contains large 3-4 inch gasmains to large furnaces (crematoria??), helicopter landing pads, railheads forprisoners, Red/Blue/Green zones for classifying/processing incoming personnel,one-way turnstiles, barracks, towers, high fences with razor wire, etc.Personnel with government clearance who are friendly to the patriot movementtook a guided tour of the facility to confirm this site. This site is locatednext to a closed refrigeration plant facility. Ft. Benjamin Harrison ¨C Locatedin the northeast part of Indianapolis, this base has been decomissioned from¡°active¡± use but portions are still ideally converted to hold detainees.Helicopter landing areas still exist for prisoners to be brought in by air, land& rail. Crown Point ¨C Across street from county jail, former hospital. One wingpresently being used for county work-release program, 80% of facility stillunused. Possible FEMA detention center or holding facility. Camp Atterbury ¨CFacility is converted to hold prisoners and boasts two active compoundspresently configured for minumum security detainees. Located just west ofInterstate 65 near Edinburgh, south of Indianapolis. Terre Haute ¨C FederalCorrectional Institution, Satellite prison camp and death facility. Equippedwith crematoria reported to have a capacity of 3,000 people a day. FEMAdesignated facility located here. Fort Wayne ¨C This city located in NortheastIndiana has a FEMA designated detention facility, accessible by air, road andnearby rail. Kingsbury ¨C This ¡°closed¡± military base is adjacent to a statefish & wildlife preserve. Part of the base is converted to an industrial park,but the southern portion of this property is still used. It is bordered on thesouth by railroad, and is staffed with some foreign-speaking UN troops. A localpolice officer who was hunting and camping close to the base in the gamepreserve was accosted, roughed up, and warned by the English-speaking unitcommander to stay away from the area. It was suggested to the officer that thewelfare of his family would depend on his ¡°silence¡±. Located just southeast ofLaPorte. Jasper-Pulaski Wildlife Area ¨C Youth Corrections farm located here.Facility is ¡°closed¡±, but is still staffed and being ¡°renovated¡±. Totalcapacity unknown. Grissom AFB ¨C This closed airbase still handles a lot oftraffic, and has a ¡°state-owned¡± prison compound on the southern part of thefacility.UNICOR. Jefferson Proving Grounds ¨C Southern Indiana ¨C This facility was an activebase with test firing occuring daily. Portions of the base have been opened tocreate an industrial park, but other areas are still highly restricted. A campis believed to be located ¡°downrange¡±. Facility is equipped with an airfieldand has a nearby rail line. Newport ¨C Army Depot ¨C VX nerve gas storagefacility. Secret meetings were held here in 1998 regarding the addition of theKankakee River watershed to the Heritage Rivers Initiative. Hammond ¨C largeenclosure identified in FEMA-designated city.IOWANo data available.KANSASLeavenworth ¨C US Marshal¡¯s Fed Holding Facility, US Penitentiary, FederalPrison Camp, McConnell Air Force Base. Federal death penalty facility. Concordia¨C WWII German POW camp used to exist at this location but there is no facilitythere at this time. Ft. Riley ¨C Just north of Interstate 70, airport, near cityof Manhattan. El Dorado ¨C Federal prison converted into forced-labor camp,UNICOR industries. Topeka ¨C 80 acres has been converted into a temporaryholding camp.KENTUCKYAshland ¨C Federal prison camp in Eastern Kentucky near the Ohio River.Louisville ¨C FEMA detention facility, located near restricted area US navalordnance plant. Military airfield located at facility, which is on south side ofcity. Lexington ¨C FEMA detention facility, National Guard base with adjacentairport facility. Manchester ¨C Federal prison camp located inside Dan BooneNational Forest. Ft. Knox ¨C Detention center, possibly located near Salt River,in restricted area of base. Local patriots advise that black Special Forces & UNgray helicopters are occasionally seen in area. Land Between the Lakes ¨C Thisarea was declared a UN biosphere and is an ideal geographic location fordetention facilities. Area is an isthmus extending out from Tennessee, betweenLake Barkley on the east and Kentucky Lake on the west. Just scant miles fromFort Campbell in Tennessee.LOUISIANAFt. Polk ¨C This is a main base for UN troops & personnel, and a training centerfor the disarmament of America. Livingston ¨C WWII German/Italian internmentcamp being renovated?; halfway between Baton Rouge and Hammond, several milesnorth of Interstate 12. Oakdale ¨C Located on US route 165 about 50 miles southof Alexandria; two federal detention centers just southeast of Fort Polk.MAINEHoulton ¨C WWII German internment camp in Northern Maine, off US Route 1.MARYLAND, and DCFt. Meade ¨C Halfway between the District of Criminals and Baltimore. Dataneeded. Ft. Detrick ¨C Biological warfare center for the NWO, located inFrederick.MASSACHUSETTSCamp Edwards / Otis AFB ¨C Cape Cod ¨C This ¡°inactive¡± base is being convertedto hold many New Englander patriots. Capacity unknown. Ft. Devens ¨C Activedetention facility. More data needed.MICHIGANCamp Grayling ¨C Michigan Nat¡¯l Guard base has several confirmed detentioncamps, classic setup with high fences, razor wire, etc. Guard towers are verywell-built, sturdy. Multiple compounds within larger enclosures. Facility deepwithin forest area. Sawyer AFB ¨C Upper Peninsula ¨C south of Marquette ¨C Nodata available. Bay City ¨C Classic enclosure with guard towers, high fence, andclose to shipping port on Saginaw Bay, which connects to Lake Huron. Could be adeportation point to overseas via St. Lawrence Seaway. Southwest ¨C possiblyBerrien County ¨C FEMA detention center. Lansing ¨C FEMA detention facility.MINNESOTADuluth ¨C Federal prison camp facility. Camp Ripley ¨C new prison facility.MISSISSIPPIThese sites are confirmed hoaxes. Hancock County ¨C NASA test site De SotoNational Forest. ¡°These two supposed camps in Mississippi do not exist. Membersof the Mississippi Militia have checked these out on more than one occasionbeginning back when they first appeared on the Internet and throughout thePatriot Movement.¡± ¨C Commander D. Rayner, Mississippi MilitiaMISSOURIRichards-Gebaur AFB ¨C located in Grandview, near K.C.MO. A very largeinternment facility has been built on this base, and all base personnel arerestricted from coming near it. Ft. Leonard Wood ¨C Situated in the middle ofMark Twain National Forest in Pulaski County. This site has been known for someUN training, also home to the US Army Urban Warfare Training school ¡°StemVillage¡±. Warsaw ¨C Unconfirmed report of a large concentration camp facility.MONTANAMalmstrom AFB ¨C UN aircraft groups stationed here, and possibly a detentionfacility.NEBRASKAScottsbluff ¨C WWII German POW camp (renovated?). Northwest, Northeast cornersof state ¨C FEMA detention facilities ¨C more data needed. South Central part ofstate ¨C Many old WWII sites ¨C some may be renovated.NEVADAElko ¨C Ten miles south of town. Wells ¨C Camp is located in the O¡¯Niel basinarea, 40 miles north of Wells, past Thousand Springs, west off Hwy 93 for 25miles. Pershing County ¨C Camp is located at I-80 mile marker 112, south side ofthe highway, about a mile back on the county road and then just off the roadabout 3/4mi. Winnemucca ¨C Battle Mountain area ¨C at the base of the mountains.Nellis Air Force Range ¨C Northwest from Las Vegas on Route 95. Nellis AFB isjust north of Las Vegas on Hwy 604. Stillwater Naval Air Station ¨C east of Reno. No additional data.NEW HAMPSHIRE / VERMONTNorthern New Hampshire ¨C near Lake Francis. No additional data.NEW JERSEYFt. Dix / McGuire AFB ¨C Possible deportation point for detainees. Lots ofpictures taken of detention compounds and posted on Internet, this camp iswell-known. Facility is now complete and ready for occupancy.NEW MEXICOFt. Bliss ¨C This base actually straddles Texas state line. Just south ofAlomogordo, Ft. Bliss has thousands of acres for people who refuse to go withthe ¡°New Order¡±. Holloman AFB (Alomogordo)- Home of the German Luftwaffe inAmerika; major UN base. New facility being built on this base, according torecent visitors. Many former USAF buildings have been torn down by the busy andrapidly growing German military force located here. Fort Stanton ¨C currentlybeing used as a youth detention facility approximately 35 miles north ofRuidoso, New Mexico. Not a great deal of information concerning the Lordsburglocation. White Sands Missile Range ¨C Currently being used as a storagefacility for United Nations vehicles and equipment. Observers have seen thismaterial brought in on the Whitesands rail spur in Oro Grande New Mexico aboutthirty miles from the Texas, New Mexico Border.NEW YORKFt. Drum ¨C two compounds: Rex 84 detention camp and FEMA detention facility.Albany ¨C FEMA detention facility. Otisville ¨C Federal correctional facility,near Middletown. Buffalo ¨C FEMA detention facility.NORTH CAROLINACamp Lejeune / New River Marine Airfield ¨C facility has renovated, occupiedWWII detention compounds and ¡°mock city¡± that closely resembles Anytown, USA.Fort Bragg ¨C Special Warfare Training Center. Renovated WWII detentionfacility. Andrews ¨C Federal experiment in putting a small town under siege.Began with the search/ hunt for survivalist Eric Rudolph. No persons wereallowed in or out of town without federal permission and travel through town washighly restricted. Most residents compelled to stay in their homes. UnregisteredBaptist pastor from Indiana visiting Andrews affirmed these facts.NORTH DAKOTAMinot AFB ¨C Home of UN air group. More data needed on facility.OHIOCamp Perry ¨C Site renovated; once used as a POW camp to house German andItalian prisoners of WWII. Some tar paper covered huts built for housing theseprisoners are still standing. Recently, the construction of multiple 200-manbarracks have replaced most of the huts. Cincinnati, Cleveland, Columbus ¨C FEMAdetention facilities. Data needed. Lima ¨C FEMA detention facility. Anotherfacility located in/near old stone quarry near Interstate 75. Railroad access toproperty, fences etc.OKLAHOMATinker AFB (OKC) ¨C All base personnel are prohibited from going near civiliandetention area, which is under constant guard. Will Rogers World Airport ¨CFEMA¡¯s main processing center for west of the Mississippi. All personnel arekept out of the security zone. Federal prisoner transfer center located here (Apentagon-shaped building where airplanes can taxi up to). Photos have been takenand this site will try to post soon! El Reno ¨C Renovated federal internmentfacility with CURRENT population of 12,000 on Route 66. McAlester ¨C near ArmyMunitions Plant property ¨C former WWII German / Italian POW camp designated forfuture use. Ft. Sill (Lawton) ¨C Former WWII detention camps. More data stillneeded.OREGONSheridan ¨C Federal prison satellite camp northwest of Salem. Josephine County¨C WWII Japanese internment camp ready for renovation. Sheridan ¨C FEMAdetention center. Umatilla ¨C New prison spotted.PENNSYLVANIAAllenwood ¨C Federal prison camp located south of Williamsport on theSusquehanna River. It has a current inmate population of 300, and is identifiedby William Pabst as having a capacity in excess of 15,000 on 400 acres.Indiantown Gap Military Reservation ¨C located north of Harrisburg. Used forWWII POW camp and renovated by Jimmy Carter. Was used to hold Cubans duringMariel boat lift.Camp Hill ¨C State prison close to Army depot. Lots of room, located in CampHill, Pa. New Cumberland Army Depot ¨C on the Susquehanna River, located offInterstate 83 and Interstate 76.Schuylkill Haven ¨C Federal prison camp, north of Reading.SOUTH CAROLINAGreenville ¨C Unoccupied youth prison camp; total capacity unknown.Charleston ¨C Naval Reserve & Air Force base, restricted area on naval base.SOUTH DAKOTAYankton ¨C Federal prison campBlack Hills Nat¡¯l Forest ¨C north of Edgemont, southwest part of state. WWIIinternment camp being renovated.TENNESSEEFt. Campbell ¨C Next to Land Between the Lakes; adjacent to airfield and US Alt.41.Millington ¨C Federal prison camp next door to Memphis Naval Air Station.Crossville ¨C Site of WWII German / Italian prison camp is renovated; completedbarracks and behind the camp in the woods is a training facility with high tightropes and a rappelling deck.Nashville ¨C There are two buildings built on State property that are definitelybuilt to hold prisoners. They are identical buildings ¨C side by side on OldBriley Parkway. High barbed wire fence that curves inward.TEXASAustin ¨C Robert Mueller Municipal airport has detenion areas inside hangars.Bastrop ¨C Prison and military vehicle motor pool.Eden ¨C 1500 bed privately run federal center. Currently holds illegal aliens.Ft. Hood (Killeen) ¨C Newly built concentration camp, with towers, barbed wireetc., just like the one featured in the movie Amerika. Mock city for NWO shock-force training. Some footage of this area was used in ¡°Waco: A New Revelation¡±Reese AFB (Lubbock) ¨C FEMA designated detention facility.Sheppard AFB ¨C in Wichita Falls just south of Ft. Sill, OK. FEMA designateddetention facility.North Dallas ¨C near Carrolton ¨C water treatment plant, close to interstate andrailroad.Mexia ¨C East of Waco 33mi.; WWII German facility may be renovated.Amarillo ¨C FEMA designated detention facilityFt. Bliss (El Paso) ¨C Extensive renovation of buildings and from what patriotshave been able to see, many of these buildings that are being renovated arebeing surrounded by razor wire.Beaumont / Port Arthur area ¨C hundreds of acres of federal camps already builton large-scale detention camp design, complete with the double rows of chainlink fencing with razor type concertina wire on top of each row. Some (but notall) of these facilities are currently being used for low-risk state prisonerswho require a minimum of supervision.Ft. Worth ¨C Federal prison under construction on the site of Carswell AFB.UTAHMillard County ¨C Central Utah ¨C WWII Japanese camp. (Renovated?)Ft. Douglas ¨C This ¡°inactive¡± military reservation has a renovated WWIIconcentration camp.Migratory Bird Refuge ¨C West of Brigham City ¨C contains a WWII internment campthat was built before the game preserve was established.Cedar City ¨C east of city ¨C no data available. Wendover ¨C WWII internmentcamp may be renovated.Skull Valley ¨C southwestern Camp William property ¨C east of the old bombingrange. Camp was accidentally discovered by a man and his son who were rabbithunting; they were discovered and apprehended. SW of Tooele.VIRGINIAFt. A.P. Hill (Fredericksburg) ¨C Rex 84 / FEMA facility. Estimated capacity45,000.Petersburg ¨C Federal satellite prison camp, south of Richmond.WEST VIRGINIABeckley ¨C Alderson ¨C Lewisburg ¨C Former WWII detention camps that are nowconverted into active federal prison complexes capable of holding several timestheir current populations. Alderson is presently a women¡¯s federal reformatory.Morgantown ¨C Federal prison camp located in northern WV; just north ofKingwood.Mill Creek ¨C FEMA detention facility.Kingwood ¨C Newly built detention camp at Camp Dawson Army Reservation. Moredata needed on Camp Dawson.WASHINGTONSeattle/Tacoma ¨C SeaTac Airport: fully operational federal transfer centerOkanogan County ¨C Borders Canada and is a site for a massive concentration campcapable of holding hundreds of thousands of people for slave labor. This isprobably one of the locations that will be used to hold hard core patriots whowill be held captive for the rest of their lives.Sand Point Naval Station ¨C Seattle ¨C FEMA detention center used activelyduring the 1999 WTO protests to classify prisoners.Ft. Lewis / McChord AFB ¨C near Tacoma ¨C This is one of several sites that maybe used to ship prisoners overseas for slave labor.WISCONSINFt. McCoy ¨C Rex 84 facility with several complete interment compounds.Oxford ¨C Central part of state ¨C Federal prison & staellite camp and FEMAdetention facility.WYOMINGHeart Mountain ¨C Park County N. of Cody ¨C WWII Japanese interment camp readyfor renovation.Laramie ¨C FEMA detention facilitySouthwest ¨C near Lyman ¨C FEMA detention facilityEast Yellowstone ¨C Manned internment facility ¨C Investigating patriots wereapprehended by European soldiers speaking in an unknown language. Federalgovernment assumed custody of the persons and arranged their release.OTHER LOCATIONS IN THE UNITED STATESThere are many other locations not listed above that are worthy of considerationas a possible detention camp site, but due to space limitations and the timeneeded to verify, could not be included here. Virtually all militaryreservations, posts, bases, stations, & depots can be considered highly suspect(because it is ¡°federal¡± land). Also fitting this category are ¡°RegionalAirports¡± and ¡°International Airports¡± which also fall under federaljurisdiction and have limited-access areas. Mental hospitals, closed hospitals &nursing homes, closed military bases, wildlife refuges, state prisons, toxicwaste dumps, hotels and other areas all have varying degrees of potential forbeing a detention camp area. The likelihood of a site being suspect increaseswith transportation access to the site, including airports/airstrips, railheads,navigable waterways & ports, interstate and US highways. Some facilities are¡°disguised¡± as industrial or commercial properties, camouflaged or even whollycontained inside large buildings (Indianapolis) or factories. Many inner-citybuildings left vacant during the de-industrialization of America have beenquietly acquired and held, sometimes retrofitted for their new uses.CANADAOur Canadian friends tell us that virtually all Canadian military bases,especially those north of the 50th Parallel, are all set up with concentrationcamps. Not even half of these can be listed, but here are a few sites with themassive land space to handle any population:Suffield CFB ¨C just north of Medicine Hat, less than 60 miles from the USA.Primrose Lake Air Range ¨C 70 miles northeast of Edmonton.Wainwright CFB ¨C halfway between Medicine Hat and Primrose Lake.Ft. Nelson ¨C Northernmost point on the BC Railway line.Ft. McPherson ¨C Very cold territory ~ NW Territories. Ft. Providence ¨C Locatedon Great Slave Lake. Halifax ¨C Nova Scotia. Dept. of National Defensereserve¡. And others.OVERSEAS LOCATIONSGuayanabo, Puerto Rico ¨C Federal prison camp facility. Capacity unknown.Guantanamo Bay, Cuba ¨C US Marine Corps Base ¨C Presently home to 30,000 MarielCubans and 40,000 Albanians. Total capacity unknown.*** [If you found this article of interest, please consider perusing theFriendsOfLiberty/SiaNews archivesPlease also consider registering (free) as a FriendOfLiberty at our Front Page,and taking the current Poll: Should the Council on Foreign Relations beInvestigated for Treaso

The Dark Rift | 13th House of the Zodiac |Ophiucus

2009-07-11T14:40:00.000-07:00

The Dark Rift 13th House of the Zodiac OphiucusThe Dark RiftThe 13th House of the Zodiac is called Ophiuchus. If you are following aGregorian Calendar to keep track of time then you are a Sagittarian if you wereborn between November 22 and December 21 but to the the true laws of theUniverse would tell you differently. The Sun is passing through the House ofOphiuchus, the Serpent Bearer, between November 30th and December 17th. This isa yearly astronomical ritual that has been recurring for milleniums. AncientAstronomers would have known this.During these few weeks in December, every year the atmosphere changes. If youfeel more light headed than usual it may be due to the increased heliumparticles in the air which is coming into the planetary system from aninterstellar wind.This presents no danger for humanity at the moment states NASA but things couldchange if the level of helium particles was to increase. Don't take my word forit check out the audio version of NASA's article on the 13th House of theZodiac.I will allow myself to fantasize about what could possibly happen on December21st, 2012.NASA and other astrologers are well aware of the cosmic alignments due duringthe winter solstice of 2012. This will be different than previous years becauseof the perfect alignment which only occurs every 26000 years according to theancient astronomical calendars. The amount of Helium will increase every yearuntil then and the people of the third rock from the Sun will be floating oncloud nine - this will give rise to a powerful ecclesiastic spiritual shift ofconsciousness to humanity."Meaningless! Meaningless!"says the Teacher."Utterly meaningless!Everything is meaningless."3 What does man gain from all his laborat which he toils under the sun?4 Generations come and generations go,but the earth remains forever.5 The sun rises and the sun sets,and hurries back to where it rises.6 The wind blows to the southand turns to the north;round and round it goes,ever returning on its course.7 All streams flow into the sea,yet the sea is never full.To the place the streams come from,there they return again.8 All things are wearisome,more than one can say.The eye never has enough of seeing,nor the ear its fill of hearing.9 What has been will be again,what has been done will be done again;there is nothing new under the sun.10 Is there anything of which one can say,"Look! This is something new"?It was here already, long ago;it was here before our time.11 There is no remembrance of men of old,and even those who are yet to comewill not be rememberedby those who follow.5 years left....4 ....3.....two....and humanity reachesNirvana (Nirúvaúna) (nŒr-v„1ne, ner-) n.[Sanskrit, nirvƒNam, a blowing out, extinction, nirvana: nis-, nir-, out, away +vƒti, it blows. Pali, nibbana; Jap., nehan]1. Often Nirvana, a. Buddhism. The ineffable ultimate in which one has attaineddisinterested wisdom and compassion. b. Hinduism. Emancipation from ignoranceand the extinction of all attachment.2. An ideal condition of rest, harmony, stability, or joy.3. The ability to consciously pause an activity or activities of the mind. Hermind became inactive, the result was the experience of nirvana.4. A state of liberation from unhappiness. Illumination, characterized by themerging of the individual, transitory I in consciousness. Nirvana frees one fromsuffering and fear of death. It is the highest, transcendent consciousness,referred to in the Bhagavad-Gita as brahman-nirvana, in the Upanishads asturiya, in yoga as nirbija-samadhi, and in Vedanta as nirvikalpa-samadhi.5. The goal of spiritual practice in all branches of Buddhism. In theunderstanding of early Buddhism, it is departure from the cycle of unhappinessand entry into an entirely different mode of existence. It requires completeovercoming of the three unwholesome roots--undisciplined-desire, hatred, anddelusion (akushala). Nirvana is unconditioned (asamskrita) consciousness. Itscharacteristic marks are pausing the activities of the mind in a state ofconsciousness.6. In Mahayana, nirvana is an emphasis on the unified nature of the world.Nirvana is conceived as a human experience of oneness with unconditionedconsciousness (the absolute). Which gives insight into the unity of the world(samsara), body, mind and soul. It is a state of transcending conditionedconsciousness. It is also described as dwelling in the experience of the intensebliss in cognizing one's identity with unconditioned consciousness. It isfreedom from attachment to the states of unhappiness, satisfaction andhappiness.7. In the West nirvana has often been misunderstood as mere annihilation; evenin early Buddhism it was not so conceived. Nirvana literally means "The blowingout of a candle". The fire that goes out does not pass away, but merely becomesinvisible by passing into a conscious experience of space (akasha); thus theterm nirvana does not indicate annihilation but rather entry into another modeof existence and experience. The fire that comes forth is the self. Fromconsciously experiencing space the self dissolves momentarily. Self-flame thusreturns back, and the conscious experience of space dissolves. Thus nirvana is aspecial experience not conceived by the perception of sight, but rather byconsciously discarding conditioned brainwave activity. It is an experience thattakes place in time but is also a timeless experience. This is the "emptiness"which is referred to in Buddhist Sutras.8. Nirvana means "bliss," but far more often nirvana is characterized merely asa process of the cessation of the states of unhappiness, satisfaction, andhappiness. For Buddhism, which sees all of human existence as suffering, nirvanainterpreted as the cessation of suffering suffices as a goal for the spiritualeffort.9. In Hinayana two types of nirvana are distinguished: nirvana which consists ofknowledge and nirvana where knowledge exists though in an uncreated form. Bothbeing experiences of different modes of consciousness. It is reached throughsuccessively overcoming the various states of mind; knowledge of unhappiness,knowledge of satisfaction and knowledge of happiness. For the overcoming of eachstate a specific "realm of knowledge" is acquired. For the Sautrantikas nirvanais just the transcendence of the lower states of knowledge; unhappiness,satisfaction and happiness, but not their complete disappearance. The knowledgeof nirvana is based on knowledge of unhappiness, satisfaction and happiness.Therefore, transcendence means additional knowledge, not discarding ofknowledge. In the Vatsiputriya school, which puts forth the idea of the"individual" (pudgala, anatman), nirvana is a positive state in which theindividual's knowledge continues to exist and grow, but is easily turned offwhen not needed. Leaving a bright clear consciousness associated with sight,hearing, touch, taste and smell. Thinking becomes focused, direct and clear.10. In Mahayana nirvana has a positive character, since it is state of awarenessof one's identity with unclouded consciousness. The experience of unity thatencompasses the experiencer includes one's own body and mind. In this view,there is no essential distinction between the soul, mind, body or world, becausethey are experienced in an interconnected way.11. Two types of nirvana are distinguished: indeterminate(apratishthita-nirvana) and complete (pratishthita-nirvana). In actuality, theexperiencer moves between both types of nirvana. Having the capability to ceasethe activities of the mind and to create mental activity in various combinationsof thought, seeing, hearing and remembering, etc.12. The Madhyamikas see nirvana as emptiness (shunyata), which they define as"coming to rest of the manifold creations of the mind." This means the cessationor absence (temporarily) of the activity of the mind. Nirvana is a consciousexperience of the oneness with reality that had always existed, only is notrecognized. Nirvana and samsara are not different if one perceives the world inits true nature, which is emptiness. It is our discriminating mind that preventsus from recognizing this true nature.13. Nirvana for the Yogachara is the awareness that the world as we know it is amanifestation of the mind. This "mind-only" teaching is the cessation ofdiscrimination of the world, nirvana and all objects. Experiences are made ofobjects in the presence of the senses interacting with the mind. The perceptionthat the objects seen are separate from the mind are created as a result of anunconsciousness mind. This school recognizes two types of nirvana: that of thearhat, with whom, only silent knowledge remains. It is a coming to rest, aconsciously experienced bliss. The nirvana of the Buddha is seen as a consciousexercise of compassion. Where the Buddha knowingly seeks ways to help othersattain nirvana. In this form of nirvana, which exhibits a positive character andrepresents conscious unity with all beings, the individual continues in force.14. In Zen Buddhism nirvana is the realization of the true nature of the mind(consciousness), which is identical with the true nature of how human beingsexperience their world--the buddha-nature (bussho). This realization is onlypossible through wisdom. Thus nirvana is often equated with prajna. In the Zensense, prajna and nirvana are two aspects of the same state. Nirvana is thestate in which a person lives who has attained prajna and thus also insight intohis own mind or true nature; and prajna is the wisdom of a person who hasattained nirvana. "The Bodhisattva's nirvana is perfect tranquillity, but it isnot extinction nor inertness." Buddha, Lankavatara Scripture, Goddard.15. Early Chinese Buddhism, which originated the Nirvana School in the 5thcentury, includes the teachings of the Mahaparinirvana-sutra. The teachings ofthis sutra are nirvana is eternal, joyous, personal, and pure in nature. Thiscontrasts with the view put forward in the Prajnaparamita-sutra, in whichnirvana is described as the realization of emptiness (shunyata). All beingspossess buddha-nature and can attain buddhahood. In this sense the true self islike the Tathagata. The Nirvana school also originated the practice, socharacteristic of Chinese Buddhism, of dividing the teachings of the Buddha intophases. The Mahaparinirvana-sutra is considered to be the last of the Buddha'sdiscourses.

Time Wave Zero - Terence Mckenna

2009-07-11T14:37:00.000-07:00

Time Wave Zero - Terence MckennaMake your own waves.Terence Mckenna was born in 1946 and passed away on April 23rd 2000. He spentthe better part of his life experimenting and writing about shamanism and thespiritual transformations induced by pharmacological agents such has mushrooms.He was the founder of Novelty Theory.Some of the books he wrote includeFood of the GodsThe Magic Mushrooms Growers GuideThe Invisible LandscapeTrue Hallucinations. His studies took him to the depths of the Asian and NewWorld Tropics where he studied ethno-medicine and the works of shamans. Hereturned to America to continue lecturing and writing and experimenting.The Novelty Theory attempts to calculate the ebb and flow of novelty in theuniverse as an inherent quality of time. According to the Novelty Theory,newness presents itself as a dynamic instead of a static constant that presentitself in fractal patterns or waveforms that he called Timewave Zero. Thesewaves can be recorded on graphs which will show when newness is increasing ordecreasing. The times of change can be pinpointed to but not the locations. Muchof Mckenna's Timewave Zero concept is formed on the authors interpretation ofthe I Ching and analysis of numerical patterns. McKenna's Novelty Theory is nota mainstream contender in the scientific arena. McKenna's Theory points to adate in the near future where anything and everything conceivable by the humanimagination will happen simultaneously. "Something like a psychedelic mushroomtrip". This is the Omega Point and according to his calculations these eventswill occur about the same time has the final date of the Mayan Calendar which isduring the Winter Solstice of 2012. In McKenna's vision UFO's, time travel, newconscience, AI (artificial intelligence) all play a role in the finalmanifestation that lead to a new universe.Unfortunately he is not around to witness it in a carnal way.

The Oracle of Apollo at Delphi

2009-07-11T14:35:00.000-07:00

The Oracle of Apollo at DelphiThe Universal Clock falls back in time and we find ourselves in a temple. Thissanctuary is situated beneath the "Shining Rocks" of the Mount Parnassus. Peopleflock to this very spot and have done so for centuries in the hopes of findingtruths, inspiration, and guidance, through a spiritual connection to the GodApollo.The famed mathematician Pythogoras came here and he brought with him a younggirl whom he trained to be the channeling agent between himself - the seeker -and the God Apollo. She became a priestess or Pythia. Over the centuries manysuch priestesses were trained as divine channels. The Pythia (channel or voiceof God)was also known as a Sibylla (or Sibyl the Prophetess) went on to divinefor such famed people has Alexander the Great, Lykurgos, and Oedipus. Kings fromall over were sending Caravans of people to the Shining Rocks for guidance andinspiration.Ask a question and i will give you guidance as summoned to me through GodApollo.The Shining Rock was but one of many places where priestesses were trained.What occult powers could be at work at the sanctuary at Delphi that could turn apeasant or a King into a visionary. Why were mere mortals able to divine spiritat those moments when the air could fill their lungs with the scent of a sweetperfume. If the timing was correct, even a beast would show signs of change uponentering the Shining Rocks of Mount Parnassus.The area of Delphi was originally called Pytho and the first sanctuary isbelieved to have been erected in the 8th Century BC.Time moved forward and the Oracle fell silent. The well of knowledge had rundry.Today people visit the site but mostly what they see are statuesque remnants ofa great historical period.What became of the prophecies?Some Sybilla prophecies were recorded on parchment and passed from generation togeneration. The most talked about Sybil Prophecy of this age is the prophecywhich mentions 9 periods of 800 years. The age after the ninth period is filledwith doom and gloom.The Sybilline ProphecyThe things in the tenth generation shall come to pass. The Earth shall be shakenby a great earthquake that throws many cities into the sea. There shall be war.Fire shall come flashing down from the heavens and many cities burn. Black ashesshall fill the great sky. Then know the Anger of the Gods.The Syballine OraclesPerhaps God Apollo's own advice may be the best legacy of this period."Know thyself, and turn inward for counsel. Make of that counsel what you want."

Nine Insights of Celestine Prophecy

2009-07-11T14:32:00.000-07:00

Nine Insights of Celestine ProphecyCelestine ProphecyThe nine insights:Increased consciousness or intuitiveness of self in wholeIncreased consciousness to include historical perspective to see how we humanshave drifted away from the spiritual self to money and time slavesIncreased consciousness of our physical self to the metaphysical or spiritualwholeIncreased consciousness of how self seeking control of others is but a way ofstealing the energy of another.Increased consciousness of the limitless amount of energy in that is availableto all which eliminates the need to control or steal others energy.Increased consciousness and ability to tap into the infinite energy of theUniverse including of other humans. Learning to break through the defensemechanisms that we all display as Intimidation, Interrogation, Self Pity, orDissociation.Increased consciousness of being in the flow of evolution, of being a recorderand receiver of this energy.Increased consciousness of being one with the whole and interacting with anotherindividual or as part of a group so that all involved evolve through the flow ofthis energy. The antecedent to this is to control the other or the group forself seeking measures.Increased consciousness of how life outside of humanity needs room to grow.This last insight states that has we evolve, by intuition we will understandthat the trees create high energy zones and the bigger the tree then the biggerthe amount of energy. Therefore we will intuitively reduce the population andallow the trees to grow. Eventually, has the number of humans grow inconsciousness we will reach the asymptote and from there the growth willcompound itself to a point where everyone will be living this intuitive lifewith a common cause of evolution of the species within a whole.Though the Celestine Prophecy is based on a fictional Peruvian manuscript, it isno less thought inspiring. It is a Novel written by James Redfield and describesa future where mankind undergoes a massive transformation. At first a few peoplestart to sense that there is more to life than control of others through themanipulation of their minds and assets. These intuitives are the first to beginthe evolution that will soon manifest itself in all humans. This may soundUtopic, but it is a far saner picture than what we are exposed to in under thepresent world conditions. We have been conditioned as financial slaves and weare trained from infancy to control our environment in order to receivepayment(food, love, and safety initially until we reach adulthood - then it'smoney). The result of which is what Redfield calls Control Drama. These are thewalls or the barriers that we erect around us. Each one of us uses some of thesedefenses against people who feel the need to energize themselves by controllingus. Whether it's done through interrogation, intimidation, self pity, ordissociation, we are all victims and perpetrators of spiritual theft. The resultof which is a world of hate, distrust, and chaos. To add insult to injury webring our self seeking sickness into the rest of the physical world.The beauty of the Celestine Prophecy is it's final result. The 100th Monkey isreplayed in the human consciousness and we become a better, though leanerspecies. The shift of an old paradigm is complete and we live on believing thisto be the best that there is until............

Solar Cycle 24 will be big and intense. Peaking in 2011 or 2012

2009-07-11T14:31:00.000-07:00

NASA recently published report detailing new magnetism on the Sun that willprobably result in Major Solar Changes and destruction of satellitecommunications, GPS, Air Traffic, and Power Grids.The report clearly states that a new Solar Cycle is possible resulting from aknot of magnetism that popped over the sun's eastern limb on Dec. 11th 2007.The report goes on to mention specific years which major Earthly impact will beseen. The exact quote which mentions these years states"Many forecasters believe Solar Cycle 24 will be big and intense. Peaking in2011 or 2012, the cycle to come could have significant impacts ontelecommunications, air traffic, power grids and GPS systems. (And don't forgetthe Northern Lights!) In this age of satellites and cell phones, the next solarcycle could make itself felt as never before."I find it quite a coincidence that this major happening is forecasted for 2012,as this exact timing correlates to the ancient Mayan prediction of the end ofthe dimension.The 2012 (End Of The World) theory has been gaining much popularity the last fewyears. Some predictions include a great human consciousness awakening, the riseof the anti-christ, alien visitation and attacks, a polar flip, and a greatalignment in which the Sun will line up with the center of the galaxy causingmassive destruction.Although we are not sure of the exact events that will transpire, the evidenceis becoming clear that something is in store for us Earthlings.Many people are starting to prepare both physically and mentally for theupcoming changes, but as of now, trustworthy guides on exact preparation plansare scarce. As this situation winds down, and we get closer to the predictedfinal year, we can only hope more information becomes available to us.

Mysterious tremors detected on San Andreas Fault

2009-07-11T14:27:00.000-07:00

Mysterious tremors detected on San Andreas FaultLOS ANGELES — Scientists have detected a spike in underground rumblings on asection of California's San Andreas Fault that produced a magnitude-7.8earthquake in 1857.What these mysterious vibrations say about future earthquakes is far fromcertain. But some think the deep tremors suggest underground stress may bebuilding up faster than expected and may indicate an increased risk of a majortemblor.Researchers at the University of California, Berkeley, monitored seismicactivity on the fault's central section between July 2001 and February 2009 andrecorded more than 2,000 tremors. The tremors lasted mere minutes to nearly halfan hour.Unlike earthquakes, tremors occur deeper below the surface and the shaking lastslonger.During the study period, two strong earthquakes hit — a magnitude-6.5 in 2003and a magnitude-6.0 a year later. Scientists noticed the frequency of thetremors doubled after the 2003 quake and jumped six-fold after 2004.Tremor episodes persist today. Though the frequency of tremors have declinedsince 2004, scientists are still concerned because they are still at a levelthat is twice as high as before the 2003 quake.The team also recorded unusually strong rumblings days before the 2004 temblor.Results of the research appear in Friday's issue of the journal Science. Thework was funded by the U.S. Geological Survey and National Science Foundation."The fact that the tremors haven't gone down means the time to the nextearthquake may come sooner," said Berkeley seismologist and lead researcherRobert Nadeau.Nadeau first discovered tremors deep in the San Andreas Fault in 2005. Beforethat, the phenomenon was thought only to occur in Earth's subduction zones,where one tectonic plate dives beneath another.USGS seismologist Susan Hough found the latest observations intriguing, but saidit's too soon to know what they mean."We don't have enough data to know what the fault is doing in the long term,"said Hough, who had no part in the research.———On the Net:Science: http://www.sciencemag.orgU.S. Geological Survey: http://www.usgs.gov

The Orion Prophecy

2009-07-11T14:24:00.000-07:00

The Orion ProphecyPart 1 : The upsideAfter months of waiting, The Orion Prophecy by Patrick Geryl and Gino Ratinckxwas finally published in December 2001, by Adventures Unlimited. Patrick hadkindly sent me the manuscript to read, about 3 months before publication, and wecorresponded regarding certain aspects of the book. I decided to wait until thefinal version was published before reviewing the book, and I'm glad I did,because in the final version, the translation from Belgian to English had beentidied up. Also the inclusion of pictures made the text much easier tounderstand.Patrick Geryl had been following a fruit and vegetable diet, to improvelongevity, and had several pension plans, that were to mature in 2015, and couldnot be cashed before that year. Then he read The Mayan Prophecies, by Gilbertand Cotterell, (see item 3), which concluded that the Maya had based their LongCount calendar around long-term magnetic cycles of the Sun, and that the worldfaced a catastrophe in the year 2012. Geryl was so convinced by the book that hecancelled his pension plans, after 20 years of subscriptions, and started hisown investigation into the matter, to look for more evidence. Part 2: The down-sideGeryl and Ratinckx go on to conclude that Maurice Cotterell (in The MayanProphecies) was right, and that the cataclysm will be caused by a major magneticreversal on the Sun, that reverses the earth's magnetic poles, and they also(p.152) repeat from The Mystery of the Crystal Skulls (Morton & Thomas p.206);"just before sunset, Central American time, 21-22* December 2012", that "Venussinks below the western horizon, and at the same time, the Pleiades will riseabove the horizon in the east. Symbolically speaking, we will see the death ofVenus and the birth of the Pleiades" This, they say, means a new precessionalcycle. Morton & Thomas got the whole idea from Adrian Gilbert, (Cotterell'sco-author of The Mayan Prophecies,) who based it around his discovery that theBirth of Venus occurred in the same symbolic way, on 12 August 3114 BC, at thestart of the current 13-Baktun cycle (see item 35 ). However, John Major Jenkinschecked and double-checked Gilbert's claims and found Gilbert had made amistake. He then interviewed him, but Gilbert had no explanation (click here forthe interview). In the same interview, regarding the observation that thecomplex mathematics and graphs in The Mayan Prophecies do not actually explainthe end of the 13-Baktun cycle in 2012, Gilbert's answers were not convincing(see item 3 ) *Morton & Thomas have "21 December 2012"Apart from the authors' endorsement of The Mayan Prophecies, there are severalother points that did not quite add up.The first is the authors' identificationof the Amenhemet III pyramid at Hawara with the star Aldebaran. As you can seein this map of the Nile area (from The Complete Pyramids by Mark Lehner, Orionadded), when Orion is drawn to scale, with the belt stars aligned to the 3 Gizapyramids, Aldebaran's position ( in the constellation of Taurus), is nowherenear the Hawara area - not even in the same direction.This means that the identification of the Labyrinth building with the Hyades(the astronomical Labyrinth) is also wrong. I haven't got a map showing Denderaand Esna's positions in relation to Giza, so I can't comment on those.

Hall of Records

2009-07-11T14:22:00.000-07:00

Hall of RecordsHe read other books, including The Path of The Pole by Hapgood; John AnthonyWest's Serpent in the Sky; and Keepers of Genesis by Hancock and Bauval. Theseauthors provided evidence that, at the end of the last Ice Age, a race of peoplesettled in Egypt following a catastrophe in which their own homeland disappeared(i.e. Atlantis). The Sphinx and pyramids were remnants of those times, about10,500 years ago, and encoded into them was information about the catastrophe.West and Hancock and Bauval all thought that there was a Hall of Records buriedat Giza, which would contain detailed records of the Atlantean civilization andthe catastrophe that ended it.Geryl got an intuitive feeling that the answer was in the Zodiacs of DenderaTemple in Egypt, - that the rectangular zodiac in particular, contains codedinformation about the catastrophe that ended Atlantis, and how to calculate whenthe cycle would recur. He enlisted the help of a Belgian astronomer - GinoRatinckx, who had studied the Dendera Temple and Mayan hieroglyphs. Ratinckxsuggested that Geryl read a rare translation of the Egyptian Book of the Dead,by the Frenchman Albert Slosman, and Geryl was so amazed by what he read, thathe forgot all about the Dendera zodiac. This is a shame, since David Pratt haspublished information (on the internet here ) on the Dendera zodiacs that findsencoded 3 previous world catastrophes - just as Slosman had discovered bydecoding the Egyptian Book of the Dead (which should more accurately be called"The Book of Coming Forth by Day"), and John lash has found 2012 encoded in theround zodiac of Dendera (see item 38 ).Slosman's translation is called Le Livre de l'Au-Dela de la Vie , and The OrionProphecy includes some extracts, together with the original hieroglyphs. Iwanted to compare the translation with that of Wallis Budge, and was at firstconfused by the fact that Geryl and Ratinckx don't mention which chapter theextracts are from. Patrick supplied me with some photocopied pages fromSlosman's book, which identified the chapter as Chapter 17. Another point foranyone wishing to compare the translations, is that Budge lists the manuscriptby line number, while Geryl and Ratinckx only provide line numbers for the lastof 5 extracts, and these numbers differ from Budge's. For those of you who wishto compare, see note 1. Once you have found the chapter and line in Budge andcompared it, you may be surpised to find that the translations are completelydifferent. Since Budge was a respected Egyptologist, and Keeper of Egyptian andAssyrian Antiquities at the British Museum, this seems a little odd. However, onpage 14-15 of Slosman's book, he gives his own translation of the "premierverset" (verse one), which is the end of line 5 up to line 9. He then compareshis translation to four others 2 that are all very different, and comments thatthe others have allowed their Christian cultural bias to infect the translation,and that is why their efforts are "perfectly incomprehensible". It must be said;Slosman's translation - at least, the parts I've seen, does seem to be lessawkward, and to make more sense than the others (including Budge). Anyway, ifyou aren't convinced, you must suspend disbelief awhile longer...

Earth shifted 15 cms in Italy quake

2009-07-11T14:16:00.000-07:00

Earth shifted 15 cms in Italy quake: satellite imagesAFP - Sat Apr 11, 2:13 PM ETROME (AFP) - The earth in the region of L'Aquila, the central Italian town hitby a major earthquake Monday, shifted by up to 15 centimetres (six inches), theItalian space agency said Saturday.

Underground Bases And Preparations For Planet X

2009-07-11T14:14:00.000-07:00

http://projectcamelot.org/norway.htmlUnderground Bases And Preparations For Planet XThe person who wrote this message to us did so under their own name (which wehave checked), and enclosed a number of photographs of them with the PrimeMinister of Norway and (separately) with Benazir Bhutto. We are certain of theirbona fides, but you will understand that we cannot reveal their real name orpublish any photos without consent. The content of this message, if true, couldhardly be more important.[Edited for grammar and spelling errors where needed to ensure full clarity. Asa preface to the message, the writer apologized for their English, which is nottheir language.]_____________________________I am a Norwegian politician. I would like to say that difficult things willhappen from the year 2008 till the year 2012. The Norwegian government isbuilding more and more underground bases and bunkers. When asked, they simplysay that it is for the protection of the people of Norway. When I enquire whenthey are due to be finished, they reply "before 2011". Israel is also doing thesame and many other countries too. My proof that what I am saying is true is inthe photographs I have sent of myself and all the Prime Ministers and ministersI tend to meet and am acquainted with. They know all of this, but they don'twant to alarm the people or create mass panic. Planet X is coming, and Norwayhas begun with storage of food and seeds in the Svalbard area and in the arcticnorth with the help of the US and EU and all around in Norway. They will onlysave those that are in the elite of power and those that can build up again:doctors, scientists, and so on.As for me, I already know that I am going to leave before 2012 to go the areaof Mosjøen where we have a deep underground military facility. There we aredivided into sectors, red, blue and green. The signs of the Norwegian militaryare already given to them and the camps have already been built a long time ago.The people that are going to be left on the surface and die with along theothers will get no help whatsoever. The plan is that 2,000,000 Norwegians aregoing to be safe, and the rest will die. That means 2,600,000 will perish intothe night not knowing what to do. All the sectors and arks are connected withtunnels and have railcars that can take you from one ark to the other. This isso that they can be in contact with each other. Only the large doors separatethem so that the sectors are not compromised in any matter. I am very sad. OftenI cry with others that know that so many will learn too late, and then it willall be over for them. The government has been lying to the people from 1983 tillnow. All the major politicians know this in Norway, but few will say it to thepeople and the public - because they are afraid in case they too will miss theNOAH 12 railcars that will take them to the ark sites where they will be safe.If they tell anyone, they are dead for sure. But I don't care any more aboutmyself. Mankind must survive and the species must survive. People must knowthis. All the governments in the world are aware of this and they just say it isgoing to happen. For those of the people that can save themselves I can only sayreach for higher ground and find caves up in the high places where you can havea food storage for at least five years with canned food and water to last for awhile. Radiation pills and biosuits are also advisable if your budget allows it.For the last time I say may God help us all... but God will not help us I know.Only each person individually can make a difference. Wake up, please...! I couldhave written to you using another name but I am not afraid of anything any more.When you know certain things, you become invincible and no harm can come to youwhen you know that the end is soon.I assure you 100% that things will happen. There are four years to prepare forthe endgame. Get weapons, and make survival groups, and a place where you can besafe with food for a time. Ask me anything and I will answer as much as I knowabout the Norwegian connection to all this. And just look around: they arebuilding underground bases and bunkers everywhere. Open your eyes, people. Askthe governments what they are building, and they will say "Oh, it's just storagefor food", and so on. They blind you with all the lies. The marks of the alienpresence are also there, and I often see the Norwegian elite politicians are notwhat they say they are. It's like they are controlled in every thought, and whatthey have to say is just as they are told to do things in such manners. It isclear for me who they are, and who they are not. You can see it in their eyesand in their minds. Remember that those who are going to be in and around thecity areas in 2012 are those that are going to be hit first and die first. Laterthe army will purge the rest of the survivors and they have a shoot to killorder if there is any resistance to bring them into the camps where every onewill get marked with a number and a tag. I also see that Benazir Bhutto isspoken of on your site. Her death was tragic. I have met Benazir, as you cansee. You will also see from the photographs that I have met with a number ofother notable politicians and world leaders. The public will not know whathappens till the very end, because the government does not want to create masspanic. Everything will happen quietly and the government will just disappear.But I say this: don't go quietly into the night. Take precautions to be safewith your family. Come together with others. Work together to find ways to solveall the many problems you will face. Kind regards [Name and proof of identitysupplied]_____________________________From immediate further correspondence, and in response to our specificquestions, we can add the following clarifications in our source's own words:I have been to several underground bases [number given]. We used the railcars toget around. Only a few special people were selected to be shown around. Thosethat run with the elite know of this. I have evidence of my claims. I trust mysources 100%, but they are afraid to tell what they know. People are afraid fortheir lives and that is how it is. I just also want the public to know what thehell is going on. I am not afraid of death or any other thing. All the elitepoliticians in Norway know of this. They also know that if they reveal anythingthey will be removed from office and will be denied access to the differentunderground bases when the time is up. The NOAH 12 railcars are transportrailcars between the different bases underground. They have a support system ofthese all around from one base to another. They are mainly used by the militaryand they control all of them. There are orange triangle symbols in each base andthe check-ins are a kind of energy field that everyone has to go through. Thefuture for my children is all I think of - and that for all the other childrengrowing up in the new world. We have to make a difference for them so that theygrow up knowing what their parents did for them, such as giving this informationto people like yourselves. In 2009 the government of FRP will come into powerand Siv Jensen will be elected Prime Minister. This is already known. It'simportant to understand that. The elections are all fake and the same personsand power elite get elected each time in turn. Look up the political history ofNorway, and the people that run the country now. Please share this informationwith the rest of the internet. When the time comes people will survive becauseof the information they have learned from the different sites on the net. I willnot get anything but trouble from posting this, and I have no need to misleadanyone. I do this only to expose what is to happen in my country and that maybesome people will survive what is to come. Kind regards[Name supplied]_____________________________ After posting the above, we presented morequestions to our source, who replied with the intriguing information whichfollows. The paragraphs indented and marked with an asterisk (*) constitutefurther supplementary information received after we had asked a number ofadditional clarifying questions.When I was in the military I was in the [name of service given]. At one point wewere given a task to get something out of a base and deliver it to another base.We were told: "DO NOT ASK ANY QUESTIONS. JUST DO YOUR JOB." Later, when welanded outside the base, we were taken by trucks to outside the base where therewere large doors heavily guarded by other military personnel. Or it seemed likethey were military, but they had different suits on them: orange and black suitswith the orange suits having a golden triangle on them and the black suitshaving a green triangle. * As far as I can remember the triangle went downwards,like a pyramid but facing down and had some weird kind of sign it it. To me itlooked like the letter 'E', but the lines were not connected in the 'E' like wewrite the letter 'E'. It was shaped like the 'E' and in the middle the letter'E' was pointing inwards... not as in any language I can read or understand, andcertainly not in Norwegian. * The signs were as far as I can remember not on thearms because I saw them clearly... they were at the left side of the black suitjust over the chest area and on the caps they had on. The signs were not thatbig - just as a regular sized patch is, but clear enough to see them. We wentthrough the large doors. I was thinking what the hell is this, and I felt a bitscared at first. It was like something out of a science fiction movie. This wasthe first time I was in such a base.We then came to a 500 meter long tunnel and there were more of these militarypersonnel waiting with guns and transport for us. We were divided up in groups.Some went another way, and I and my group were asked to come with the blacksuited guards so they could take us to another location. When we came to the endwe were asked to put on some masks "for our own protection". I was thinking forour own protection... aren't we already protected by being inside this hugeunderground complex and by guards with weapons? We were then asked to stepinside a railcar... and this is what I know of the railcars. They are run bysome kind of blue crystal energy, I think, or at least that is how it appeared.Then we sat in the cars and I asked one of the guards "What is this?" Hereplied, "You don't need to know this, sir." * At the front where the operatorsits there was a box with a window just besides him, and just when beforepowering up you could see the large purple-blue crystals emitting apurple-bluish light... not blinding you but quite beautiful to watch indeed. Ihave never ever seen such energy light or crystals anywhere. I was thinking thatmust be the power source. * Later on in the base I saw that some people wereworking on these purple-blue crystals. They were larger than the ones I saw inthe railcar - ca. one meter in length and they were lined up one after theother. They were taking some light through them. They were in fact purple-blueand when the light went inside they turned more blue and had a stronger color -the people had white masks on and goggles standing away from them when the lightwas going inside the crystals. I was about 20 meters from them and we werequickly rushed along when they said "Move on now." * I also think that theenergy fields that we went through before entering the check-in were powered bythese crystals, because it was the same kind of light - or so it seemed to me.If I remember more I will let you know. I could see that there was a tube-likesystem and the other railcars were just going so fast you just saw a light goingby. I think this was a vacuum tube system where there is no drag.

Great Cross of Hendaye

2009-07-11T14:09:00.000-07:00

End of Time: Alchemy, Fulcanelli and the Great Cross and Mysteries of the greatCross of Hendaye: Alchemy at the End of Time) it can be stated that the GreatCross at Hendaye appears to be describing not only the end of the great fourages of the Hindu Yuga system but also the four ages of alchemical chronologicaltime keeping. According to the cross at Hendaye the Iron Age, or the Kali Yuga,will be coming to an end with the galactic alignment on the winter solstice ofDecember 21st 2012.According to the mythology of the Yuga system there are four ages of life andtime on our planet. It is important to remember that there are many cycleswithin cycles in the Hindu Yuga system so the years mentioned next may have todo with a larger cycle than the one addressed in this article. Perhaps the hugenumber of years referred to below is the cycle of the solar system as it circlesanother star or perhaps it is a portion of the great cycle of one revolutionaround the galactic center.The first age is the Satya Yuga or the Golden Age according to Fulcanelli. TheHindu texts tell us that this age lasts 1,728,000 years. This is an age ofextreme splendour when the beings on our planet appear to live much longer thanthey do now. In this age there are no wars, famines strife or evil.The second age is called the Treta Yuga, or the Silver age. As in the second lawof thermodynamics, or entropy, things begin to slip in this age and the beingson Earth begin to deteriorate. This slippage, at least during this second age isthe beginning of corruption and evil is introduced into the planetary sphere.This age lasts 1,296,000 years according to the Vedic texts of India.The third age of this cycle is called the Dvapara Age, or the Bronze Age. Thisis the beginning of the `fall' of humanity. In this age corruption comes on morefully, evil begins to spread and things start to fall into disharmony. This agelasts 864,000 years.The last age is called the Kali Yuga, or the Iron Age. This age is the age weare in right now. Evil and corruption become the driving force as greed, wars,famine and disease spread across the planet like a tidal wave of death anddestruction. This age lasts, according to the Hindu texts for 432,000 years.(For more information see also Tolkien at the End of Time: Alchemical Secrets ofthe Lord of the Rings by Jay Weidner and Sharron Rose at jayweidner.com, or seeReflections on the Cycle of the Great Yuga by Sharron Rose at sharronrose.com).What is important to understand while discussing these huge numbers found in theHindu texts is that they are describing the four ages within a context ofunderstanding that each successive age is shorter than the previous age. TheSatya Yuga, or the Golden Age, is one quarter longer than the Treta Yuga, or theSilver Age. The Treta Yuga is one quarter longer than the Dvapara Yuga, or theBronze Age. Understanding these differences in the lengths of the ages becomesimportant to the following discussion.According to Fulcanelli and the cross at Hendaye, the alchemical Four Agescomprise the four quadrants of a 25,920 yearlong cycle called the precession ofthe equinoxes. Essentially, the precession of the equinoxes can be explained bythe fact that our Earth has a wobble. Like a top spinning on the floor, as itbegins to lose momentum this wobble of the earth takes nearly 26,000 years tounfold. The strange engraving of the four `A's' (see illustration A) on thecross of Hendaye is a "hieroglyph of the universe", according to Fulcanelli. Itis "comprised of the conventional signs of heaven and earth, the spiritual andthe temporal, the macrocosm and the microcosm, in which major emblems of theredemption (cross) and the world (circle) are found in association".What Fulcanelli appears to be saying here is that the precession of theequinoxes is to be divided into four distinct ages of 6480 years each (4 dividedinto 25,920) or, to round off the figures to approximately 6500 years each. Thisis also interesting because the zodiacal cycle, which lasts 25,920 years, hasfour fixed signs. These are the signs of Aquarius, Taurus, Leo and Scorpio.These four signs are separated by 6,500 years each. Also in the Book of Ezekieland in the Book of Revelation we are told of the angel with four faces. Thisangel has the face of a Lion (Leo), a Bull (Taurus), a Man (the angel) and anEagle (in older times Scorpio was represented by an eagle instead of ascorpion). Apparently, according to Fulcanelli, both of these books in the Bibleare warnings and messages about the four quadrants of the precession of theequinoxes and appear to be telling us that there is some kind of great changewhenever we arrive at one of these four signs.Of course it is well known that we are currently entering the Age of Aquarius.The Cross at Hendaye and Fulcanelli are telling us that there are tremendouschanges to be found here on Earth when we enter into one of the four fixedsigns. Apparently these changes can be cataclysmic.Obviously this 6,500 year long dating of the four alchemical ages disagrees withthe Hindu Yuga system, which insists that each Yuga is of varying time lengths.It is in trying to iron out the dissimilarities in these two time periods thatthe hyperdimensional aspects of time can be best revealed.It is well known in modern physics that the four dimensional space, of whichtime is an aspect, is in the shape of a hypersphere. (see illustration B) Thishypersphere appears similar to the shape of a donut, or a bagel. The energy, orthe flow of the energy stream, within this hypersphere works like this: As shownin the illustration, the flow comes out of the bottom of the sphere, winds itsway up around the outside edge, crosses the outside equator of the torus sphereand moves towards the hole in the top of this torus. The energy flow then beginsto fall through the top of the hole and begins to spin in a vortex. This energyflow continues until it comes out of the bottom side of the torus where theenergy flow begins its outward expansion again. This flow is continuous and, ina sense, is infinite. The Four Dimensional Hypersphere torus is also represented by the hypercube. Ahypercube is a cube within a cube according to physicists. Essentially thiscube, also called `The Cube of Space' or the Tetragrammatron' by the alchemistsis a straight edged version of the donut shaped hypersphere. (See illustrationC)Scientists love to be able to construct objects using straight lines, so theyhave created the hypercube to help them better understand the hyperdimensionaluniverse that surrounds us. Alchemists however, like to use the curved lines ofnature, so the donut shaped torus or hypersphere, is a better, more naturalvisual description of hyperdimensional space and will be the one I use in thisessay.The alchemists believe that there is a hyperdimensional `body' around everyliving thing on earth. This hyperdimensional `body' or sphere known to mysticsas the luminous energy body, also surrounds every planet and star as well. Eachobject in the three dimensional world is an affectation of four-dimensionalspace. Humans, animals, plants, planets and stars are the solid inside of thefourth dimensional energy flow. As you will see time also travels in thisfashion (See illustration D). ( For more information on the luminous energy bodysee my films Healing the Luminous Body with Dr. Alberto Villoldo, ArtMind withAlex Grey and Yoga of Light with Sharron Rose.)In order to begin to understand the topographical nature of time it is veryimportant to understand the guts of this hyperdimensional sphere. By the `guts'I am referring to the vortexes that make up the energy flow that runs throughthe center of the hypersphere. As the energy flow begins to fall into the vortexthat runs through the center of the sphere it takes on the shape of atetrahedron.A tetrahedron, as shown in illustration E, is the building block ofthree-dimensional space and is the founding member of the Platonic Solids. Thetetrahedron is the simplest object that can be created in three dimensions. Theonly object with just four sides, the tetrahedron is also shaped like a vortex.Let us digress for a moment and discuss vortexes. Back in the Midwest, where Icome from, there is a place called Tornado Alley. This is the flat Great Plainsthat stretches from Texas to the Dakotas. Each year this area is visited bynumerous tornados, which wreak havoc on the farms and towns of this area. Thesetornados usually start in May and last until early August. Having witnessedseveral tornados in my early years I became fascinated by them and was once evena `storm chaser'. In my young and foolish days I used to chase after tornadoswith my Bolex 16mm camera in order to capture them on film. I became veryfamiliar with these lethal vortexes.But understanding tornados also helps us understand vortexes and the density offorces in the hypersphere. Tornados (and also hurricanes) are made up of airlike that which surrounds us all the time. But as the air begins spinning ittakes on a strange solidity. While the swirling air at the top of a tornado issomewhat dangerous, it is the spinning air near the surface of the ground thatis really dangerous. Near the tip of a tornado, where it is in contact with theground, the air takes on the quality of solid iron. The tips of tornados can ripbuildings apart, throw cars and trucks thousands of feet and punch chaffs ofwheat into the very center of a trees like a bullet. As the air spins moreviolently, the tip of the tornado vortex becomes as strong as 50 locomotivesengines and possesses the density of the hardest of metals. Yet it is justcomprised of air molecules. But these molecules are spinning so quickly thatthey create a mass that is extremely powerful. It is the spin of the air thatcauses it to densify and take on the solidity of metals.Getting back to the central core of our hyperdimensional torus we can understandthe vortexes inside this sphere and how time unfolds by using the tornadoanalogy. As the energy flow begins to dip down into the top of the tetrahedralshaped vortex it begins to spin. As the energy flow descends, its spin becomesmore rapid and compressed. Like a tornado, as it reaches further down, the tipof the vortex `hardens'. It could be said that his hardening of vorticularforces is what makes up the solidity of our three dimensional space. Each human,plant, animal and indeed every planet and star alike are the hardened tips ofhyperdimensional vortexes, which are flowing all around us constantly.Like air, these hyperdimensional forces are pretty much invisible to us. It isonly when these forces coagulate into a spinning vortex that they can be seenand felt. It is through the rapid spinning of four-dimensional space that thesolidity of the third dimension is actually created. The mystics from all greattraditions know this and they realize these inner dynamics of the fourthdimension as it interacts with the third dimension. The fourth dimension is thesurrounding sphere and the third dimension are the tetrahedral vortexes thatmake up the central core of the sphere. To the ancients, four-dimensional spacewas called `spirit' and three-dimensional space was called `matter'.So what does this have to do with time and the topography of time? Remember thedilemma that we face in trying to make the four ages of the precession match upwith the Ages or Yugas from the Hindu system? By attempting to make the two intoone we can not only understand the topology of time, but also we can map timelike the ancients and we can know where we are in the river of time.As shown in illustration F, imagine that we are coming through the very centerof where the two tetrahedral tornado vortexes intersect at the very center ofthe inner hyperdimensional sphere. Moving down the bottom vortex towards theoutside surface of the sphere, each spin in the vortex takes longer and is widerand slower than the previous spin in the vortex. In other words, the energy flowexpands after it passes the `null' point in the very center of thehyperdimensional sphere, or torus, where the tips of the two tetrahedralvortexes touch.This energy flow continues its expansion as it climbs over the lip of the bottomedge of the sphere where the vortex meets the outside edge of the sphere. Theenergy flow continues to expand until it reaches the outside equator area of thesphere. Once it gets past the equator, the energy flow begins to condense, theflow begins to move faster and the spin density increases. This flow continuesuntil the energy flow reaches the upper lip of the outside of thehyperdimensional sphere where it begins to `fall' into the top of the tornadotetrahedral vortex.Now as the flow of energy falls down the vortex towards the null point at thevery center of the sphere it begins to harden as it spins faster and faster.This goes on and on until the vortex is so hard it is like iron. This is how thefourth dimensional forces create three-dimensional reality. As the vortex spinsfaster and faster eventually it compresses down to the point where it hasnowhere to go but outwards again. This occurs at the null point in the center ofthe sphere and the energy flow now begins to once again expand.The Golden Age is the time period that starts at the null point in the center ofthe sphere and continues through the bottom vortex. As the energy flow expandsoutwards time appears to slow down. The entire period of the Satya Yuga, or theGolden Age, continues as the energy flow goes down the bottom vortex and roundsacross the top of the sphere. It continues expanding until it arrives at theequator (see illustration G).The equator of the outside of the hyperdimensional sphere is the borderlinebetween the Satya Yuga and Treta Yuga, or the Golden Age and the Silver Age. Nowthe energy flow begins to contract as it flows upwards towards the north pole ofthe hypersphere.The Silver Age, or the Treta Yuga, continues until the energy flow rounds thetop lip of the hyperdimensional sphere and begins to fall into the uppertetrahedral vortex. This then is the borderline between the Treta Yuga and theDvapara Yuga, or the border between the Silver Age and the Bronze Age.About two thirds down in the upper vortex, where the energy flow is spinning sofast that it becomes as solid as iron, is beginning of the last Age, the KaliYuga, or the Iron Age. This spinning continues to gain density and compressionand speed as it races towards the central null point in the very center of thesphere. As it approaches this null point the forces become unbelievably fast,violent and dense. It is only when these forces achieve maximum density and theycan no longer compress any further that they begin to suddenly flip and beginthe expansion of the flow. This happens in an instant. This is the shift fromthe Iron Age, or the Kali Yuga to the Golden Age, or the Satya Yuga. Theborderline between the Iron Age and the Golden Age is the most distinct borderin this topographical illustration of hyperdimensional time. It is the mostjarring and is instantaneous.Take notice of the hourglass shape of the two tetrahedral vortexes inside thehyperdimensional sphere. Is this why Fulcanelli tells us about the hour-glass inthe quote at the beginning of this article? In the Hindu mythology the God Shivadances the world into and out of existence playing his dhamaru which is a twosided drum shaped like an hourglass.Notice that, like the number of years in the Hindu Yuga system, the distancetraveled through our ages in the hypersphere is similar; the Golden Age, whichis the distance between the null point in the center and the outside equator istwice the distance as that traveled through the Silver Age which is the distancefrom the equator to the top of the lip of the upper vortex. Equally, thedistance traveled from the top of the vortex to two thirds down, which is theBronze Age, is half the length of the Silver Age. Finally, the tip of the vortexis half the length of the Bronze Age.This part, called the Iron Age, is the Age in which we live. This is also why,in the Iron Age, each second feels shorter than the second before. This is whyeach day, each month and year appear to be going faster than they didpreviously. In the topology of time this effect can be easily understood andexplained.Also remember even though the distance traveled is much further in the GoldenAge than it is in the Iron Age, the number of years it takes is the same. Ittakes 6,480 years to go through the Golden Age just as it takes 6,480 years togo through the Iron Age, but it feels much different. In the Golden Age eachsecond, each day, each month and year appear to be longer than the previous day,month and year. Time is expanding in the Golden Age and with that expansion theanxiety and tension of the Iron Age disappears. It is a paradise, especially tothose who may have survived the passing through the wormhole, or the null pointat the center of the hyperdimensional sphere.Therefore, the years listed within the Yuga system are actually symbolic timesthat explain the lengths of time as it is felt not as it is lived. So the GoldenAge or the Satya Yuga feels like it is much longer than the Kali Yuga, or theIron Age. The shamans in Peru tell us that we are approaching the Pacha Cuti, which means,literally `the world turned upside down'. They say that it will arrive in theyear 2012 (see illustration H). This is also the year when the great Mayancalendar reaches its end point. The cross of Hendaye is quite explicit in sayingthat we are reaching the very end of the Iron Age. I would suggest that the nullpoint, or the wormhole at the very center of the hypersphere, is very likely the2012 date. Our hypersphere appears to be regulated by the periodic alignment ofthe galactic center with the sun. This also matches the four fixed signs of thezodiac and explains why the Christian tradition is preparing for the endtimes.The unknown builder of the mysterious Cross at Hendaye gives the entirehyperdimensional map to us on a platter. Fulcanelli coyly ignores it knowingthat its meaning will only become clear when one has truly understood alchemy.At the very top of the Cross, on the west side, just above the broken LatinInscription, sits a single `X'. (See Illustration I.)Illustration I: The "X" at the Top of the CrossThis `X' is the inner map of the guts of the hyperdimensional sphere and revealsthe hourglass shape in a clear and concise manner. The `X' is truly the mostmysterious symbol on the Cross at Hendaye and its meaning is finally revealedhere in this article.Oddly enough, it also appears that Stanley Kubrick is trying to tell us aboutthe end of our Age in his masterpiece film 2001: A Space Odyssey. The Starchildat the end of the film has passed through the Star Gate of the black monolithand is returning to Earth to create a new world or a new Age (see AlchhemicalKubrick: 2001: The Great Work on Film at jayweidner.com)It is through our understanding of the Four Ages, the fixed signs of the zodiacand the Yuga system that we can finally appreciate the message that ourancestors have handed down to us. We are about to pass through the Star Gate,the wormhole, and the null point of hyperdimensional space.The Cross of Hendaye reveals the most important knowledge of all, which is theend of time and the beginning of the Golden Age. Awareness of this knowledgehelps us all to more fully comprehend the nature of the times in which we resideand the destiny of the human race.Endnote:Incidentally the human life span has a strange association with the hypersphereand the topology of time. It takes 72 years for the precession of the equinoxesto advance one degree (360 X 72 = 25,920). Interestingly, at least during theIron Age, the average human life span is about 72 years, which is 26,280 days,very close to the precessional figure of 25,920. Incidentally, the ancientsthought that the year had 360 days, which would have made 72 years come out toexactly 25,920 days.But the human life span can also divided into four Ages. If we divide 72 yearsinto four periods of 18 years each we can discover our own personal four ages ofexistence.There are 6510 days in each of these 18-year periods. The Golden Age of a humanis from their birth to when they reach 18 years of age. The Silver Age is thenext period from 18 to 36 years old. The Bronze Age of a life is from 36 yearsold to 54 years of age and the Iron Age is from 54 years old to 72.Like the four great ages of alchemical timekeeping these four ages also feeldifferent. It seems to take forever to get to be eighteen years old. But when weare 54 years old, or older, the days and years feel as if they are flying by.Also the body appears to gain density as we age. Our bones creak and arthritisbegins to attack us as we age. It becomes more difficult to lose weight and webecome set in our ways.Even our lives appear to be ruled by the topology of hyperdimensional space.See Part II: The Alchemy of Time - Understandingv the Great Year and the Cyclesof Existence

The Web Bot Project and 2012

2009-07-11T14:08:00.000-07:00

Mirror Of Aphrodite"Read not to contradict and confute, nor to believe and take for granted, but toweigh and consider." -- Francis Bacon, Sr.Sunday, May 20, 2007The Web Bot Project and 2012Maybe some of you have heard of The Web Bot Project, but for those of you whohave not, it's quite intriguing.The Web Bot Project, developed in the late 1990's, was created to assist inmaking stock market predictions.The technology uses a system of spiders to crawl the Internet and search forkeywords, much like a search engine does. When a keyword is located, the botprogram takes a snapshot of the text preceding and following the keyword. Thissnapshot of text is sent to a central location where it is then filtered todefine meaning.The projects concept is aimed at tapping into the "collective unconscious" ofthe universe and it's inhabitants. As well, there is an interesting time conceptinvolved and an unusual concept of a "tipping point" regarding the past,current, and future times. It goes a bit deeper than viewing what those of us onthe Internet are saying.But in 2001, bot operators began to notice that stock market predictions werenot the only matters being accurately predicted by the program. They began totake notice of coincidence with occurrences and explored it further.One of the first accurate predictions from the bot program took place in June of2001. The program predicted that a life altering event would take place withinthe next 60-90 days. An occurrence of such proportion that it's effects would befelt worldwide. The program based it's prediction on "web chatter" whichultimately represents the collective unconscious of society.Regrettably, the bot program's prediction proved accurate and the Twin Towersfell on 9/11/2001.Here's where it starts to become very interesting. The bot program also predictsa worldwide calamity taking place in the year 2012. For those of you who studyastrology, prophecies, and the like, you may already be familiar with this date.The Mayans were considered by many as great "seers" and built a society thatfocused it's studies on time, synchronicity, and consciousness. The Mayancalendar predicts that mankind will end in the year 2012. A period which alsosignifies the end of the current era in the Mayan calendar. But this end mayrepresent a symbolic end - more so than a literal end. An end that refers to ashift in consciousness, such as a societal shift into a spiritual age from ascientific one.Many have derived similar predictions from the I Ching or China's "Book ofChanges." The I Ching was written in 2800 B.C. and is revered to this day inChina. A gentlemen by the name of Terrence McKenna studied the I Ching intenselyand began to see a pattern emerging. From that pattern he produced a time linegraph and called it the "Time Wave Zero" theory.Terrence's time line derived from the I Ching ended in the year 2012 - December21, 2012 to be exact. The winter solstice.Even more intriguing is the fact that many suggest that there is scientificevidence that points to a very rare astrological occurrence taking place theyear of 2012. For millenia, the Mayans believed in the existence of a dark riftin the center of the Milky Way and considered it fact. Only recently did modernscientists discover that it actually does exist.Many exist, however, in the center of our galaxy is a black hole. And in theyear 2012, it is suggested that the sun and the earth will be in directalignment with this black hole. Scientist speculate that magnetic shifts couldtake place as a result. In essence, it is theorized that the poles couldreverse. The poles have shifted before and Einstein, himself, had suggested thispole shifting theory in 1955.And I'm sure many of you have heard of Merlin the magician. Merlin was believedto be a Celtic shaman that many of his day considered a "crazed man of theforest." As a result, during those times he was referred to as "Merlin theWild." But what many don't realize is that Merlin was considered Europe'sgreatest oracle or "seer."Merlin predicted that the planets will "run riot" through the constellations.Completely off their normal paths of rotation. Scientists speculate that if thiswere to happen, it would be a result of the earth changing it's rotation - orthe poles shifting.Merlin also predicted that the use of "talking stones" would be taking placeduring this time. For those of you who don't know, stone is the basis of ourmodern technology. Quartz in particular. Quartz technology is used in cellphones as well as computers. Silicone quartz stores information that can then beretrieved.Another interesting side note to this, that I will be discussing in an upcomingpost, is the use of quartz by the Mayans. The Mayans coveted what were known asthe crystal skulls. Skulls carved from natural quartz crystal. They claimed theskulls "talked" to them and gave them information. Could it be that theyactually did? Based on our knowledge of the capabilities of quartz crystal andit's uses for technology - it seems quite possible. Hewlett Packard studied theskulls in 1970 and their results were startling.The oldest tribe in the United States, the Hopi Indian tribe, believed that theworld has been created and destroyed four times previously. The Hopi's believethat we are on the brink of the Fifth World. They predicted that this occurrencewould be preceded by submersion (rising waters), the sun getting hotter (globalwarming), and earth occurrences (hurricane's, tornadoes, and mass flooding).The Hopi's also predicted that the world at this time would be criss-crossed bya spider web, which could be likened to the Internet. They believed that the endof the Fourth World would be followed by the beginning of the Fifth World. Theevolution of life requires violence.Seems that these beliefs are in line with the predictions made from one of thegreatest book of prophecies ever written - the Bible. And the Book ofRevelations, in particular.The History Channel created a special that touches on this very subject titled:Doomsday 2012, The End of Days. It further explores the significance of thisdate in ancient prophecies, texts, and writings.

The Eight Horsemen of 2012

2009-07-11T14:00:00.000-07:00

The Eight Horsemen of 2012by Paul Dale RobertsSource: http://mysterytopia.comThe Mayans were an intelligent civilization that had advanced writing, knewmathematics and were well versed in astronomy. Most people think that perhapsthe world will end in 2012, because this is the prophesy of the Mayans. TheMayans made this prediction 2000 years ago and the dire date of doom is December21, 2012. Why is 2012 so significant? Should we be worried? Should we even care?Let's take the Four Horsemen of the Apocalypse and see what imminent threats lieahead. Then let's add a few more horsemen. Let's really get this party started!After we are all done, let's add everything up and see if we truly havesomething dark in the forecast.Horseman known as War: In the bible it's mentioned in Matthew 24:6..."you willbe hearing of wars and rumors of wars...." The threat of war is around us. Weknow of the war in Iraq. There is still a lot of unrest in the Middle East.Russia is starting to give us the cold shoulder again. Russia supports a nuclearprogram for Iran. Iran doesn't like Israel and it goes on and on and on. What ifIran declares to have nuclear capabilities. Our intelligence agents learn thatthey are planning to do a preemptive strike on their enemy Israel. Then Americawould step in, we most likely would lay out a preemptive strike first on Iranand somewhere Magog aka Russia would make their move. We must remember that inEzekiel 38 through 39 tells of a future invasion of Israel by a vast coalitionof nations that surround it. Laying down the foundation for Armageddon. So asyou can see the threat of war will always be with us.Horseman known as Famine: Not a problem, with global warming on the horizon, weshould easily have all sort of droughts throughout the world. Drought equalsmass starvation. There is chunk of ice the size of Connecticut breaking off fromAntarctica. What is next a chunk of ice, the size of Texas? Then a chunk of icethe size of Alaska? That should bring on some rising waters, destroy a fewcities. Everyone listen up to Al Gore. We are headed for disaster! The wayglobal warming is headed, we will be seeing rising sea levels, glacial retreats,a shrunken Arctic, some extreme weather conditions, more forest fires, powerfulhurricanes and tropical cyclones, agriculture disasters. When 2012 gets here, itshould be getting worse. Does anyone see it getting better? I think it's a bittoo late. Okay Mayans, what else do you have for us?Horseman known as Pestilence: This one is easy. The Brazilian rain forest ispractically gone. We keep on cutting down the trees and god knows what diseasesare hiding in that luscious forest, waiting to creep up on mankind. We alreadyhave AIDS, flesh eating bacteria, some kind of super bug. We should all preparefor some major diseases in our near future. Maybe around 2012. You got to lovethose Mayans! Bring on the plagues!Horseman known as Death: If global warming really gets a good kick start, thereshould be a lot of drought hitting one of our biggest land masses...Africa. Ifwars and the threat of terrorism continues, we should see more of death. Ifdiseases and plagues sweep around the world easily through mass airtransportation, that should wipe out a majority of the human race. Yep, deathshould be all around us. It's already all around us.Before we talk about some other Horsemen. Let's talk about a white buffalo calf.The Apache, Blackfoot, Caddo, Hidatsa, Commanche, Cheyenne, Arapaho, Cherokee,Chippewa, Mandan and the Sioux all believed in a prophesy that would lead ustowards end times. This would happen when a white buffalo came upon our world.Meet Miracle, a pure white buffalo born on August 20, 1994 on the Heider Farm inJanesville, Wisconsin. Hmmm...let me see, 1994 is pretty close to 2012.Coincidence? Maybe there is something to this prophesy. I guess, we will have towait and see.New Horseman known as Solar Dragon: Researchers at the National Center forAtmospheric Research (NCAR) make claim that we will be hit by the heaviest solarflare that even overshadows the historic Solar Max of 1958. With all of thetechnology that we use, such as cell phones, computers and everything else, thissolar flare could black out the whole world in one foul sweep! This solar flarecan hit us either in the year, 2010, 2011 or 2012! There we go again mentioning2012. Yep, we have a definite storm coming, a solar storm! What disaster willthis solar storm produce for mankind?Since the Mayans knew astronomy so well, they were able to predict a fantasticalignment. Our galaxy has a center. In this center, in which billions of starstake millions of years to revolve around, is located in the thickest starcluster that is part of the milky way, as seen from Earth. On December 21, 2012,guess what happens? During the Winter Solstice, this center will align with ourown sun. This alignment was seen as significant to the Mayans. Is this alignmentas significant as the Star of Bethlehem was to the birth of Jesus?Let's meet a few more Horsemen of the Apocalypse.New Horseman Known as Axis. Yep, there is another threat on the horizon. Alittle bit of global cooling and perhaps the Earth will shift by a mere 33.5degrees. That would cause some major damage. How many of us can survive an axisshift?New Horseman Known as Quake: Sounds like a WWE wrestler, but this Horsemen willshake you up! The ring of fire around the Pacific rim is getting more and moreactive. Earthquakes are increasing and more are predicted around theyear...yeah...you know...2012.New Horsemen Known as Comet: Some people who dabble with the bible code, thinkthat Earth will be impacted by a comet. This one I don't buy, now if they weretalking about asteroid 99942 Apophis impacting us in 2029 or 2036, that one Icould swallow. But, the way NASA recently shot down a satellite, we most likewould be prepared for a threat from an engaging asteroid or comet.With all of the Horsemen looming down upon us, I hope Zecharia Sitchin iscorrect that he says that Planet X aka Nibiru is nearing a close orbit towardsEarth.Perhaps Anu and his two sons Enki (Ea) and Enlil, if they ever stop feuding fora while, will gather the rest of the Anunnakis to save us from a futuristicdoomscape. The only reason why I mention Planet X, is because there are manybelievers who believe in the second coming and that we will all be saved. Forthose who believe the words of the Summerian clay tablets, they believe Planet Xwill return to close proximity to Earth and a new age will be brought forth, asthe Anunnakis reveal themselves once again to mankind. We will learn that ourmyths and religions were actually centered on the gods from Nibiru. Stories ofPoseidon and Neptune are in reality the story of Anu as he returned to Nibiru todominate the seas and waters. Perhaps the Mayans received their astronomyknow-how from the gods. The gods of Nibiru.Perhaps a great disaster will unfold around the year 2012, but I also believethat if we face grave disasters, we somehow will overcome and a new world willbe brought forth. A new age and perhaps during this new age, we will also learnthat we are not alone in the universe.Oh, I said, let's add everything up to see if we are actually doomed for theyear 2012. Let me see, if you add this horseman with this horseman. Then addthis horseman with....ahh shucks, we better get ready to kiss our ---- goodbye.Doesn't look good folks!

2012 Prophecy is the teaching of the Tomb of Pacal Votan

2009-07-11T13:59:00.000-07:00

2012 Prophecy is the teaching of the Tomb of Pacal Votan, the most famous of theancient Maya. The prophecy is embedded in the facts and numbers of his tomb, itsdedication, its discovery—and its relation to 2012.Pacal Votan was born in AD 603, at the age of 12 he acceded to the throne andclaimed matrilineal descent from his mother, Zak Kuk. His true reign and time ofpower occurred during a 52 year cycle between AD 631 and his death in 683.During his life time he created the incomparable Palace and Tower of the Winds.At his death he left instructions to his son and successor, Chan Balum, to buildhis grand tomb and over it the pyramid temple that has come to be known as thePyramid of the Inscriptions.The tomb was dedicated in AD 692, 9.13.0.0.0 on the Long Count. In the ensuingcenturies all memory of the existence of the tomb was erased and it laymysteriously hidden in the jungles for almost thirteen centuries. From the timeof its dedication in 692 to its discovery in 1952, lies a span of 1260 years,the numbers of the 12:60 timing frequency (irregular 12 month calendar,mechanical 60-minute hour) of the beast that holds the world soul enslaved tohistorical materialism. From its dedication, 692, to the year 2012, it isexactly 1320 years, numbers of the 13:20 frequency of the Law of Time and theUniversal Harmony which will prevail on Earth in 2012. How will this occur?The answer again is on the famous sarcophagus. On the eastern edge of the stoneare six glyphs known as galactic signatures -one of 20 icons coded by a number,1-13, hence 13:20. The tones (numbers) of the first set of four signatures addup to 28; the tones of the second set of two signatures add up to 13, thenumbers of the perfect Thirteen Moon/28-day calendar.What this 2012 prophecy says is this: "When my tomb is discovered fallen manwill be in 12:60 hell but within 60 years in 2012, the 13-Moon/28-day calendarwill take the fallen man of the 12:60 materialist hell, to the 13:20resurrection in time." The choice is ours, and it is now available for thetaking. There is much more to the prophecy, but all you need to know right nowis that the true Ring of Power in Time is measured by Thirteen Moons-28 days,and it is that measure that will prevail in 2012.The Maya, who precisely predicted the dates of their own destruction, knew thatby 2012 it would all be over anyway, that the Babylonian juggernaut would allbut have destroyed the planet by that date. So at the ten baktun marker theadvance Mayan guard departed, called an end to the long count cycles of baktunsand pictuns, and calabtuns. Abandoned the great stone temple cities that dottedthe immense jungle lowlands, and the Maya elite, through their knowledge of timemagic, departed back into the eternal galactic night whence they had originallycome.Yes, these were the Galactic Maya, great civilizers of the Pleiadian beyond whobrought their time science to a planet which they knew was devoid of it, andhence incapable of entering the great tournament of time traveling athleteswhose wanderings and mental exploits mark the annals of the galactic saga ofspiritual and mental evolution. So here on Earth they infiltrated, partook ofthe Olmec shamanic rites, became jaguar priests, tamed naguals, and erectedcosmic temples upon which they inscribed inscrutable star histories, episodesoccurring hundreds of millions and even billions of years in the past—or thefuture. Finally they set up their dynasties and rivalries which marked the endof their time on Earth.The greatest of these dynasties of the knowers of the Night of Time was that ofNah Chan—House of the Serpent, Palenque. Here it was that one can now visit thefabled tomb of Pacal Votan, and right next door in Temple XIII, the moremysterious uninscribed tomb of the Red Queen. From the House of the Serpent weregenerated the secret teachings in the language of the zuvuya, kept by the JaguarNight Seers in the fabled lost Book of the Seven Generations, the sagas of theEnd of Time, the knowledge of the fulfillment of all prophecies, the teachingsof 2012.In their wake, the Galactic Maya left certain instructions, certain simplifiedrecipes for marking the time and laying out the prophecies: The year bearercounts, the 52 year cycles or solar-galactic calendar rounds, the Tzolkin, andthe long count, but merely as a count of days. Those who chose to remain behindawaited the prophet Kukulcan-Quetzalcoatl, and then before the end of theeleventh baktun, established a new empire of time, the Toltec Maya of ChichenItza and Mayapan, as well as that of the Quiche and Cakchiquels of thehighlands. Their seers maintained the mythic history, the origins, the knowledgeof Tollan, the Popul Vuh and the memory of the four original prophets, BalamQuitze, Iqi Balam, Mahacutah, and the Balam Agab. And from Kukulcan-Quetzalcoatlthey established lines of seers, prophets known as the Ah Bobat of the traditionof the Chilam Balam, Jaguar seers who foresaw the coming of the aliens fromacross the water, those who were to bring with them the seeds of destruction.So it came to pass in the 12th baktun, the sails appeared from across thewaters—the iron swords, the cannon, the horse, and the dreaded smallpox, alllaid waste to the wonder that had been Maya. But can what is true really bedestroyed?A book burning in 1562, resulted in another book by the very man who burned thebooks, and this was the first book by a European about the Maya, Relation of theThings of Yucatan, by Bishop de Landa. And in the thirteenth and final baktun,another book burning in 1691, resulted in yet another book. Published in 1692,was The Trials of Votan, all about the mysterious Votan, descendent of Noah, theheart of the people, the planetary wanderer who built the dark house and laidhis fabulous tomb beneath a pyramid in the mythic city of Nah Chan, House of theSerpent.Those Spanish friars who wrote this text had no way of knowing that exactly 1000years before in 692,the tomb of the great Pacal Votan, king of Nah Chan wasdedicated—long count date, 9.13.0.0.0. Not the friars, nor it seems, even theremaining Maya remembered that tomb. For 1260 years that tomb lay hidden in thejungle. Then in 1952 it came to light, exactly 60 years before the closing ofthe cycle in 2012. And when it came to light, it brought with it seeds of thegreat Mayan reawakening, all foretold and known by those ancient galactic seersin the torch lit corridors beneath the Tower of the Winds—yes, the great Mayanreawakening which was scheduled to begin precisely on August 16, 1987—only 25years before 2012.

ring of fire prophecies

2009-07-11T13:57:00.000-07:00

Earthquakes in the "ring of fire" validate prophecies. Seismic and volcanic activity in the "ring of fire" signal the beginning of theapocalypse prophecied for the year 2012.This earthquake was located in Indonesia, a country of 17,000 islands that makeup the so-called Ring of Fire around the Pacific Ocean basin where plateboundaries intersect and volcanoes regularly erupt. Although scientists cannotpredict exactly when seismic events will occur, seismologists had predictedMonday's quake. In the March 17 issue of the journal Nature, researchers at theUniversity of Ulster-Coleraine in Northern Ireland reported that stress wasbuilding in the Sumatran subduction zone as well as in the adjacent SundaTrench. They warned that the stress was likely to be released in another seismicevent. The faults are part of the Pacific "ring of fire," where continentalplates grind against each other and spark periodic seismic shocks.The Ring of Fire has been quoted in many prophesies as being the first indicatorof the end times when the geologic upheaval begin to increase in frequency. Overthe last century, we have seen many severe earthquakes, but the frequency insuch a concise time period has increased since the 1990s. Author Nina Andersonbased her novel, 2012 Airborne Prophesy, on the prophetic Ring of Firepredictions, which alerts the reader to possible human causes for theacceleration of the earth's instability. In the book, she projects that presentlevels of wireless technology are rising and this frequency saturation willeventually create a harmonic disturbance that could generate an instability ofthe earth's crust.In 2012 Airborne Prophesy we are warned that the experiments with targetedionospheric or subsurface electromagnetic frequencies disregard any conclusiveevidence of safety to our planet. A man-generated unexpected earthquake lastfall in Colorado shook residents and stirred controversy. New powerfulionospheric heaters are working to improve communications with submarines and tobe used as subterranean radar to locate underground defense facilities. Couldthese frequency-based devices be unseating the continental plates and spawningthe rash of earthquakes in the Pacific or are they part of our unfolding futureas predicted in the end-days prophecies?

The Pacific Ring of Fire

2009-07-11T13:56:00.000-07:00

The Pacific Ring of Fire is an area where large numbers of earthquakes andvolcanic eruptions occur in the basin of the Pacific Ocean. In a 40,000 kmhorseshoe shape, it is associated with a nearly continuous series of oceanictrenches, volcanic arcs, and volcanic belts and/or plate movements. The Ring ofFire has 452 volcanoes and is home to over 75% of the world's active and dormantvolcanoes. It is sometimes called the circum-Pacific belt or the circum-Pacificseismic belt. 90% of the world's earthquakes and 80% of the world's largestearthquakes occur along the Ring of Fire. The next most seismic region (5–6% ofearthquakes and 17% of the world's largest earthquakes) is the Alpide belt,which extends from Java to Sumatra through the Himalayas, the Mediterranean, andout into the Atlantic. The Mid-Atlantic Ridge is the third most prominentearthquake belt.[1][2]The Ring of Fire is a direct result and consequence of plate tectonics and themovement and collisions of crustal plates.[3] The eastern section of the ring isthe result of the Nazca Plate and the Cocos Plate being subducted beneath thewestward moving South American Plate. A portion of the Pacific Plate along withthe small Juan de Fuca Plate are being subducted beneath the North AmericanPlate. Along the northern portion the northwestward moving Pacific plate isbeing subducted beneath the Aleutian Islands arc. Further west the Pacific plateis being subducted along the Kamchatka Peninsula arcs on south past Japan. Thesouthern portion is more complex with a number of smaller tectonic plates incollision with the Pacific plate from the Mariana Islands, the Philippines,Bougainville, Tonga, and New Zealand. Indonesia lies between the Ring of Firealong the northeastern islands adjacent to and including New Guinea and theAlpide belt along the south and west from Sumatra, Java, Bali, Flores, andTimor. The famous and very active San Andreas Fault zone of California is atransform fault which offsets a portion of the East Pacific Rise undersouthwestern United States and Mexico. The motion of the fault generatesnumerous small earthquakes, at multiple times a day, most of which are too smallto be felt.[4][5] The active Queen Charlotte Fault on the west coast of theQueen Charlotte Islands, British Columbia, Canada, has generated three largeearthquakes during the 20th century: a magnitude 7 event in 1929, a magnitude8.1 occurred in 1949 (Canada's largest recorded earthquake) and a magnitude 7.4in 1970.[6]The December 2004 earthquake just off the coast of Sumatra was actually a partof the Alpide belt.[citation needed]

Ancient Hindu Prophecy about a Golden Age

2009-07-11T13:54:00.000-07:00

Ancient Hindu Prophecy about a Golden Age could beginin 2012. Written by David Hedges on 16 January 2006.In the Brahma-Vaivarta Purana, Lord Krishna tellsGanga Devi that there will be a Golden Age within theKali-yuga that will start 5,000 years after thebeginning of the Kali Yuga.http://veda.harekrsna.cz/encyclopedia/kaliyuga.htmThe Golden Age will last for 10,000 years according toLord Krishna. The Kali Yuga calendar began at midnighton 18 February 3102 B.C. according to many sources.The ancient Hindu's mainly used lunar calendars butalso used solar calendars. If an average lunar yearequals 354.36 days then this would be about 5270 lunaryears from the time when the Kali Yuga started until21 Dec 2012; and it's about 5113 solar years of 365.24days per year.Krishna said the Golden Age would start 5000 years into the KaliYuga, but did he mean exactly 5000 years or approximately 5000 years?Did he mean lunaror solar years? I think he meant approximately 5000years, so it doesn't matter if they were lunar orsolar years.http://www.usvishakh.net/php/kaligreg.php21 Dec 2012, the winter solstice day, is supposed tobe the end of the Mayan calendar, and will begin there-birth of the world, a totally new world, and thisdate is day number 1,867,817 into the Kali Yuga. Byeither solar or lunar years, we are over 5000 yearsinto the Kali Yuga and its time for Krishna's prophecyto happen according to the ancient Hindu scriptures.Krishna's Golden Age could easilybegin in 2012!The Mayan's calendar began with the Fifth Great Cyclein 3114 B.C. and will end on 21 December 2012 A.D.http://www.ancientworlds.net/aw/Article/427718The Hindu's Kali Yuga calendar began on 18 February3102 B.C. Note that there are only 12 years differencebetween the Hindu's beginning of the Kali yuga and theMayan's beginning of the Fifth Great Cycle.The Mayan's Fifth Great cycle calendar will last for5126 years, then a new age of change will begin in2012. It's amazing that both calendar's began over5000 years ago and both calendar's predict a totallynew world and/or golden age after about 5000 yearsinto their calendars!I think we are really onto something with the 2012predictions. Here we have another ancient source,Hindu Scripture's called the Brahma-Vaivarta Purana,predicting a new world about the same time that theMayans predicted it to come! Historically, it's anamazing thing since these two ancient cultures didn'thave any contact.

Religious theories on or about 2012

2009-07-11T13:51:00.000-07:00

Religious theories* According to the 1997 book The Bible Code a meteor, asteroid or comet willcollide with the Earth. (some believe this means the world will end. This eventwas prophesied by John the Evangelist as Wormwood in the Book of Revelation.* Tibetan Monks specialising in remote viewing predict that divineextra-terrestrials will intervene at a point where the world's governments areabout to deploy weapons of mass destruction. Adding to this, the Tibetan Monkssay that the world is not ready to be destroyed and that our Earth is blessedand being saved continuously from all kinds of hazards that Mankind is not evenaware of.* The Prophecy of the Popes, attributed to Saint Malachy, speculated that thenext pontiff would be from the Order of Saint Benedict or Gloria Olivae. InApril 2005 former Cardinal Joseph Ratzinger was elected to the papalcy, lateradopting the name Pope Benedict XVI and supposedly fulfilling this prophecy.Saint Malachy predicted that this Pope would reign during the beginning of thetribulation which Jesus spoke of and sometime before a future pope described inthe prophecy as "Peter the Roman". According to St. Malachy, the 112th Pope'spontificate will end in the destruction of the city of Rome and the LastJudgement. [9]Pope Benedict XVI, the current Pope, is #111 in the list. Hehimself stated that his "pontificate will not be a long one" due to his age, andmany have speculated that it is within reason that he could pass away before2012. However since the doomsday Pope (Peter the Roman) is not assigned a number(we only say that it is the 112th Pope because it is the one after the 111thPope), it is possible that the #111th Pope and Peter the Roman are the sameperson, which means that the lesser tribulation could begin within thepontificate of Pope Benedict XVI. [10]* Plans to rebuild the Jewish holy Temple in Israel have been on the drawingboard since June 2005. Predictions from the Book of Daniel depict what isrefered to as the abomination of desolation, a restoration and then destructionof the Jewish Temple in Israel. This is related to the Prophecy of the SeventyWeeks. According to Daniel's predictions, "From the time that the dailysacrifice is abolished and the abomination that causes desolation is set up,there will be 1,290 days./ Blessed is the one who waits for and reaches the endof the 1,335 days." In total, this timespan is just 45 days short of thepredicted 7 year tribulation of the Book of Revelations, locating the datesometime in the year 2012. [11]

The Photonic Belt Also known as Photon Belt

2009-07-11T13:48:00.000-07:00

The Photonic BeltAlso known as Photon Belt.THE PHOTONIC BELT AND EARTHDue to the fact that Earth will enter the PHOTONIC BELT astrologists, scientistsand historians believe and think that the next millennium will mark thebeginning of a new stage for humanity. For Earth astrologists this new stage isthe Aquarian Age, an epoch of vast changes in its science and technology and itsconsciousness. For the scientists and historians is an epoch of greatdifficulties, that its social and political structures could not be able tomanage. Also any astronomer since Galileo (whoin 1610 used a telescope to explore the Moon, the Milky Way and Jupiter) wouldhave noticed the Milky Way getting closer to the solsticesover the centuries, asdid the Mayans. Jenkins says: "The solstice-galaxy alignment referred to as agalactic alignment is an astronomical factThe question remains standing: What role will the nearby PHOTONIC BELT play atthese times? The Belt can be divided in three sections: First we enter in whatis denominated the Null Zone that lasts approximately 5 or 6 days, including 72hours, approximately, of total darkness (3 days of darkness); then, we pass tothe main part of the BELT itself and it will be experienced a light of permanentday (24 hours a day). This trip will last around 2,000 years (DramaticProphesies of the Great Pyramid) and ends when the Solar System goes out fromthe other side of the Belt, crossing the Null zone for another 5- or 6-dayperiod. The arrival of the Photonic Belt is causing a great expectation and agreat "stress" in all the Solar. The ingress into the PHOTONIC BELT will begradual which will take approximately two days. Then the zone of total darknessof three days, here the electric apparatuses will not function as a result ofthe prevailing hipermagnetism. The main part, the unending light, will be 24hours a day. Upon entrance of our sun into the "Photon Belt" a darkness as thenight with a rain of stars will be produced on Earth that will last for 5 daysapproximately. This will be a consequence of the sudden modification of thesolar radiation and of the molecular excitation of the atmosphere upon enteringin contact with the messianic ring. The perpetual day will be a consequence ofthe proper radiation not depending anymore on the Sun to have daylight. If theEarth ingresses before the sun, a phenomenon similar to a planetary fire will beproduced, the matter will look luminous, but it will only be a visualphenomenon. Also just the fact of entering this photonic field the Earth willbe reducing its rotation due to the reduction of the solar radiation, thetemperature will descend and the ice fields will extend up to the 40º oflatitude in both hemispheres, only will be inhabitable the zones near theEquator even tough this equatorial zone won't be as it is today since the changeof the polar axis will create a glacier that will extend throughout allcontinents. The ice layers will not resist much due to the lack of rain andsoon will melt as a result of the constant radiation. Then the Earth will beflooded, the levels of water will rise up to the 900 meters of height coveringthe face of the planet. The imminent cataclysm will mark the beginning of a newcycle,

THE NEW EARTH The Ascension of Planet Earth

2009-07-11T13:43:00.000-07:00

THE NEW EARTH The Ascension of Planet EarthBook II:THE EARTH RE-BORNUPDATES FROM THE GALACTIC FEDERATIONIntroduction to the Coming ChangesThe time is coming for us on Earth to become aware of the existenceof other inhabited worlds outside of our own physical world. Therehas been much evidence given to us through the more esotericliterature that there are many millions of worlds teeming withintelligent life. These worlds are of course mostly far in advance ofour own, and live on planes of a higher vibration rate than our dense-plane Third Dimension. Visitors from these other more advanced worldshave up to now been forced to limit knowledge of their presencewithin our World by the aggressive policy of our Governments, whofearing losing their controlling power over us, have conducted amajor "cover up" of their existence. Numerous UFO reports supplied bythe Military Forces to Governments have been secretly filed away inTop-Secret archives inaccessible to public scrutiny.Nonetheless, there have been many thousands of unofficialreported "flying-saucer" or UFO sightings, and though usually ignoredby the mainstream media under the constraints of their Governments,they have nonetheless been published within the limited circles ofthe more esoteric book publishers. Our Space Visitors have up to nowbeen forced to limit their direct contact only to those of theirparticular civilization now incarnated on Earth and to otherdedicated "Light Workers" who have truly open minds. One of the firstmajor "Contactees" was George Adamski, who wrote several books in themid 1950s detailing his actual physical contacts with the SpaceVisitors and his trips up in their "flying saucer" Scout-ships to thelarge Motherships overhead. In his second book "Inside the SpaceShips", he describes in detail the interiors of these Motherships andrecounts his many conversations with their Commanders and otheronboard Spiritual Leaders. A few years later a Brazilian, DinoKraspedon, also published a book describing his meeting with theCaptain of a 300-foot Flying Saucer, who gave him much usefulscientific information about space travel and their methods of saucerpropulsion. The Captain, for example, explained how they can move athigh speeds through our atmosphere by creating a vacuum around theScout Ships through ionizing the air around the craft, thus not onlypreventing atmospheric friction but also providing the high forwardand vertical motion. He also gave us some of the first availableinformation on the approaching end of Age involving our Planet andthe other Solar Systems within our Galaxy and describes some of thecoming major Earth Changes. (For an edited online text of the Book,click on: "My Contact with Flying Saucers" by Dino Kraspedon).Another extraterrestrial phenomenon that has surfaced during the lasttwo decades has been the thousands of perfectly formed "Crop Circles"which have mysteriously appeared overnight in fields of wheat andother cereal crops, especially in Britain, showing us many beautifuland complex patterns. These also have been well documented in booksand on the Internet.Although our Space Visitors have up to now only made limitedcontacts, they are promising that they will soon make their firstmajor appearance in a "First Contact" series of landings. They willnot do this until our major Governments open up their Secret UFOfiles to the general public and inform us about their existence, thusavoiding any possible risk of public panic. The Space Visitors alsowant a guarantee from these Governments that they will not attackthem when they land. The French Government has just recently openedits secret UFO files to researchers, and in March 2008 the BritishGovernment also announced plans to make its UFO documents public withhundreds of documented sightings of UFOs across the UK, taken over 10years, to be released by the Ministry of Defense. There is howeverlittle chance of the present US Government regime doing the sameuntil it is replaced by a new Administration no longer under theinfluence of the secret dark "Cabal" which also controls much of theWorld's political and financial systems.A secret United Nations meeting was held on the 12th of February 2008at the New York office of the United Nations to discussUFOs/extraterrestrial life. The issue of recent UFO sightings was oneof many topics discussed, including a discussion of an unprecedentednumber of UFO sightings in 2007/2008. Security around the meeting wasintense. Everyone was searched. Pens, pins, key chain items werecollected and not allowed in the meeting room. There were multiplesecurity checkpoints. UN security cards were confiscated uponentering the room. These secret meetings were attended by over 40representatives of 28 Member States. A document was circulatedamongst them that referred to an offer by extraterrestrials to helpprepare Humanity for the disclosure of extraterrestrial life. Themeeting also discussed how the UN was being encouraged to take astand on the release of secret technologies that will enable thedevelopment of free energy. A similar document was later circulatedto the relevant Ministries all of the 28 Member States attending.The Galactic Space Federation have passed many warnings since WorldWar II addressed to our Scientific Community and Governments aboutthe extreme dangers in the development of nuclear devices. Theyexpressed particular concern about our development of the HydrogenBomb. Hydrogen, they say, is a basic living element permeating oursurrounding ethers, and use of Hydrogen bombs could set off a massivechain-reaction conflagration, not only destroying our Planet butsparking an even larger conflagration throughout the Ethers of Space.This would seriously harm many other worlds and therefore theGalactic Federation have been forced to take steps several times toprevent this from happening.However, an even more important message given by the SpaceConfederation concerns the coming "Earth Changes", part of a majorcyclic ending of a two-hundred million year-long "Grand UniversalAge", when all our Universes, Galaxies and Solar Systems are to moveup to a higher dimensional plane. This is also when our own SolarRing completes its two-hundred million year orbit around the Galaxy'sGalactic Core, and the entire Galaxy itself completes an infinitelylonger orbit around the Great Central Sun. This also coincides withthe ending of Earth's 2000 year-long Piscean Age which commenced atthe time of the Birth of Christ and is to finish by the end of theyear 2012, as also prophesied in the Mayan Calendar. A new "AquarianAge" for Earth will then commence with its long-prophesied "GoldenAge of Peace" lasting over two thousand years.There have been many prophesies made in the Bible and its Book ofRevelations about these coming "End-Times", the final "Day ofJudgement" and the "Second Coming of Christ". A similar message hasalso been given by the many Esoteric Schools of Higher SpiritualKnowledge which confirm the ending of a long Universal Cycle, a timewhen the Creator commences an "in-breathing" back to Source for allto assimilate their past evolutionary experience . This will precedea further long outgoing cycle of evolution on the ever advancingSpiral of Evolution.Earth is to "Ascend" from our present dense physical "ThirdDimension" vibration level, skipping the Fourth Dimension which willitself no longer be available within our own Solar System, movingdirectly up to the Fifth Dimension to join with our neighboringPlanets who will at this time also be moving up from their presentFourth Dimensional status to the Fifth. Since quite a few of Earth'sinhabitants originate from other planets and Star Systems and havehad the experience of living in those more advanced worlds and higherdimensions, this will not be an undue problem for them. However, themany younger souls in the less developed countries who are not yetready to make such a steep evolutionary jump, will be lovinglyrelocated in some of the other Solar Systems still capable ofsupporting the Third and Fourth Dimensions. Those that do make theAscension up to the Fifth Dimensional New Earth will return to atotally cleansed New Earth, possessing a beautiful pristine andgreen "Garden of Eden" environment and within a peaceful, loving andcompassionate society.However, before our Planet can move up to such a high dimension, itneeds to go through a thorough surface cleansing of all theenvironmental detritus and destructive effects caused by Humanity inthe past. During this much needed major Planetary Cleansing period,which will involve great surface upheavals, those Humans who areready to make the Ascension up to the higher Dimension will be liftedfrom Earth's surface by the Galactic Federation Force's Scout Craft.Some will be taken up to the overhead Motherships and others, throughchoice, will be taken down into the interior hollow "Inner Earth",which is at present the seat of an existing Fourth-dimensionalcivilization named "Aghartha". This ancient civilization, littleknown to most of us, lives an almost idyllic life within the hollowinterior of Earth's planetary crust in a pristine environment ofverdant landscapes, rivers, lakes, crystal cities, all illuminated byits own interior Sun forming the high-density core of Planet Earth.[More information can be found on the Inner Earth at the Link to "TheInner Earth & Realm of Aghartha" at the end of Book II]And so those of us who are not at this time ready to make theAscension up to the Fifth Dimension, will need to be relocated toanother Third-dimensional World within yet another Solar System.There they must commence, once again from the ground up, a new roundof Third-dimensional physical evolution. Those whose emotions andtheir concentration on their own self-interest at the expense ofothers and whose vibrational levels are still firmly rooted in thelower Third-dimension would otherwise find themselves in intolerablediscomfort at the Fifth vibrational level, no longer able to expresstheir many lower level desires and strong emotions.Those planning to Ascend to the Fifth Dimension therefore need atthis time to undertake a fundamental change of self-motivation, tomove away from a survival-mode of subjective concentration on pureself-interest and its natural tendency towards competitiveindividualism and domination of others. We need in future to embracea new attitude of giving unselfish "service to others" withoutthought of personal gain, and of living a life of unconditional love,forgiveness and mutual tolerance to those around us.When the physical "Earth Changes" finally do take place, the mostvisible manifestation would be a tilting of Earth's Polar axis,possibly caused by the close approach of another large Celestialbody. The resultant disruption of Earth's magnetic orbital balancewould set in motion a major redistribution of the centrifugal balanceof the surface, promoting a rising and a sinking of the maincontinental land masses, accompanied by massive earthquakes, winds ofover 600 miles an hour, enormous tidal waves, great floods and so on.Previous shiftings of our Planet's Polar axis have been well-documented, with much visual geological evidence being left behind.Entire continental landmasses have at some time either been submergedbeneath the oceans, or raised up to become some of today's highestmountain ranges. Seashells and skeletons of fish have been found highup in the Himalayas and the Andes. The great plains of the USA fromMexico to Alaska are known to have once been under the sea, andtoday's Eastern coast of America was the 'shore-line' of what are nowthe Appalachian Mountains. The North and South Poles have movedrapidly to new positions with dramatic surface and climatic changes,as was discovered in 1799, when frozen bodies of mammoths wereunearthed in the tundra of Siberia, their stomachs containing freshlyeaten grasses and leaves normally belonging to tropical regionsthousands of miles to the south. Former tropical coral reefs havebeen discovered as far north as Spitzbergen, within what is now thePolar Circle. Coal deposits found in Antarctica indicate that thearea was once covered by equatorial forests.We need to also become aware that Mother Earth (or Gaia) is herself ahighly evolved Spirit ensouling the Planet. She now awaitsimpatiently for her long-desired Ascension up to the Fifth Dimension.She has had to maintain a long and painful duty of supporting a lowlyevolved combative and turbulent Humanity as part of her CelestialService "Contract". However, before she can Ascend, she needs tocleanse her Planetary Body of all the past pollution, damage anddetritus that Humanity has accumulated on her surface. Her PlanetaryBody has reached such a complete ecological breakdown and disorderthat she simply could not, or would not want to move up to a moreethereal density until it is thoroughly cleansed. The many areas ofinterior blasting within her crust and Humanity's increasingextraction of oil has also caused her much physical distress. Oil isin fact the very "life-blood" of her Planetary Body, part of thesystem that helps to move the tectonic plates and, when necessary, tolock them together. An insufficient quantity of this substance at theintersection of two major continental plates resulted in the massiveunderwater Sumatra Earthquake and tsunami of December 2004.Humanity itself must go through a process of erasing all of its ownpast negative "Karma" before Ascending. We have at this time tobalance out all our past karmaic debts with others and learn toforgive all those that we consider have wronged us. Many of our longrepressed emotional hurts and historical grievances accumulated overthousands of incarnations, held as deep scars within our Soul and ourDNA, need to be brought to the surface, resolved and transmutedbefore we can finally "Ascend".We can in this respect see that there is much world-wide activitycurrently going on in the process of final resolving of all pastKarma, plainly visible in the settling of many historical grievanceswithin the present day conflicts and the recent worldwide escalationof violence. This is very evident in the re-surfacing of the oldChristian-Muslim conflict in the Middle East which was firstgenerated during the times of the Crusades, a long past confrontationthat needs to be finally resolved at this time.Planet Earth has long been separated from contact with other higher-vibration worlds by a surrounding "Veil" or "Frequency Barrier". Thiswas first set up over 13,000 years ago after the destruction of theContinent of Atlantis by the Dark Forces who have secretly beencontrolling our World's political and financial administrations sincethen. As a result we are unaware of all the other inhabited Planetswithin our Solar System and Galaxy. When we view them with our lowfrequency physical vision through telescopes and space probes, all wesee is their long-abandoned Third-dimensional core, their inhabitantshaving long since moved up to higher frequency/vibrational bands oflife encircling their Worlds, and therefore totally invisible to us.In conjunction with the ending of this major Universal Age with amajor step-up to higher dimensions for all members of the Universe,there is now being enacted by decree of Prime Creator, a major "clean-up" within our Sector of Creation of all the former "Forces ofDarkness" . This is a final end to over 500 million years of darknessbrought in by a Dark Force from another outside Creation whichinfiltrated our former Realms of Light. They managed to create manyworlds of total darkness of their own within our Universe as well asover-running other worlds of Light. In the process, they have leftbehind them within our darkened Universe a scene of much destructionand damage, which is now in the process of being finally restored tothe ways of the Light.Planet Earth up to now at the lowest end of the Third Dimension andconsequently with the densest physical vibration level has had afunction as a virtual "remand center" for many of the most negativeand destructive Beings created through the actions of the Dark Forcesbrought in from other parts of our Universe. It has also had tofunction as a "kindergarten" for large numbers of young Human soulswho needed to start out their long evolutionary path within a densephysical Third-dimensional world. Most of these are found in Earth'sdeveloping countries. They came here mainly to learn how to controltheir naturally primitive emotional responses with its inherenttendency towards violent conflict. Through a long process of trialsand tribulations, they eventually are being forced to learn todevelop a deeper respect for each other and for the sanctity of alllife. To assist them along this path there are also incarnated onEarth as "Light Workers", many evolved Beings from the more advancedworlds, who also have a function of helping in the advancement of therest of our World's more developed civilizations.Planet Earth's original Galactic role set out by Prime Creator was tobe the Galaxy's "Museum of Bio-diversity", a Living Museum displayingall the diversity of biological life to be found throughout the otherworlds. Many of the original Human settlers of Planet Earth broughthere on the Mother Ships of the Galactic Federation, were a speciallyselected team of volunteer "Celestial Gardeners" who had pledged tohelp develop new and better varieties of plant and animal life forthis Galactic Museum. They at that time made a long-term "contract"to remain here as Stewards of Earth until a virtual "Garden of Eden"was finally established. Although they were soon dragged down intolower levels of dense physicality by the infiltration of the outsideDark Forces, they nevertheless maintained a "Heavenly Pledge" toreturn here repeatedly until their job was finally done. Millions ofyears later, many are still here working on developing a beautifulenvironment for our Planet.Our Planetary role as a Biological Museum and Showcase for the Galaxyexplains why we are endowed with such a vast and rich variety ofplant and animal life. Our Planet is considered by other worlds to beone of the most beautiful green Water Planets within our Galaxy. Thefuture Fifth-dimensional New Earth will develop this great wealth andvariety of life to even greater heights, creating a trueCelestial "Garden of Eden", not only for our own enjoyment, but forthe education and enjoyment of all the other worlds. We shall also bea great center of learning and information through the great Libraryof Porthologos within the Inner Earth, with its massive crystalcollection of past records derived from all over the Universe.Earth also has up to now been a hard "School of Conflict". It wasgiven, amongst its other roles, the difficult task of being the finalplace for resolving the great Cosmic experiment in "PolarityIntegration" between the fundamental polarities of Light andDarkness, Good and Evil. Thus the other Worlds are watching for thesuccessful outcome of this experiment with great interest. Finding alasting "Middle Way" on Earth will provide a final resolution to themany devastating Galactic Wars and millennia of conflict.Henceforth, Planet Earth's political example for other worlds will beto demonstrate a deeper respect for the integrity and rights ofothers. As a future loving and helping society, we shall demonstratea new attitude of mutual respect, incorporating it into our guidingpolitical principle to be known as the Principle of Liberty orPrinciple of Non-Injury, in which we take all possible steps to avoidintruding into or causing injury within another's Path of Evolution.This will be exemplified as a personal and social moral-behaviourcode of "do unto others only as you would have them do unto you".Chapter 1:ANCIENT PROPHECIESMany Biblical predictions have for long told us clearly andgraphically of the coming "Final Day of Judgment", the "Second Comingof The Christ" and of our final reward of an Ascension up to theHeavenly realms.The old Biblical "Final Day of Judgment" was traditionally dividedinto several different sequences, starting with the "Rapture", inwhich those who are "just and faithful to the ways of the Lord" arelifted up to the Heavens to avoid the "Tribulation" which follows.Then will the "Wrath of the Lord" descend upon those who have failedtheir Final Judgment followed by a great cleansing of Earth. Asmall "Remnant" who repent and learn to change their ways wouldpossibly survive the Tribulation and emerge from their hiding placesunderground and in caves to commence a glorious new Millennium, aprophesied 1,000-year Golden Age of Peace, to be started off with theSecond Coming of The Christ to Earth as the "Prince of Peace, King ofKings and Lord of Lords".Isaiah describes the Tribulation graphically in the Old Testament:"Behold the day of the Lord cometh cruel both with wrath and fierceanger to lay the Land desolate: and He shall destroy the sinnersthereof out of it. For the stars of Heaven and the constellationsthereof shall not give their light: the Sun shall be darkened in hisgoing forth, and the Moon shall not cause her light to shine. And Iwill punish the World for their evil and the wicked for theiriniquity; and I will cause the arrogance of the proud to cease, andwill lay low the haughtiness of the Terrible. I will make a man moreprecious than fine gold; even a man the Golden Wedge of Ophir.Therefore I will shake the Heavens, and the Earth shall remove out ofher place". [Isaiah 13: 9-13]The New Testament gives four major prophecies of the Final Day ofJudgment and the Second Coming of The Christ: from the Apostles Mark,Luke and Matthew, and the Book of Revelations by St. John of theIsland of Patmos.In the Gospel according to St Luke, Jesus speaks of the "Signs beforethe End" and the "Second Coming":"The days will come, in which there shall not be left one stone uponanother, that shall not be thrown down. Nation shall rise againstnation and kingdom against kingdom: and great earthquakes shall be indivers places, and famines, and pestilences; and fearful sights andgreat signs shall there be from Heaven.And there shall be signs in the Sun, and in the Moon, and in thestars; and upon the Earth distress of nations, with perplexity; thesea and waves roaring; men's hearts failing them for fear, and forlooking after those things which are coming on the Earth: for thepowers of Heaven shall be shaken.And then shall they see the Son of Man coming in a cloud with powerand great glory. And when these things begin to come to pass, thenlook up, and lift up your heads; for your redemption draweth nigh".[Luke 21: 6, 10, 25-28]Likewise from St Matthew:"For then shall be great tribulation, such as was not since thebeginning of the world to this time, no, nor ever shall be. Andunless those days should be shortened, there should no flesh besaved: but for the elect's sake those days shall be shortened.Immediately after the tribulation of those days shall the sun bedarkened, and the moon shall not give her light, and the stars shallfall from heaven, and the powers of the heavens shall be shaken. Butof that day and hour knoweth no man, no, not the Angels of Heaven,but my Father only". [Matthew 24: 21-22; 29, 36]In the Book of Revelations, St John the Divine was given a vision inwhich a High Angel broke seven seals, each containing a revelation, afuture vision:"And I beheld when he had opened the Sixth Seal, and, lo, there was agreat earthquake; and the sun became black as sackcloth of hair, andthe moon became as blood; and the stars of Heaven fell unto theEarth, even as a fig tree casteth her untimely figs, when she isshaken of a mighty wind.And the Heaven departed as a scroll when it is rolled together; andevery mountain and island were moved out of their places.And when he had opened the Seventh Seal, there was silence in Heaven.And I saw the Seven Angels which stood before God; and to them weregiven seven trumpets.The first Angel sounded, and there followed hail and fire mingledwith blood, and they were cast upon the Earth: and the third part oftrees was burnt up, and all green grass was burnt up.And the second Angel sounded, and as it were a great mountain burningwith fire was cast into the sea: and the third part of the sea becameblood; and the third part of the creatures which were in the sea, andhad life, died; and the third part of the ships were destroyed.And the third Angel sounded, and there fell a great star from Heaven,burning as it were a lamp, and it fell upon the third part of therivers, and upon the fountains of waters; and the name of the star iscalled Wormwood; and many men died of the waters, because they weremade bitter.And the seventh Angel sounded; and there were great voices in Heaven,saying, "The kingdoms of this world are become the kingdoms of ourLord, and of his Christ; and he shall reign for ever and ever".[Revelation 6:12-14; 8:1-2 & 7-11; 11:15]The Buddhist tradition also foretells the end of the presentcivilization 2,500 years after the birth of the Buddha, at which timemankind will be redeemed by Maitreya, the future Buddha. The exactbirth year of the original Buddha is not known, but the earliest ofseveral dates is 566 BC, thus confirming the timing of the predictedchanges to occur after the end of the 20th Century.In the early 1830s the Church of the Latter Day Saints was founded onthe prophecies given to Joseph Smith by an Angelic Being, namedMoroni, and on Smith's subsequent discovery, under Moroni'sdirection, of buried golden tablets of great antiquity inscribed withmuch ancient wisdom which was to become "The Book of Mormon".The Mormon teachings repeat the Biblical warnings of great judgmentswhich were coming upon the Earth, with great desolations by famine,sword, and pestilence..."And when that day shall come they shall be visited of the Lord ofHosts, with thunder and with earthquake, and with a great noise, andwith storm, and with tempest, and with the flame of devouring fire".One of the best known of more recent psychics and clairvoyants, EdgarCayce, gave between 1901 and 1945 thousands of trance 'readings'.Cayce became well known for his trance diagnoses of illnessesand 'miracle' cures, later to be documented and confirmed by medicalscience. He also gave many predictions of future events which were tobe proved unusually accurate. For the end of the Twentieth Century hepredicted earthquakes, volcanic eruptions and catastrophic changes tothe Earth's surface:"The Earth will be broken up in many places. The early portion willsee a change in the physical aspect of the West Coast of America.There will be open waters appearing in the northern portions ofGreenland. There will be new lands seen off the Caribbean Sea, anddry land will appear. South America shall be shaken from theuppermost portion to the end, and in the Antarctic off Tierra delFuego LAND, and a strait with rushing waters..." [3976-15, Jan 19,1934]"The Earth will be broken up in the western portion of America. Thegreater portion of Japan must go into the sea. The upper portion ofEurope will be changed as in the twinkling of an eye. Land willappear off the East coast of America..."[3976-15, Jan 19, 1934]"There will be upheavals in the Arctic and the Antarctic that willmake for the eruptions of volcanoes in the Torrid areas, and therewill then be the shifting of the poles - so that where there havebeen frigid or semi-tropical areas, these will become the moretropical, and moss and fern will grow..." (3976-15, Jan 19, 1934)"In the next few years, lands will appear in the Atlantic as well asin the Pacific. And what is the coastline now of many a land will bethe bed of the ocean... Portions of the now East coast of New York,or New York City itself, will in the main disappear... while thesouthern portions of Carolina, Georgia, these will disappear". [1152-11, Aug 13, 1941]Cayce also refers to ancient records of Atlantis hidden undergroundin a secret chamber near the Pyramid of Giza in Egypt, covering theentire history of mankind from pre-Egypt to the end of the 20thCentury - which is, said Cayce, "...that period when there is to bethe change in the Earth's position, and the return of the GreatInitiate to that and other lands for the folding up of thoseprophecies that are depicted there". [5748-5][From the "Life Readings" by EDGAR CAYCE. Copyright 1971, 1993, 1995by the Edgar Cayce Foundation, Virginia Beach, Virginia 23451, U.S.A.and used by permission.]As we consider the possibility and the implications of thesepredicted Earth Changes, we can be quite certain that physicalchanges of enormous magnitude have already occurred many times duringPlanet Earth's long history.Chapter 2:A HISTORY OF UPHEAVALWe tend quite naturally to regard "our Earth" as a stable andunchanging home, a "sure stronghold" which could never besubstantially disrupted. Our confidence may from time to time beshaken by major earthquakes and typhoons, but these soon pass over,and we prefer to regard them as minor temporary upsets in anotherwise comfortable and predictable environment. There is howevermuch geological evidence of sudden and major structural changeshaving taken place on Planet Earth in the past; and it is notunreasonable to consider the possibility that what has happened inthe past may well be repeated.Historical accounts written many centuries ago bear witness toprevious planetary disruptions. Immanuel Velikovsky has made a majorcontribution to research in this area; his "Worlds in Collision",written in 1950, assembles numerous Biblical and ancient historicalreferences to such events, drawing substantially on contemporaryaccounts from the Middle East and lower Mexico.He quotes, for example, a long inscription in hieroglyphics on ashrine of black granite found at El-Arish on the border of Egypt andPalestine. It reads: "The land was in great affliction. Evil fell onthis earth. There was a great upheaval in the residence. Nobody couldleave the palace during nine days, and during these nine days ofupheaval there was such a tempest that neither men nor gods could seethe faces of those beside them".This inscription corresponds with the Bible, Exodus 10,22: "And therewas a thick darkness in all the land of Egypt three days. They sawnot one another, neither rose any from his place for three days".East of Egypt, in Babylonia, the eleventh tablet of the 'Epic ofGilgamesh' refers to the same events:"From out of the horizon rose a dark cloud and it rushed against theEarth; the land was shrivelled by the heat of flames. Desolationstretched to heaven; all that was bright was turned into darkness.Nor could a brother distinguish his brother. (For) six days thehurricane, deluge, and tempest continued sweeping the land, and allhumans back to their clay were returned".The Ancient Egyptian historian Ipuwer witnessed and survived thisearthquake, recounting that: "The towns are destroyed, Upper Egypthas become a waste. All is ruin. The residence is overturned in aminute". [Papyrus Ipuwer 2:11, 3:13]From his research into ancient documents, Velikovsky concludes thatthe Earth was forced out of its regular motion by the close approachof the body of a comet: a major shock convulsed the lithosphere, andthe area of the earthquake was the entire globe. Terrific hurricanesswept the Earth because of the change or reversal of the angularvelocity of rotation and because of the sweeping gases, dust, andcinders of the comet.He supports this contention of worldwide disruptions with similarquotations from historical records of Mexican tradition.The Mexican sacred book "Popol-Vuh", the "Manuscript Cakchiquel", andthe "Manuscript Troano" all record how the mountains in every part ofthe Western Hemisphere simultaneously gushed lava. The volcanoes thatopened along the entire chain of the Cordilleras and in othermountain ranges and on flat land vomited fire, vapour, and torrentsof lava.Velikovsky quotes "Manuscript Troano" and other documents of theMayas which describe a cosmic catastrophe during which the ocean fellupon the continent and a terrible hurricane swept the Earth. Theserecords provide graphic accounts of hurricanes which broke up andcarried away all towns and forests. Exploding volcanoes, tidessweeping over mountains, and raging winds threatened to annihilateHumankind, and actually did annihilate many species of animals. Theface of the Earth changed, mountains collapsed, other mountains grewand rose over the onrushing cataract of water driven from oceanicspaces, numberless rivers lost their beds, and a wild tornado movedthrough the debris descending from the sky.The ancients referred to the physical agent that brought darkness andswept away houses and trees and even rocks and mounds of earthas "Hurakan", from which our present word 'hurricane' is derived.Hurakan, it is recorded, destroyed the major part of the Human Race.In the darkness swept by wind, resinous stuff fell from the sky andparticipated with fire on water in the destruction of the world. Forfive days, save for the burning naphtha and burning volcanoes, theWorld was dark, since the sun did not appear.In a later book, "Earth in Upheaval", Velikovsky supports Biblicaland other historical references with currently visible geologicalevidence of past upheavals.He describes, for example, an area in Alaska to the north of MountMcKinley which has a frozen layer of "muck" composed of a jumble oftrees and extinct animals, such as the mammoth, mastodon and super-bison. This was analyzed by Professor F.C. Hibben of the Universityof New Mexico, who concluded:"There is ample evidence that at least portions of this material weredeposited under catastrophic conditions. Mammal remains are for themost part dismembered and dis-articulated, even though some fragmentsyet retain, in their frozen state, portions of ligaments, skin, hair,and flesh. Twisted and torn trees are piled in splintered masses. Atleast four considerable layers of volcanic ash may be traced in thesedeposits, although they are extremely warped and distorted."The presence of volcanic ash indicates that a volcanic eruption didtake place, and repeatedly, in four consecutive stages of the sameepoch; but it is also apparent that the trees could have beenuprooted and splintered only by hurricane or flood or a combinationof both agencies. The animals could have been dismembered only by astupendous wave that lifted and carried and smashed and tore andburied millions of bodies and millions of trees. Also, the area ofthe catastrophe was much greater than the action of a few volcanoescould have covered."During the late 1830s Hugh Miller made a special study of the Old RedSandstone in Scotland in which an abundant aquatic fauna is embedded.The animals embedded within it are seen in very 'disturbed'positions. Miller writes: "Some terrible catastrophe involved insudden destruction the fish of an area at least a hundred miles fromboundary to boundary, perhaps more. The same platform in Orkney, asat Cromarty, is strewn thick with remains, which exhibitunequivocally the marks of violent death. The figures are contorted,contracted, curved; the tail in many instances is bent around to thehead; the spines stick out; the fins are spread to the full, as infish that die in convulsions."In 1901 a quick-frozen mammoth was found in Beresovka, Siberia, sowell preserved that its eyeballs were fully intact. It still hadbuttercups in its mouth and the content of its stomach indicated thatit had been eating temperate-zone plants, no longer growing in thatarea. R.S. Lull, Director of the Peabody Museum at Yale, reports thediscovery in his book "Organic Evolution", confirming that: "...afractured hip and fore limb, a great mass of clotted blood in thechest, and unswallowed grass between the clenched teeth, all point tothe violence and suddenness of its passing."Rock geology shows that there have been major uplifts of land massesaround the globe. The great massif of the Himalayas is estimated tohave risen to its present height since the last Ice Age of over11,000 years ago. Likewise the Andes in South America also showevidence of having been thrust upwards eleven thousand years ago.Many other researchers have identified evidence of major geologicalchanges during our Planet's long history; indeed, there are manyareas in which even a casual observer can see such evidence for himor herself, as for example when erosion shows cross-sections ofhillsides miles from the present coastline displaying deposits ofseashells.An interesting example, quoted in "Doomsday 1999 A.D.", by CharlesBerlitz, can be found in Bolivia. The stone city of Tiahuanaco is soold that its broken pottery shows pictures of Pleistocene animals.Although Tiahuanaco is now at an altitude of 13,500 feet, too highfor a population to live, its docks and quays indicate that it wasonce a seaport and that it rose with the Andes when they were created11,000 years ago.Immanuel Velikovsky summarizes these sudden geological changes:"Wherever we investigate the geological records of this Earth, wefind signs of catastrophes and upheavals, old and recent."Mountains sprang from plains, and other mountains were levelled;strata of the terrestrial crust were folded and pressed together andoverturned and moved and put on top of other formations. Igneous rockmelted and flooded enormous areas of land with miles-thick sheets,and the ocean bed flowed with molten rock. Ashes were showered downand built layers many yards thick on the ground and on the bottom ofthe oceans in their vast expanse. The shores of ancient lakes weretilted and are no longer horizontal and the seacoasts show subsidenceor emergence, in some places, of over one thousand feet."Rocks of the Earth are filled with remains of life extinguished in astate of agony. Sedimentary rocks are one vast graveyard, and thegranite and basalt, too, have embedded in them numberless livingorganisms. Shells have closed valves as they do in a living state, sounexpectedly came the entombment. Vast forests were burned and washedaway and covered with the waters of the seas and with sand and turnedto coal. Animals were swept to the far north and thrown into heapsand were soaked by bituminous outpourings. Broken bones and tornligaments and the skins of animals, both of living species and ofextinct species, were smashed together with splintered forests intohuge piles."The evidence is overwhelming that the great global catastrophes wereeither accompanied or caused by the shifting of the terrestrial axis,or by a disturbance in the diurnal and annual motions of the Earth.The shifting of the axis could not have been brought about byinternal causes, but only under the impact of external forces. Thestate of lavas with reversed magnetization, hundreds of times moreintense than the inverted terrestrial magnetic field could impart,reveals the nature of the forces that were in action".['Earth in Upheaval', by Immanuel Velikovsky – 1955 – Buccaneer BooksInc., Cutchogue, NY, USA.]Set against the wider time-frame of the many dramatic surface changeswhich have already occurred, current predictions of majorphysical 'Earth Changes' may now perhaps seem less extreme. There isplenty of evidence that the Planet's very geography has in fact beendramatically changed many times before, and likewise, there is noscientific evidence to support the contention that such changes willnot happen yet again.Human Earth civilizations have also come and gone. Most people todaylook at the story of Humanity and assume that it has lasted for onlysix thousand years or so, but there have in fact been many much oldercivilizations, such as Lemuria (or Mu) in the Pacific Ocean and thelegendary Atlantis in the Atlantic Ocean.Chapter 3:PROPHETS OF OUR TIMEIn March 1994, NBC television network broadcast a programentitled "Ancient Prophecies", covering both ancient and contemporarypredictions of Earth Changes. It was seen by millions of American andCanadian viewers and prompted over 24,000 enquiries. A major featurewas the prediction by Gordon-Michael Scallion of violent andsignificant geological changes coming to Earth by the end of theMillennium. Although these events have not yet manifested, they stillremain a potential possibility for the near future, and thereforetheir details are worth taking into consideration.Mr. Scallion had worked in the field of communications and educationuntil 1979, when he experienced a health crisis which left him withthe 'gift of prophecy'. Some of his more notable prophecies were the1992 Californian earthquakes on April 22 and June 28, HurricaneAndrew in Florida, and the Mississippi floods of 1993.Viewers of the March 1994 program were shown a Future Map of theUnited States: 1998-2001 which Mr Scallion had visualized through hisinner sight. Published by his company Matrix Institute, the mapshowed major geological changes in the United States occurring in twodistinct phases:A first super-mega California earthquake in the 10-15 magnitude rangecauses a fracture along a line from Eureka to Bakersfield andsouthwest to the Gulf of California-Baja. Gaps and fissures occurrunning the length of the San Joaquin and Sacramento Valleys.Flooding inundates much of the coastal area of California, causingsome of the existing land mass to become islands.In a second major Californian earthquake the Central North AmericanPlate is thrust violently upward on a tilt, causing much ofCalifornia to go under the sea. Higher elevations remain as islandsand become known as the Isles of California. A large part of the landmass west of a line running from Newport Oregon to Tucson Arizonabreaks away and sinks within minutes. This line forms the new WestCoast of the United States, and with Phoenix, Arizona, becoming amajor seaport.Along the Eastern seaboard, coastlines from Maine to Florida are alsopushed inland for many miles. Atlanta Georgia becomes a new seaport.Florida is reduced in size by more than half and all the Florida Keysdisappear beneath the sea.In the center of the American continent, a wide belt of water floodsthe Mississippi basin, connecting up with the Great Lakes, whichthemselves rise and expand, cutting off the Eastern part of theUnited States from the West and effectively creating two separatelandmasses.Mr. Scallion envisaged the Earth's magnetic pole shifting twice tothe west: seven degrees at first, and then a further six degrees as aresult of magna displacement through a shifting of the Earth's core.As a contributory element he saw a large heavenly body entering oursolar system, the "Blue Star", causing a realignment of Earth'sposition within the system.We must bear in mind that although these events have not yetmanifested themselves, they are all potentialities that can be seenfrom higher spiritual planes. Altough they have in fact been delayedand greatly modified by the relatively good progress made by Humanitysince that time, they nonetheless will still manifest, althoughprobably to a lesser degree, at the appropriately set Divine time forour final Ascension.Another 'Future Map' of America was channeled through Lori AdaileToye, between 1988 and 1991, transmitted jointly by the AscendedMasters Saint Germain, Kuthumi, El Morya, Mother Mary, Sanat Kumara,Sananda, and other Masters of Earth's Spiritual Hierarchy. It waspublished as the 'New World Atlas' by Seventh Ray Publishing ofPayson Arizona.This material demonstrated remarkable similarities with the mapproduced by Mr Scallion. Much of the American West Coast was to beinundated, from Washington State down to southern Oregon, with theocean covering most of California, Nevada and Utah. This created anew coastline extending from the Rocky Mountains, near Denver, downto Phoenix, Arizona. Similarly the Mississippi River on this mapexpands into a wide inlet, running up to an enlarged Great Lakesarea, with the East Coast partially flooded, and the bottom tip ofFlorida sinking under the ocean.Again much of the same outline was prophesied from yet anothersource:Hypnotic past-life regression is an established technique in whichthe patient under hypnosis is able to recall specific episodes fromhis or her past life or lives. The pioneering past-life and prenatalwork of Dr Helen Wambach PhD is reviewed in her two published booksRecalling Past Lives (Harper & Row 1978) and Life Before Life (BantamBooks 1979). Having demonstrated this technique to her satisfactionduring a series of group workshops, Dr Wambach wondered how it wouldwork when applied to the future. She therefore began giving similarworkshops offering participants a chance to look ahead at theirpossible future lives through hypnotic progression, projection notinto the past, but into the future.Dr Wambach was at that time being assisted in her research andexperiments by Dr Chet Snow PhD, who also then himself became hersubject for a series of future life projections in 1983. Dr Snow wasat that time an historian/archivist working as a civilian employee ofthe United States Air Force, subsequently obtaining a hypno-therapycertification and now practising regression therapy. The fascinatingrecord of these future projections under hypnosis is related in DrSnow's book "Mass Dreams of the Future".Under hypnosis, Dr Snow described, aloud, visions of his future lifeat the end of the 20th Century. Here he sees himself living on aremote ranch north of Phoenix Arizona, in a small community which hadbeen set up both as a school for the development of psychiccommunication skills (mental telepathy) and as a survival base forthe foreseen coming 'World Changes'.He recounts that their small community was then busy laying-in stocksof food and other supplies, which were now becoming both expensiveand scarce through changing weather patterns. In the world news, theweather was becoming increasingly unpredictable, with freak storms,record heat and cold periods, drought and exceptional rainfall aroundthe globe. The world stock markets and financial systems were alsocollapsing.In a time period of a year later, Dr Snow was made aware that a majorearthquake had just hit the Pacific Rim area. The coastline areas ofsouthern California had sunk, submerging the once densely built-upcoastal areas under the sea. Mount Fuji had erupted, causing much ofJapan to sink and triggering a chain of earthquakes and eruptions allaround the Pacific 'Ring of Fire', including the West Coast ofAmerica right up into Alaska.By the end of two weeks, television and radio were now tellingeveryone that "the worst is over". As Dr Snow, still under hypnosis,recounted: "The water is receding slowly and we'll just have toadjust to the new situation. The Federal Government is alreadysetting up temporary relocation centers farther inland and everyoneis talking of rebuilding. A lot of cropland has been permanently losthowever, not to mention so much of the Southern Californiacoastline."Moving forward a couple of months, he reports that there followed inSouthern California a far more devastating earthquake than theprevious one: "It accelerated the sinking of major areas along theWest Coast so that the coastline moved up to within a couple ofhundred miles of Phoenix Arizona, and only the mountain areasremained above water all the way up to Oregon. In the south, the Gulfof Mexico surged inward over Texas; our part of Arizona was more orless cut off to both the east and west by water."Moving yet further ahead in time, Dr Snow continues:"At first everything appeared totally black around me. Then Irealized that the sky was completely dark now. The weather had alsoworsened as tons of dust and volcanic ash were thrown into theatmosphere by this second series of eruptions. Although the worstoccurred during the first few weeks of havoc, the Sun simply did notreturn. Most green vegetation in a wide belt of the temperate zonewithered and died."['Mass Dreams of the Future', by Chet B. Snow and Helen Wambach -Deep Forest Press, Crest Park, CA – 1993]One must bear in mind when considering such predictions, that alltimings and sequences of future events can never be entirelyaccurate, as projection forward in time can only be made up ofpotential future. In all evolutionary progress, a sequence of real-life "cause-and-effect" events must always first of all take place,constantly being subjected to the changing modifications ofindividual "free will". Although a fairly accurate view projectedforward is possible from higher planes, Humanity's inherent giftof 'free will' causes unexpected modifications in any future sequenceof events. Also, any future direction these take is always subject tothe total progress of Humanity's 'Collective Consciousness' duringthat period. This explains why we our now being informed by "HigherSources" that much of the severity of the previously predicted "EarthChanges" has since been greatly modified, thanks to the fairly rapidspiritual and evolutionary progress of Humanity in recent years.And now, approaching predictions of future "Earth Changes" from atotally different source, there have been since World War II anenormous quantity of channeled communications from Higher SpiritualRealms on the coming Earth Changes. A few selected examples follow:The Master Hilarion, an Ascended Member of Earth's SpiritualHierarchy:"The cities will become piles of rubble. The beautiful woodlandscenes will be flattened by the might of terrible storms. Greatearthquakes will rip the mantle of the planet apart in a patchwork ofdestruction never before seen on the Planet in the entire history ofthe race."Continents sunk thousands of years ago will rear up out of the oceanto show man that his civilization is not the first, and that this isnot the first time that his efforts have been crushed by catastrophe."The atmospheric storms, which will roar across the surface, willtear down forests of trees at a single swipe, and raise water out ofthe natural reservoirs of lake and ocean to spread destruction andinundation far inland from the shore. Nothing will remain of the once-vaunted civilization that men have built for themselves."During the last portion of the Tribulation, the light of the Sun andthe Moon will be shrouded out completely for long periods, and thevery air that is breathed will turn to a foul miasma in the lungs."[HILARION, channeled by Maurice B. Cooke in 'The Nature of Reality'.First published 1979. Marcus Books, Box 942 Bradford , Ontario L3Z2B4 - Canada – Tel: (905) 551-1661 - chris.rieder@rogers.com -www.hilarionbooks.com ]The Master Jesus-Sananda:"And there shall be a mighty earthquake and it shall split in twainthe country of North America, and it shall be as nothing the worldhas known before, for it shall be that there shall be a great part ofthe great land of the North Continent go down, and a great sea shallform within her center part from Canada into the Gulf of Mexico."And the waters of the Mediterranean shall wash over the land to theNorth, unto the polar zone, and it shall return unto its place, andthe Black Sea and the Mediterranean shall become one sea. And thereshall be great changes within the borders of Asia."Africa shall be changed - her shoreline shall be broken to the West,and great rivers shall flow within the desert."Ye have been told time and time again that the Earth shall shiftupon her axis, and so shall she. There shall be a change of climate.That which is now the barren North shall become semi-tropical. Treesshall bear semi-tropical fruit and the fauna shall be that of a newspecies. And that which is the impassable barrier of the South Poleshall be penetrated and Man shall discover a new continent within."[JESUS-SANANDA, channeled by Sister Thedra in 'The Prophecies FromOther Planets Concerning Our Earth' - The Association of Sananda andSanat Kumara, Sedona, Arizona]Brother Philip, of the Abbey of the Brotherhood of the Seven Rays inthe Peruvian Andes near Lake Titicaca, gives us transcripts channeledfrom the 'Great White Brotherhood' in his book "Secret of the Andes".He quotes Sanat Kumara, a highly evolved Master from Venus whoassumed the role of 'Planetary Logos of Earth' over 18 million yearsago:"And now we enter this great period of Initiation. The skies of Earthwill become fantastic. I say verily that pen has not recorded norvoice uttered that which shall become a great sign and display in theskies of the Earth, for the elements themselves will have control fora short period of time. There will be great rainstorms and floods.You have heard how it rained forty days and nights. That is nothingcompared to what it will rain. Perhaps it would be forty months. Theentire face of the Earth shall change. It will become unrecognizable."Very soon the winds shall howl, sooner than we can realize. It isalready upon us, for I have witnessed it on the plane which is justabove that of physical expression upon the Earth, and that means thatif it descends one more plane it shall find reality."[The Master SANAT KUMARA, channeled by Brother Philip in 'Secret ofthe Andes' - Leaves of Grass Press, Novato, California.]Another source of channeled information originates from the Starsystems of the Pleiades. The Pleiadians are a planetary race whichhas been closely connected with Earth and the Human Race since ourearly arrival on this planet; they themselves come from the sameHuman evolutionary roots in distant pre-Earth times on other planets.They have developed a prosperous and peaceful society within theirown Star system, and have always maintained a close watch overEarth's development down through the ages. In the book "The PleiadianWorkbook", channeled by Amorah Quan Yin, the 'Pleiadian Emissaries ofLight', speaking through their spokesperson, Ra, give an importantinsight into the wider context of the coming Earth Changes:"You and your planet are undergoing a unique and wondrous transitionin your spiritual evolution at this time. You are preparing for aquantum leap unlike any that has ever occurred before. In order tohelp you understand this more fully, I must first tell you about theorbit of the entire Galaxy around the Great Central Sun of All ThatIs. Just like your 'Solar Ring' (our term for a 'solar system')orbits around the Galactic Center, the Galaxy itself moves throughspace in the form of continual, connecting circles, like a greatCosmic Spiral."At the completion point of a multi billion-year single circularorbit around the Great Central Sun, our Galaxy connects diagonally tothe next 'ring' on the great Cosmic Spiral. When this diagonal movefrom one ring of the great Cosmic Spiral to the next takes place, allof the planets, solar systems, and their inhabitants simultaneouslytake an 'initiatic' step into a new evolutionary cycle. This isoccurring now. You are not only at the end of a 26,000-yearEarth/Sun/Pleiadian cycle; the entire Pleiadian system, whichincludes this solar ring, is at the end of a 230,000,000-year orbitaround the Galactic Center, and the entire Galaxy is at thecompletion of its infinitely longer orbit around the Great CentralSun...."Prior to the end of 2012, Earth will undergo a spiritual andphysical house-cleaning, corresponding to what have commonly beencalled the 'Earth Changes'. These changes, which have already begun,intensify both externally and internally as your Solar Ring movesdeeper into the Photon Band, a high-frequency cosmic emanation fromthe Galactic Center. You have been in and out of the edges of thisPhoton Band for a few years now, and, after the year 2000, will startto be be completely immersed in this band for the next 2000 years."Floods, earthquakes, changes in land masses, volcanic eruptions, andfinally a complete pole shift, will all take place within theremaining years prior to the year 2013, at which time the GalacticSolar Initiation of Earth, as a Mystery School and home for theCities of Light, will finally take place. You who now live on Earthmust choose whether or not you are ready to become spirituallyresponsible Human Beings in order to remain on Earth beyond thattime. Those who do not wish to remain on Earth will be taken toanother planet in a different part of the Galaxy where karmic lessonsand third-dimensional evolution will continue."[Ra, spokesperson for the collective Pleiadians Emissaries of Light,channeled by Amorah Quan Yin, in "The Pleiadian Workbook", published1996 by Bear & Company, P.O.Box 2860, Santa Fe, NM 87504, USA.]A more detailed background on the nature of the Photon Band is givento us from another Pleiadian Source, in this case by Satya,Astrologer, Keeper of the Records for the Pleiades and the CentralPleiadian Library of Alcyone. Alcyone not only is the Central Star ofthe Pleiadian Constellation, but also functions as the Great CentralStar within this quadrant of the Milky-Way Galaxy for our own SolarSystem."Your Sun is spinning as the eighth Star of the Pleiadian spiral, andthe Pleiades are themselves spiraling within the Galaxy as the wholeGalaxy spins on its axis. Your Solar System travels through thePhoton Band when Earth precesses the Ages of Leo and Aquarius, andthen you orbit through the "Galactic Night" during all the otherzodiacal polarities of the Great Ages - Cancer/Capricorn,Gemini/Sagittarius, Taurus/Scorpio, Aries/Libra, and Pices/Virgo. Atthis time, you are moving into the Photon Band as you are leaving theAge of Pices and moving into the Age of Aquarius."Photon Bands are 7th-Dimensional "Donuts of Light" that emanate fromthe vertical axis of the Galactic Center. They spin around and aroundthrough the Galactic Center into the darkness of the Galactic Night.Galactic Centers [a central Galaxy vortex that appears as a "blackhole"] are of 9th-Dimensional pure darkness, and yet, as they spin ontheir axes, the astounding power of their vortexes shoots out 9th-Dimensional galactic synchronization beams. These synchronizationbeams spin out of the black-hole Galactic Centers, torqued by thegalactic axial spin. These beams, belts, axes, and horizontal planeswith black hole vortexes in their centers are 8th-Dimensionorganizational systems of intelligence. In the Milky Way Galaxy, this8th Dimensional brilliance is part of the Light that belongs to theGalactic Federation, holding the Galaxy in form by means ofthe "information-highway" Photon Bands. All stars existingpermanently within the several Photon Bands generate spirals thatcapture other Stars, and these special "Photon Stars", such asAlcyone, then function as Galactic Federation Libraries."Your Sun is linked to the Pleiades by means of a spiral of StellarLight radiating out from Alcyone. Star Light is 5th-Dimensional Lightthat moves out through the Stars of the Pleiades - out from Alcyone,through the Pleiadian Stars of Merope, Maya, Electra, Taygeta, Coele,and finally via Atlas to your Sun. Thus in your legends, Atlas holdsEarth on His shoulders in space. Each Pleiadian Star, except Alcyone,which is located in the Photon Band eternally, travels through the7th-Dimensional Photon Band for 2000 years of Earth time. Each Starin the system then travels through the Galactic Night for varyinglengths of Earth time."The Stars close to Alcyone, such as Merope and Maya, are in thePhoton Bands for more time than they are in the Galactic Night. YourSolar System spends the most time out in the Galactic Night - 11,000years in the Dark and 2000 years in the Light. What does this mean?Various members of the solar system become very dense while in theGalactic Night, and this generates experience called "Karma" -feelings in our 4th-Dimensional bodies on the spiritual level thatseek expression and then translate as actions down on the ThirdDimension physical world. Bodies traveling in the 7th-D Photon Bandsbecome less dense, more multidimensional. As a result, theiracquisition of the Photon Light cleanses their emotional bodies andintensifies vibrations in physical bodies."The 7th-Dimension "donuts" of Photonic Light coming from theGalactic Center are information highways that stimulate the natureof "curiosity". The desire for union, for twinning, for newexpressions of both sides of a duality, derive from this passion ofseeking. This seeking is what causes the rods of 7th-D Photonic Lightto curl back on themselves to the Galactic Center, forming theminto "donuts". The Galaxy would disintegrate into empty space withoutthe nucleus of gravity in the Central vortex, from which pulses ofPhotonic Light then shoot out."See your own Solar System as a disk with the Sun in the center andall the planets whirling around it. That disk is divided into twelvezones, the Twelve Great Ages of the Zodiac. As the planets movethrough these zodiacal zones, you can locate where a planet is inrelationship to the Sun in these zones with astronomical ephemerides.For now, it is enough for you to know that Earth first entered thePhoton Band during the Spring Equinox of 1987 and has been steadilymoving into it further - one week more each side of that entry pointeach year. The border of Photonic Light is currently inching acrossthe disk of your Solar System. Earth was first in the Photon Bandfrom March 16 to 23 in 1987, then for three weeks in 1988. ThePhotonic slice in the Solar Disk increases by two weeks each year,and precisely half of your Solar System will be immersed when thePhoton Band reaches your Sun at the Winter Solstice 1998. EventuallyEarth's entire orbital path will be engulfed in this tidal wave oflight by the Winter Solstice of 2012. Eventually, the whole SolarSystem will be totally in the Photon Band. During the next 2000years, it will be travelling all the way through it."[Satya, channeled through Barbara Hand Clow, in "The PleiadianAgenda", published 1996 by Bear & Company, P.O.Box 2860, Santa Fe, NM87504, USA.]--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Our forthcoming LIGHT BODY through Mary MageauHumanity is experiencing a great awakening as we currently enter thistime of transformation. Many of us are searching for deeper meaningin our lives as we change jobs, end old relationships, begin newones, relocate to new places and dream bold, creative new dreams. Allaround us we witness to the fact that ordinary people are now askingquestions, demanding answers and requesting greater accountabilityfrom our governments, churches and large institutions that hold powerover us. And what is the driving force behind these world wideevents? This scenario for change that is occurring everywhere isbeing driven by the waves of light that are continually bombardingour solar system and the Earth plane. And in the near future all whochoose to fully participate in the new raising of consciousness willbe transmuted into higher dimensional bodies of light.Within a 2,000 year period our Solar System passes through a band ofextremely high energy. This band has been referred to as the MenasicRadiation or the Photon Belt. It is a period of intense light that wehave now entered and which will bring all life forms within it into anew and higher vibration. This Photon Light energy has the capacityto lift all of life into a higher frequency dimension. It carries theseeds for the potential enlightenment of all beings as the atomicstructures within the very cells of our bodies, are tuning themselvesto match the rising frequencies. We are shifting from a Third-dimensional carbon based body (that is from one that matches thevibratory rate and direction of atomic spin characterized by theelectrons that make up carbon) to a Fifth or higher dimensionalcrystalline body (that is to one that matches the atomic spin andfrequency of crystal). So too the bodies of animals, plant life andall upon and within the earth are making this transition with us, asis our entire Galaxy.Our Light Bodies are also being activated as these new energiesrecalibrate our dormant DNA strands that contain the blueprint ofourselves as Divine and fully conscious Beings. Currently most ofHumanity has only two functioning strands of DNA, intertwined into adouble helix. This portion of our DNA structure contains informationpertaining to our biology - such as our individual features and thegenetic information passed on through our family lines, e.g.: apaternal grandfather's tendency toward arthritis, or a mother's genesfor musical talent. These two strands also hold the genetic codes forour physical evolution. But there is another part of our DNAstructure that has to do with the spiritual component of the HumanBeing, one that science has not presently considered. If one ispersuaded that the Human Being consists of a Soul embedded within abiological body, then it should logically follow that the geneticlinks within each individual would also contain spiritualinformation. And if this is so what has become of it?Many of these spiritual elements were deliberately turned off in ourancient history because there was a struggle to control this aspectof a Human Being. Very dark energy extraterrestrial forces, who werealso genetic engineers, desired to keep the development of Humankindfirmly under their control. They achieved this through the use ofgenetic manipulation to produce fear and domination. This eventoccurred in Atlantis, over 13,000 years ago, when the Human DNAmolecule was breached. When these dark forces unravelled andreprogrammed our DNA, they were able to shut down and isolate many ofits strands and Human DNA was reduced to only a double helix. Thedisconnection of our original DNA manipulation resulted in a 'Veil'being placed between our five physical senses and our spiritualawareness. However there was a promise given from the Higher Realms.At some time in our future we would be allowed to develop againaccording to the divine blueprint of the original plan. In themeantime Humanity had to undergo a long and painful period ofspiritual development. Those guiding our spiritual heritage have sentrepresentatives to assist us to elevate our thoughts and desires, soas to grow spiritually and regain our lost abilities. These advancedsouls include the prophets, Jesus Christ, Muhammed, the Buddha,Archangel Michael and many others.[Mary Mageau White (Sestriel)]Chapter 4:CLEANSING PLANET EARTHJust as many of us may prefer to view our planet as timelessly stableand unchanging, closing our minds to past and possible futuredisruptions, many also have a parallel view of Planet Earth as aninanimate object which we may exploit and abuse at our pleasure.The 'Higher Wisdom' however gives us a view which is now gainingincreasingly wide acceptance on Earth: that Mother/Goddess Earth is aliving sentient Being, to whom we owe not just our respect, but theprivilege of being permitted to reside and evolve upon Her surface.Goddess Earth, or Gaia, as she is also known, is a very High Beingbelonging to an earlier wave of Creative Light Beings. She iscorrectly referred to in the "female" as she has retained a certainpredominantly female characteristic. Having already completed her ownfirst Great Cycle of Evolution and returned to the Godhead in a pastGreat Universal Age, she was then given further 'Higher Service', achance to become a "Planetary Being" through "ensouling" the body ofPlanet Earth. She was later given the assistance of a 'PlanetaryLogos', usually a highly evolved soul who maintains contact betweenall the evolving sentient lifeforms within and on the surface of aplanet and its ensouling Being. Up to now this has been the role ofLord Sanat Kumara, who was originally trained for this service onPlanet Venus. It is he who has provided the vital link between MotherEarth and the Mineral, Plant, Animal and Human Kingdoms. However, atthis time of the great Changes of Age, he himself will be shortlymoving up to even higher service in another area of the Universe.The Master ZEN TAO: "That Being whom you know as Mother Earth, theGoddess Gaia is a very powerful Being, possessing profound wisdom andpower. By the invocation of a single word she can transform the wholenature of her being. Although she has released partial dominion onher surface to Humanity as Planetary Guardians of the mineral, plantand animal life so that Humanity may learn therefrom, ultimately Gaiacontrols the planet and the nature of what manifests on its surface.Nature is her nature."This planet is now approaching a time in its evolutionary cycle whenit will change dramatically, rather like a snake throwing off its oldskin. Every so many thousands of years, no matter whether Humanity isincarnated on Earth or not, this planet goes through a metamorphicchange as part of its natural cycle. As our physical bodies replacethemselves every seven years, so does the planet's body. This isessential for the planet in order to preserve the creative, thereproductive nature of its being. So at its appointed time the planetgoes through a cycle of transformation. This necessarily involvesmajor movement of the planet's landmasses, movement of the waters,and the restructuring of the matter of the Earth."[The Master ZEN TAO, channeled by the Ramala Centre, Glastonbury.]We should recognise, however, that the need for a thorough cleansingof Planet Earth at this time is more than a matter of regular end-of-cycle procedure.Planet Earth has up to now served as host to many souls of youngerevolution and also of many more aggressive and destructive souls fromother parts of the Universe for a period of over twenty six millionyears. Earth is well-known within our Milky Way Galaxy as beinga "school of hard lessons" for resolving all the aggressive anddestructive tendencies that have arisen out of yet undevelopedemotional Heart-centers which yet lack the qualities of caring andlove. Many throughout the Universe have chosen, on spiritual levels,to come here in order to work out their naturally aggressive anddestructive tendencies. This is to be achieved through theoutworkings of the Law of Karma and functioning within a relativelyharsh and backwarded physical world rife with conflict.There are also many young evolutionary souls commencing the path ofbecoming a Human who have come here to learn their first elementarylessons. They have come to learn to properly discriminate betweengood and evil, and more importantly, to develop a fundamental respectfor the sanctity of life. They need to learn not to resort to theinstinctive primitive reaction of killing and maiming each other whenlife starts to get difficult, as so often happens in a typical non-developed country, usually the result of their total inability toproperly organize themselves socially and economically.From the higher Spiritual Planes there is visible anaccumulated 'black cloud' of negative thought that has beendeveloping over a long period within the Ethers surrounding Earth.This great cloud of black negativity is now at last being cleansedand reduced through Humanity resolving all its past Karma at thistime of End of Age. However, there is still a yet major cleansing tobe done of all the massive physical damage, pollution and detritusleft on Earth's surface by Humanity:SANAT KUMARA: "Before the New Age can begin on Earth, our Planet willbe rewarded for its years of service at the lowest level, byundergoing a thorough cleansing of its surface, removing andneutralizing our cumulative environmental damage and the dark cloudof accumulated negative thought which now surrounds us."The physical manifestation of this great cleansing will beprecipitated by a tilting of the Earth's axis resulting in the Planetbeing literally 'shaken up'. This will cause an expansion of hermolecules to a more tenuous, less dense aggregation, thus allowing ahigher vibration rate."The cause of the destruction that shall come upon the Earth is fromMan's own thinking. The Elements! They are intelligent life! They arepart of the Infinite One, and because they are part of the InfiniteOne they will not respond to Man's negative thinking any longer. Andthey will rebel, causing great tidal waves and great winds."[The Master SANAT KUMARA, channeled by Brother Philip in "Secret ofthe Andes" - Leaves of Grass Press, NOVATO California]The Master ZEN TAO: "The Mineral Kingdom is under the control ofHumanity. Humanity influences the Mineral Kingdom by its own thought-forms, by its own patterns of behaviour. Humanity can, and must, co-operate with that Kingdom if it is to continue on its evolutionarypath on the Planet Earth, but for so long has the Mineral Kingdombeen abused and vandalized by Humanity in order to serve its ownends, no matter what the cost to the Mineral Kingdom, that this co-operation has broken down. It is because of this that Humanity nowapproaches a time of planetary transformation, when the minerals ofthe Planet will move, will vibrate to a different note. If Humanitydoes not change to that note, does not recognize it, then it willperish."So be aware that this moment of rebirth is coming. The timing andthe nature of the changes are known only to the Creator. WhilstHumanity can, and will influence these changes, it can not and willnot prevent their happening. The test for Humanity lies in itsacceptance of the Earth Changes as a natural and necessary happening,as an event which it has chosen to experience."[The Master ZEN TAO, channeled by the Ramala Centre, Glastonbury.]Because Planet Earth has largely performed a role as a 'sacrificialhost' to the less evolved and the more aggressive/destructive typesof Humanity, she has suffered considerable physical abuse andpollution to her planetary body. Further evidence of Planet Earth'sgreat sacrifice is offered in this beautiful testimony by the AngelicBeing, ELOUAI:"Greetings to you, my Beloveds. I am Elouai and I am a "Builder" ofmanifested Matter. I am not upon your Human line of evolution, but Iam not one of what you call the Nature Forces. I stand with a companyof others outside your Planet. I am not a space Being from anotherplanet. My home is within the higher dimensional vibrations of space.I want to communicate to you what we feel about your Earth and yourwork. My companions and I are among those who dwelt in space and werebrought here long ages ago as companions of the Solar Logos whocreated this particular Solar System."We are builders within his Solar Realm. Every planet that is formedis in a dynamic state of life and of growth, drawing to itself thesubstances of nourishment and releasing that which it cannotassimilate. Thus, there are those forms and manifestations of energyin creation which are the unused, unintegrated, unresolved anduntransmuted results of the creative process."As in all living systems, until perfection and complete wholenessare achieved, there are in the body of the Solar Logos, which is theSolar System and all its Planets on all their levels of being, thoseforces and energies which correspond to waste material. These must betransmuted and reintegrated into the cycle of life as raw materialfor future creativity. In the evolutionary movement forward throughtime, this residue which is left behind must be gathered up andpurified, and then returned to the Creative cycle; it cannot beallowed to accumulate or to express itself within the evolving bodyas centres of unintegrated and separate energies existing out oftiming and out of place, hence becoming sources of evil."Please understand that for various reasons, Earth was set aside forthe special task of being the 'purifier' for your Solar System for aperiod of time. Hence, there were attracted to your world thoseelements which I have mentioned of unresolved, unintegrated matter,energy and life to be harnessed into the denser nature of materialform. Left in their exposed state, these energies had the power toimpact harmfully upon the sensitive fabric of the Solar Being andupon the other Planets and their life-forms, being like a toxinwithin the systems of your own bodies."However, by being encapsulated into dense matter within the body ofEarth, their vibrations could be slowed down and shielded from thebody of the whole until these energies could be purified andreintegrated harmoniously and in love into the whole. As this wasdone, the Purifiers and Redeemers came to Earth as well as those whowill yet be Purifiers and Redeemers in destinies yet unperceived andperhaps undreamed of by you. Earth became a schoolhouse in theexperiences of confronting and resolving the challenges of primitivecreativity and evolution."Your Planet became an arena for the interplay of the forces ofevolution on many levels and the forces of non-integrated life andenergy from many sources, some quite primitive and others moreevolved, but all within a sidetrack of evolution that placed theseenergies outside the communion of the whole. Thus, Earth becameanalogous to a kidney in the body of the Solar System, regulating andtransmuting the energies throughout the system, removing impuritiesand returning to the body of the whole only what is harmonious andintegrated with the progressive evolution of the whole. Beings whohad become tainted with energies of retrogressive evolution ordevolution would come to Earth to be cleansed and reunited with thewhole."In this fashion, your Planet has performed a tremendous service toall lifestreams and all planetary systems within the solar family,enabling them to continue their patterns of development with greaterease."No Planet or Being is asked to perform such a transmutative andsacrificial task endlessly, nor is it allowed to do so. The time mustcome when it takes up its own pattern of growth, new service anddevelopment. Now Earth seeks and is given Her redemption in a vastinitiatory process occurring throughout the total body and life ofthe Solar Father. We who have associated with Earth since Herinception, now look upon this time as one of beauty without measure,joy without comparison."Those forms which still remain within unregenerated aspects ofprimitive and separative expression will be lovingly removed, withrespect for their essential Divine nature, to other areas which havenewly taken on the transmutative function. Now a vast work ofpurification is upon us to cleanse and beautify Earth as one wouldbeautify and enrobe a bride before her marriage; in this fashion wegreet Earth in Her time of great joy and accomplishment. This eventseeks its expression through your hearts and minds and yourdedication."Earth will always remain a place of special strength andcontribution. Now she must progress with Her own evolution morerapidly than she could do if she remained within the service oftransmutation. Because of this, you now see a great flood ofpopulation incarnating in order to take this opportunity forpurification that they may maintain their link with solar evolution;otherwise they must sleep the long sleep to be reawakened in a futuretime in a future land."[ELOUAI, an Angelic Being channeled on 21st June 1970 in 'Links WithSpace', published 1970 by Findhorn Press, Findhorn, Forres, Scotland]Those who continue to fear the possibility of the coming "EarthChanges", should perhaps consider whether in fact our presentcivilization, with its sprawling Human development and pollutionacross the surface, as well as with so much poverty and starvationand constant wars is in fact really so worthy of continuance. Onhigher levels, the Ascension of Humanity and the rejuvenation ofPlanet Earth, regarded as one of the most naturally beautiful planetswithin our Galaxy, is in fact seen as a coming event of great joy.SANAT KUMARA: "The Earth is a beautiful world, vastly more beautifulthan some of its neighbours. I have always loved the Earth beyond allother creations, for I see within it a melody that has not yetescaped into the Ethers. I see it crying as one bound! But it shallnot be deprived its Celestial Song much longer."[The Master SANAT KUMARA, channeled by Brother Philip in Secret ofthe Andes - Leaves of Grass Press, NOVATO California ]The Council of Nine (A high level circle of Great Beings whose roleis to maintain the energy-balances within the Universe):"May we explain to you that your Planet Earth is the most beautifulthat exists in the Universe. It has a physical variety that no otherplanet has. It has a varied climate that no other planet has. In allthe Universe there is no planet in existence that has the physicalcharacteristics of Planet Earth. It is the rarest of beauties, and itdoes attract souls which, once they have come, would like to comeback again."It is of a different nature from any other planet. It has aspects ofall planets: it is like a composite of the Universe, with all thepositive and all the negative aspects, and all in between, and thisis what attracts souls. It has with it a gravitational pull that isdifferent from other planets, and because of this a Soul begins tofeel – for the first time – a physicalness. Souls become adapted totheir physical bodies, and they forget the freedom and pleasures theyhave without it... The planet is a dense planet, and it in turn thengives a different feeling to the body, but it is actually experiencedwithin the Soul of the individual. It feels pain, it feels pleasure,it feels sorrow, it feels happiness. The physical body has differentfeelings than in all the other planets and in all the other Soulsthat exist. In other systems, other galaxies, there are otherphysical Beings that do not have the density of this planet. Here theSoul begins to feel in a different way than it had before, and it hasthe feel of desire. It is pleasure and pain. Yet this has become veryimportant for the evolutionary growth of the Planet, because it wasoriginally the Planet of Balance…""The Earth was created to be a paradise. When souls achieve harmonyit will become a paradise again. But when we say a paradise we speakof a paradise of creativity, one that brings knowledge, one thatbrings joy and love; a paradise in which people may heal themselvesor may even experience pain, if they wish. It is not a paradise whereall challenge, all growth, or all pain will be removed. It will be aparadise where people, through their own experience, may evolve theirown understanding of their connection with the Universe, accept theirown responsibility for themselves, for their fellows, for PlanetEarth, and therefore for the Universe, and may bring all of that,including themselves, into perfection….""This your Planet is a planet of Balance, for you to learn to balancebetween the Physical and Spiritual worlds. Planet Earth is the onlyone of its kind, the only planet of total free choice/free will inthe entire Universe, the only planet created for the balancing of thespiritual with the physical, in other words, the creating ofParadise."Humanity has created corruption within, which came about becausepeople became more involved in physicalness than in attempting tobalance and understand. But now your Planet Earth is at a point whereit may move out of balance quicker than at any other point. This istime for Humanity to begin to understand this, to live on this planetof great beauty with a true balance of spiritual and physical, and tolive in unity with the Creator. Your purpose is to live in truebalance, in manifestation of love, in connection with the Creator, inthat which was created...""It is a time of awakening. It is a time to understand that withinthe self, people hold the key for bringing Planet Earth to itsfulfillment; and that free will is never interfered with; and thedestruction of Planet Earth is not necessary. This must be understoodclearly, for the free will of Humankind can bring fulfillment toPlanet Earth."Planet Earth is on the threshold of transformation. It is on thethreshold of releasing Souls and Beings from bondage, so they maycontinue to elevate, and purify Planet Earth so the Universe maycontinue its path… When the Souls on Earth have finally recognizedtheir reality and understood, they can then be released, and they canprovide teachings and understandings for others in other galaxies andsolar systems in the Universe… It is a glorious time right now tolive on your Planet Earth in physical form."[The Council of Nine channeled by Tom – "The Only Planet of Choice"compiled by Phyllis V. Schlemmer & Palden Jenkins, published 1993 byGateway Books, The Hollies, Wellow, BATH, BA2 8QJ, Britain. ISBN 185860 004 9]Chapter 5:THE HIGHER PLANThe Planetary Being known as Gaia/Mother Earth, having reached acertain point of major change in her development, now awaits herinitiation to the Fifth Dimensional Plane. She is held back only bythe slowness of her surface Humanity to raise its own vibration ratesand consciousness and thereby undertake a joint 'Ascension'. Theresolution of conflict between the various members of Humanity isstill a matter in progress.The Ascended Master, KUT HUMI (Koothumi), a member of Earth'sSpiritual Hierarchy:"To understand why Earth is in its present turmoil, we must flashback in time to the great civilization of Atlantis. Oh Yes; Atlantisreally existed! Not as a figment of science fiction, but as atangible civilization in Earth's past history."Man's purpose in experiencing life anywhere in the Universe is togrow in evolutionary experience and to master each phase in hiseternal life. And how do we master the Third Dimensional environmentof Earth? First, by getting to truly 'know ourselves' - who we are,what we are, why we are here. Second, by learning to control allaspects of this environment. Third, by understanding Earth and itsrelationship to what lies beyond the Third Dimensional environment."In Atlantis, Man had advanced to a remarkable degree of control andunderstanding of this Third Dimensional environment, and was at apoint where he could have led Earth and its inhabitants into theFourth Dimensional experience of physical-spiritual growth. Instead,some who possessed advanced knowledge began to abuse and pervert thisknowledge by enslaving other men, and by misusing their spiritualpowers in various other ways. When this abuse of spiritual powerbecame too widespread, it set into motion certain karmic forces whichresulted in the eventual disintegration and destruction of thecivilization. This destruction did not occur in one giant cataclysm,as may be commonly supposed. Rather, it occurred as a process ofdecline that lasted over thousands of years."During this period of degeneration, the continent of Atlantisgradually broke apart and yielded its major portions to the Atlanticocean. Over a period of time, the inhabitants of this once greatcivilization migrated to various parts of Earth, taking with them theremembered skills and technologies, resulting in the archeologicalwonders that fascinate us today. Modern archeology is for the mostpart at a loss to explain such evidences as still exist in Centraland South America, in England and Egypt and elsewhere around Earth.Eventually the memory of the glorious civilization that once existedfaded entirely, except in the awareness of the Adepts who possessedthe Arcanum, and in the subconscious minds of former Atlanteans."What has all of this to do with the unfolding Divine Plan? Justthis: Atlantis was not the only great civilization that has evolvedon Earth. There have been others lost to antiquity, such as Lemuria.Each time that Mankind has advanced to the level of a Lemuria or anAtlantis, it has had within its reach the opportunity to raiseEarth's level of consciousness to Fourth Dimensional awareness and ithas failed. Each failure was due to the misuse of spiritual powers."In the past, this could be condoned because there was still anotherchance. Now, however, we have reached a point in Earth's history andin Galactic evolution where the transition into Ffourth and FifthDimensional consciousness must be made."Man is now being made aware of certain galactic facts of universal,immortal life. As you know, our Solar System is a part of the MilkyWay Galaxy. Our Solar System revolves around the Great Central Sun ofthe Milky Way Galaxy in an orbit that takes 206 million years, as youcalculate time. Let us refer to this revolution of our Solar Systemaround the Galaxy as the Great Cycle Orbit. Our Solar System wascreated over four and a half billion years ago. This corresponds to22 Great Cycle Orbits of our Solar System around the Great CentralSun of the Galaxy. In the Will of Divine Mind, as communicated to theSpiritual Hierarchy of our Solar System, this completes the timecycle in which our entire Solar System is to remain in its presentstate of evolution. As the Aquarian Age dawns, we begin to move intoa new orbit around the Great Central Sun, and to move into a newvibration where no expression below the Fifth Dimension can continueto exist on Earth."Man first began to experience life in our Solar System 206 millionyears ago, at the beginning of the present Great Cycle Orbit. TheDivine Plan is for all Human life within our Solar System to achieveat least the awareness of Cosmic Consciousness by the end of thisorbit, which is reaching its conclusion now with the end of thePiscean Age. This means that Man of Earth must immediately becomeaware of what Cosmic Consciousness is and take the necessary steps toraise his individual level of consciousness to that state ofawareness. Failure to do so will result in temporary selfdestruction! Man of Earth, in his present state, simply cannottolerate the new incoming vibration."Within this Great Cycle Orbit, there have been a number of lessercycles. When the Atlantean civilization failed to reach itsdevelopment potential, this left only the 26,000 year cycle of theZodiac to complete the Plan. As the present Piscean Age draws to aclose, this 26,000 year cycle, concurrently with the Great CycleOrbit, comes to an end."At this moment, Planet Earth is the only planet in our Solar Systemwhere Man has not yet reached the Cosmic level of awareness. Thislevel of consciousness must now be rapidly attained in order tofulfill the Divine Plan."[The Ascended Master KUT HUMI, channeled by Joseph Whitfield in 'TheTreasure of El Dorado', published 1977 by Treasure Publications, P.O.Box 3300, Roanoke, Virginia 24015-1300, USA. ISBN 0-912119-02-0. ][Kuthumi is Earth Chohan (Director) of the Second Ray of the SevenRays of Service. The Second Ray is the Yellow Ray of Intellect andScience, concerned with Mind and Intelligence in the intellectualunderstanding of Divine Laws. His previous Earth incarnations wereas: Aristotle; John the Beloved; Lao-Tze (China, 6th century B.C.);Theodosius (Emperor of Rome, 4th Century A.D.); St. Columba (known asthe Apostle of Caledonia, who helped to convert Scotland toChristianity, 5th century A.D.); St. Francis of Assisi (Italy 12-13thcentury A.D., founder of the Franciscan Order) and Leonardo da Vinci(Italian painter, sculptor, architect, engineer and scientist, 15-16th century A.D.]The Master SANAT KUMARA:"Our entire Solar System is now coming into the GreatInitiation....The Earth shall be surrounded by a golden corona. It isstepping into a higher rate of vibration. You are going from a ThirdDensity, through the Fourth to a Fifth Density world. This mustnecessarily take place as you pass through the heart of thegreat 'Cosmic Cloud' [Photon Belt]. And then shall the prophecies, asrecorded by Joel and many of the others come true; when the Sun shallturn blood red and the Moon shall be red as the ruby, and the dayshall be gone and it shall be dark upon the Earth for a period of twoweeks. There shall be much confusion. And the oxygen will be reducedupon the Earth for a short period, followed by periods of greatmoisture, baking heat and parched areas alternating with greatmoisture. Almost everything upon the face of the Earth will bedestroyed."We are now on the border of this Great Initiation, we are headingcloser and closer to its centre and fulfilment. That is why Christreturns to the Earth: because always the great Master of a SolarSystem incarnates and gives aid to the planet which is lowest inprogression in that system."Yes, those who say catastrophe comes are true; they speak withtruth; but the Earth will not end. It shall become new, as it iswritten. It does not say the world will end. It says there shall be aNew Heaven and a New Earth; not a new Earth through the destructionof the old, but a new Earth - the old made new."[The Master SANAT KUMARA, channeled by Brother Philip in Secret ofthe Andes - Leaves of Grass Press, NOVATO California ]The incarnation of the Master Sananda as Jesus of Palestine marked atwo-thousand year lead up to the Biblical 'Final Day of Judgment' andthe 'Second Coming of The Christ'. Jesus-Sananda presently holdsOffice for the Earth planes as World Teacher. Here is part ofhis 'Second Coming Announcement' , channeled by Nada-Yolanda onAugust 17th 1966. Nada channels the Spiritual Hierarchy as part ofthe Mark-Age Center at Elk Valley, Northeastern Tennessee."I speak in the name of Jesus, Lord of this World and of all whichconcerns this Earth sphere. I am he who is known as the Christ, andthrough this Channel announce my coming unto Earth once more. It ismy intention that all who know and believe in this shall see andshall welcome it in the flesh. I have not come again before thispresent time, for Man was not ready to receive his Lord..."Our Lord and Master of this Universe, known as Lord Michael(Archangel Michael), and he who is my Master Teacher, Lord Maitreya,are conversant with and in command over all universal laws andmaterial laws physical to those particular dimensions..."You have been alerted to these days and these times in the last twothousand years, since the resurrection of my body and my personality.In that time and in that consequence I never have ceased to workcontinuously in the efforts to bring forth this Second-Comingannouncement. In the days ahead we prepare all for it; one here andanother there, many, crying out the word and the announcement..."I now enact the role given unto me throughout the ages: to be yourWay-shower, to be your Prince, to be the Lord of the World and allthat involves the Earth Planet..."[Channeled by Nada-Yolanda in "MAPP* to Aquarius: Mark Age Period &Program" - Mark-Age, Inc., P.O. Box 10, Pioneer, Tennessee 37847,USA ]Planet Earth is destined at the commencement of the Aquarian 'NewAge' at the end of the year 2012 to move up to the Fifth-Dimension.We will then be on the same plane as our neighboring planets withinour Solar System, no longer separated from them throughthe "quarantine" of our present surrounding "Veil" of limitedconsciousness. We shall regain our Full Consciousness, seeing lifefrom a much more objective standpoint. We shall not only be able tofully communicate with our neighboring planets and other higherspiritual worlds, but be able to review the experiences of our pastlives from the great storehouse of knowledge imprinted on thecelestial ethers known as the Akashic Records, and also see futureprobabilities to come within our life line.The Master RAMALA: "The great Beings who govern matter through theirknowledge of Infinite Law are trying to quicken the vibration of theEarth, to bring into operation a quicker and a higher frequency. Inso doing there is what appears to Man to be confusion and disruption,for he is held between the sluggishness of his own body, caused byhis past behaviour, and the attempt by the Lords of the Planet tobring him into a higher frequency of consciousness"These Great Beings are intervening so that Man shall not bedestroyed, for within his body there is the great atomic structure ofthe Cosmos, and in his sluggishness, when that moment arrives, and itwill, when the Earth uprights on its axis, if this outer quickeninghad not been put into motion, then the atomic structure of which Manis built would explode, because the force of the uprighting willbring into operation a great atomic expansion of the Planet."I will not go into the molecular structure and describe thebehaviour of the atoms at that moment of change, but due to changesin pressure there will be a great transformation of the Earth'sstructure. There will be great devastation all over the Earth. Ithas, of course, happened before. You may read in the literature ofancient Man, and in the Bible, of similar occurrences."The cataclysm, which you would call a catastrophe, is really not acatastrophe: it is a step forward in the evolution of the Earth.Remember, that to die is not a finality, and that those who do die inthe cataclysm to come will experience an increase in theirconsciousness, for in that moment of death they will learn."Leading up to this event there will be much disharmony anddestruction as the vibratory rate of the Earth is quickened. Thiswill occur before the great uprighting of the Earth on its axis whichwill take place around the new Millenium.""To you, perhaps, the concept of Armageddon is frightening. Itsignifies the release of energies beyond the control of Humanity, butif Humanity did but know it, it rarely controls its own environment.Because of its great intellectual progress Humanity has been led intobelieving that it is the master of its fate, that it is the master ofthe physical World, that Humanity alone decides the path on which itwalks. But those of you who are aware of the God in all things, whorecognize that the Divine Plan alone manifests on this Earth, know inyour heart that the Cycle which is now beginning was planned aeons oftime ago. It has been seen on other levels and has been prophesied bymany Beings. It is a necessary path of evolution for this Earth. Youare here, therefore, as witnesses to that path of evolution. Withinyour innermost Being is the knowledge of what is to come. It may notbe with you on a conscious level, on a level which you can pull downinto everyday physical reality, but within your heart is theknowledge of what is to come and the part that you must play in it."[The Master RAMALA, channeled by the Ramala Centre, Glastonbury.]Chapter 6:TIME FOR CHOICEThe 'Day of Judgment' is traditionally a time at the end of aparticular phase of planetary evolution when an assessment of eachand every Soul's attainment is made to determine those who are ableto join the move up to a higher plane, and those who must start againelsewhere at the beginning of that phase in order to re-attempt thelessons they have failed to master.There are practical reasons for this assessment. Those whosevibration rates are below a certain level, reflecting a lack ofevolutionary progress, will not be able to make the transition to thehigher vibrational dimensions; they would find the intensevibrational light-energy of the Higher Spheres too painful. Theywould also no longer have the opportunity to express the many lowerinstincts and emotions which they have not as yet fully mastered, norwould they feel at all at home in such an elevated world of refinedsensibilities.All the Masters and Guides communicating at this time thereforestress the present urgency for us to resolve all our past hates andhurts as soon as possible. This we must do whilst we still have theopportunity left within the remaining testing environment of thedense Earth physical plane. This dense physical plane will soon nolonger be a part of Planet Earth, and it is only at this very basiclevel that we can make rapid progress in resolving and transmutingpast karma. By contrast, when we reside on the higher spiritualplanes, we live in such a relatively perfect and peaceful environmentthat many of the more backward characteristics within our Soul do notsurface or show up, making it much more difficult to reform orresolve them. If on the other hand, we do manage to tackle and masterthose tests we set ourselves down on Earth within the short time-frame left before the Earth Changes, we shall have thus made one ofthe greatest advances in our millions of years of evolutionarydevelopment.For those whose destiny unfortunately hangs in the balance, betweenAscension and starting over again on the bottom rung of the ladder ofEvolution, an eleventh-hour special effort to reform our inherentfaults may yet turn the scales. This time of Tribulation is thetraditional 'Dividing of the Ways', the 'sorting of the wheat fromthe chaff'. Especially on this Planet, endowed as we are with a fullexpression of free will, every individual has the opportunity to makethose significant choices moment by moment. Indeed in this presentperiod of final resolution, the many opportunities will be multipliedand magnified by the increased Light-force energies now being beameddown to Earth by the Spiritual Hierarchy.The Master HILARION, an Ascended Master from Planet Earth and amember of Earth's Planetary Hierarchy, makes this comment onthe 'Tribulation' and the opportunities for Mankind:"The Tribulation that has been planned for many thousands of years isdescending upon the Earth. It will be recognized early by some whohave remained aware of the Higher truths, but most will fail to seethat the Last Days are upon them until near the end of the time oftrial."We have previously spoken of the arrangement for Humanity by whichrebirth and karma were to allow individual souls to learn the mainspiritual lessons and to settle the debts incurred when that learningprocess led to the harming of others. It was thought at first thatthis great Plan would permit virtually all of Mankind to achieve thebasic goal, which was to escape by its own efforts from the wheel ofrebirth and the karmic necessity."But this hope was not realized. The temptation of Man's own basenature and the whisperings of the forces dedicated to his destructionproved, again and again, too strong for many souls whose resolve andwhose spiritual sight were not sufficiently developed."For this reason a new Plan was devised in order to allow for allthose whose steps had faltered, a final chance to gain the goal thathad been set for Man. This Plan was laid some twelve thousand yearsbefore the present, at about the time that the great continent ofAtlantis sank to its final destruction beneath the waves of theAtlantic Ocean. All of the details of the new Plan were carefullyworked out at its inception and have not been changed in anyimportant degree since that time."One of the most important components of the 'Tribulation' was thenecessity that all those who appeared unlikely to have reached therequired level by the end of the rebirth arrangement were to be giventhe chance to make the right choice during the period in question. Atthe inception of the plan for the Tribulation, it was not known andcould not be foreseen exactly how many souls this necessity wouldapply to. But as the millennia passed and the time draws near, itbecame clear that a number in excess of four billion souls wouldrequire this last desperate chance to succeed where before they hadfailed."Prior to the passage of the Earth through the 'cloud' in space, asign will appear in the sky, to indicate to those who have realizedthe truth, that the last days have come. This is the sign of the Sonof Man spoken of in the Scriptures. Those who fail to understand andheed the meaning of the signs in the Heavens will not be able toescape the final, dreadful weeks and months of the Tribulation by asubsequent change of heart. All of those who earnestly and with thewhole heart change their old sinful ways and take up the cross ofservice and dedication to their fellow man will become entitled towhat the Scriptures call the 'Rapture'."The Rapture is essentially an escape from the horrors of theTribulation, to a place of safety where those who have assembledthere can work and learn in order to prepare themselves for the greattask of reconstruction which will begin literally minutes after theDay of Wrath has terminated."[The Master HILARION, channeled by Maurice B. Cooke in 'The Nature ofReality'. First published 1979. Marcus Books, Box 942 Bradford ,Ontario L3Z 2B4 - Canada – Tel: (905) 551-1661 -chris.rieder@rogers.com - www.hilarionbooks.com ]This theme is repeated by the Master EFI of Mars:"Now for this day are they being prepared, when each and every oneshall be put into another place, that which is prepared for them.Some shall be freed from all darkness; these shall be free to go andcome throughout the Galaxy, and they shall know no barrier. Othersshall be put into a place wherein they shall till the soil with theirbare hands; they shall have no implements, they shall have no tools,no machines. They shall have no memory of their past, of theirscience or of their fortune of the past. Such shall be the destiny ofthem which betray themselves."[The Master EFI of Mars, channeled by Sister Thedra in "Propheciesfor Tiahunaco" -The Association of Sananda and Sanat Kumara, Sedona,Arizona, USA ]Those who fail to reach a point of being able to Ascend to a higherplane at this "End Cycle " of Resolution and Self-judgment, willthemselves recognise the need to start over again on another Third-Dimensional planet in some other solar system which will still havefacilities for such living. Particularly heartless and destructivesouls may even find that their soul/spirit requires a return to a yetlower level, to start again in a Second-Dimensional world within theMineral Kingdom. This is not a punishment, it is simply an objectivereflection by your Higher Spirit/Soul of the fact that your lowerpersonality-self would not be able to function at the new highervibration rates. These Souls would find that they need once again tostart over again and learn to become less ego-centered, to rise abovethe narrow view of self-interest and the unbalance of taking fromothers of that which has not been earned or is rightfully theirs.They have to learn to keep a karmaic balance by giving the same inreturn as they have received from others. Through keeping a properbalance between giving and receiving, they will come to learn all thejoys of living in a peaceful and cooperative world, the greatbenefits derived from the respecting and caring for others, oflearning to express unconditional love to all other life forms.The CHRIST:"Whatever form the healing of the Human world takes during these nextfew years, know that it is for the good of all. Do not be concernedwith the fate of those who reject my Spirit. Their story is far fromover. I am caring for each one in the manner of his or her greatestneed. The Human world is in good hands. When you and much of Earth'spresent biological life have been sprinkled throughout the stars, andthe oceans have changed places with the land, after the poles haveshifted and new mountains have come to look over the plains, thenwill the truly slow-learners be recalled from the Mineral Realmswhere they shall slumber, to learn of intelligence again, and to comeagain to choose between love and fear."[The CHRIST, channeled by Ken Carey in "Vision" - Harper SanFrancisco ]The time of Tribulation is a Parting of the Ways. Those who choose todo so should make a personal assessment of their conduct towardsothers. The temptations of pursuing a course of exclusive self-interest have been magnified over the ages by the Forces of Darknesswho have constantly wished to delay or prevent our spiritualprogress.The Master ZEN TAO: "It is inevitable, at such a critical time in theEarth's evolution, that the Forces of Darkness should be present justas much as the Forces of Light. The Forces of Darkness would likenothing better at this time than to subvert the path of the AquarianCycle, for this Cycle is destined to be the greatest Cycle inHumanity's evolutionary path."For every side or opinion that is present there will be another sideor opinion to oppose it. This therefore requires that you exercisethe great gift of discrimination. It is how you choose, and yourmotivation for choosing, that in essence represents the sorting ofthe 'wheat from the chaff'. There will be many who will follow thepath of evil, but remember that you can walk to the gates of Hell andstill turn back. You follow a path only for as long as you wish to.There will be much suffering in the World but no more than Humanitycan bear and understand. Many, for instance, will not be touched bythe plagues that are predicted to come."[The Master ZEN TAO, channeled by the Ramala Centre, Glastonbury. ]Clearly one of the predicted 'Plagues' testing Humanity at this timeis the disease now known as 'Aids'. It is almost unique in that, withfew and rare exceptions, it can either be contracted or avoided byone's own 'conscious' action:The Master ZEN TAO: "Aids is the first of the seven plagues fromwhich Humanity will suffer. Now you must understand that the purposeof disease is not to punish: it is to bring about transformation.Disease is a great tool of evolution and all disease should be seenin this way. Aids, of course, is a disease which is usuallytransmitted sexually. The greatest disease of the Human Race today isits abuse of sexuality. With Aids, therefore, you have a diseasewhich demands sexual responsibility. Aids can be likened to a genetictime bomb, because ultimately only the pure in body, mind and spiritwill survive it."The sexual act should not be regarded as an act of self-centeredpleasure, but rather as an act of Cosmic creation. If you live a lifeof sexual purity you will not be touched by Aids. If you are pure inbody, mind and spirit you will not be touched by much of what is towalk the face of this Earth. This is indeed the beginning of thesorting of the 'wheat from the chaff'. It would be true to say thatin the New Age it will only be the pure of spirit, the pure of mindand the pure of body that will inherit the Earth."[The Master ZEN TAO, channeled by the Ramala Centre, Glastonbury.]It often seems at this present time that discipline in personalconduct is frowned upon. Yet it is perhaps now, as never before, thatwe should once again be guided by, and make every attempt to follow,the traditional old-fashioned ideals of 'Right Conduct', not only intreating our own bodies correctly, but of respecting the rights ofothers and the environment."And take heed to yourselves, lest at any time your hearts be soovercharged with surfeiting, and drunkenness, and cares of this life,and that day comes upon you unawares. For as a snare shall it come onall them that dwell on the face of the whole Earth. Watch yetherefore, and pray always, that you may be accounted worthy toescape all these things that shall come to pass, and to stand beforethe Son of man." Luke 21: 34-36While 'surfeiting and drunkenness' are clearly to be avoided by thosegenuinely seeking to follow higher principles of conduct, there aremore subtle ways in which we should seek self-improvement. Inour 'civilized' world during recent times, the aggression used bythose who are self-seekers has become subtler; but it remainsaggression nonetheless:The CHRIST: "Survival into the Third Millennium is reserved for thespiritually fit. The key to survival is not competition, butcooperation. Spiritual fitness is not aggression, it is fitting inwith the purposes of the Earth and with the purposes of her Creatoras these larger purposes blend in human exchange."[The CHRIST, channeled by Ken Carey in Vision - Harper San Francisco ]At this important time of self-examination, the Ascended Master SAINTGERMAIN, a member of Earth's Hierarchy, recommends the practice ofmeditation (or communing within yourself), through which one candevelop a mental calm and an openness to communication from one'sHigher Self:"I would like to suggest that meditation is very important for you atthis time. Meditation is how you will gain mastery, the self-masteryand the focus that is required to go into your next phase. Meditationis how you will create the space between your limited Ego-Self andyour deeper expression. You will put a little bit of distance betweenyou and the Ego so that your reactions will not be so automatic withregard to responding to negativity. All of you are experiencing muchof the density of the Earth in your daily life. But, if you canmeditate you will not feel the effect of it in the same way. You willhave more of an overview, so that when those emanations orimpressions come to you, you can choose consciously and wisely ineach moment how to respond."[The Master ST. GERMAIN, channeled by Eric Klein in "The Inner Door",Vol.2 - Oughten House Publications]Meditation, however, is not necessarily something that requires a lotof intense training, or sitting for hours in the 'lotus position'.The Masters have stressed that there are over a thousanddifferent 'paths' to meditation, and that one can just aseasily 'meditate' by simply walking and thinking within the quietsurroundings of Nature. Essentially, one is looking 'inward' in orderto contact the inner voice or Higher Self, wherein, it is said, allthe wisdom of the Universe is available.The Master SAINT GERMAIN also stresses the importance of forgiveness.The significance of forgiveness is that in forgiving an insult or anact of aggression, the momentum of the act is thereby nullified; whenwe fail to forgive we perpetuate the act through a continuing streamof vengeance, so its evil effects are 'passed on', propagated andnurtured. Through forgiveness the totality of evil in the world canbe progressively diminished."By forgiveness you can avoid the creation of any more negativity.You can 'let the buck stop' where it is, instead of passing it on asso many have done for so long in this world."When someone expresses anger towards you, the tendency of the Ego isto respond in the same way. And even if your Ego is not at thatmoment responding in the same way to that particular person, perhapsit will await a perfect opportunity to respond that way to another,in an attempt to clear itself of these impressions. This is why thenegativity on the Earth has become so dense. Humanity has continuedto pass it around, to propagate it, so to speak. And the goal ofMastery is, of course, to master this. Master your own creations andemanations so that what comes through you is love, so that what comesthrough you is that Divine presence that you are. And that claritywhich gives you wisdom to deal with situations, to defuse thereactionary elements of Human life."[The Master ST. GERMAIN, channeled by Eric Klein in The Inner Door,Vol.2 - Oughten House Publications]An underlying theme pervading all the warnings of the coming 'Day ofJudgment' and the accompanying messages of counsel, emphasizes theneed to seek a return to a balance and harmony in our lives,particularly in our relationships with other Humans, with animals,plants and the natural environment as a whole. We must also developan in-tunement and sense of balance and harmony in the relationshipsbetween our 'two' Selves, our Earthly Self and our Higher Self. Wehave to live in a manner which causes no conflict with the 'ideal' asseen by our Higher Spiritual Self. This will help us to by-passthe 'Tribulations' to come.The Master RAMALA: "If you yourself are living in balance andharmony, you can survive any physical challenge. Though you work in aroom full of diseased people, you will not be touched by any disease.Though you are shot at by many guns, you will not be hit. Though youare thrown into the sea when a ship sinks and many drown, you will besaved. For those who live in peace, that is, obeying God's NaturalOrder, there is total protection. Those who follow God's NaturalOrder will find their own lives in order. For those who trust intheir Creator, there can be no fear."[The Master RAMALA, channeled by the Ramala Centre, Glastonbury .]The Master P'TAAH: "You see, dear one, if you are not in fear of whatis to come, and know that you live in a perfectly safe universe, itis merely to live constantly in the 'moment of joy'. To know that youwill, of course, be safe, that you will survive. It is your reality.You create it. If you are living in an area, for instance, which maybe subject to a very sudden Earth change, and you are living in joy,and not in fear, then on that day, beloved, you will be away visitingyour Mother. You see, it is you who create the reality."[The Master P'TAAH of the Pleiades, channeled by Jani King in TheP'taah Tapes: Transformation of the Species - Triad Publishers Pty.Ltd., Cairns, Queensland, Australia ]Chapter 7:THE FLYING SAUCER CONNECTIONMany unfamiliar with the predictions of Earth Changes may nonethelessbe aware of the much reported UFO/ 'flying saucer' activity aroundEarth. Even though Governments continue to cover up and deny theexistence of UFOs, opinion surveys report that in the USA over halfthe population believe they exist, with over 10,000 UFO sightings areannually reported around other parts of the world. In addition, inrecent decades over 10,000 "Crop Circles" of amazingly intricatedesigns have mysteriously appeared overnight in fields of cerealcrops and been recorded on film.All of this UFO activity has three main purposes. One is an on-goingprogram by our Space Brothers of monitoring and taking action wherenecessary to preserve peace and stability within our Solar System.The second is related to the nuclear threat of the post World War IIperiod. The third, and most important of their ongoing programs,relates to preparations for the Ascension of Humanity and thecoming "Earth Changes" of the New Age.Most of these interplanetary visitors are Members of a "GalacticFederation of Light" composed of the various solar systems within ourMilky Way Galaxy that all follow the "Path of Light". These followersof the Path of Light have been in constant opposition over millionsof years with the "Anchara Alliance", followers of the "Path ofDarkness", non-loving, negative and destructive beings dedicated todominating and controlling others. As a result there have been manymajor Galactic Wars between the Forces of Light and the Forces ofDarkness. Now that we are approaching a major End-of-Age cycle thissituation is changing and we are all stepping up to a new era oftotal Galactic Peace. Many of the previously opposing Forces ofDarkness, having realised that they are on the losing side ofevolution, are now joining up with the Forces of Light. They now seethis as their last chance of redemption before being forced to startevolution all over again at the most primitive of levels. Thereforemembership of the Galactic Federation of Light has recently increasedfrom 100,000 members to over a total of 200,000 participating worlds.Beyond our own Galaxy, there is a large organization of Galaxies whoalso follow the Path of Light, known as the "Intergalactic Union ofFree Worlds". The function of this Organization is to coordinate andpeacefully regulate affairs between the various Galaxies, Planets,and Solar Systems, and generally to uphold the Universal Lawthroughout our whole Universe. The MilkyWay's Galactic Federation islocally represented within our Solar System by another bodycalled "The Interplanetary Federation of Planets'. This local SolarSystem Interplanetary Council convenes on the Planet Saturn withrepresentatives drawn from all the other inhabited planets of ourSolar System. Up to now, Planet Earth has not had its own native-bornThird-Dimension Earthly Representative, and so until Earth has madeits Ascension to the higher dimension and is able to join on aconscious level with the whole of our Solar System Federation,Commander Monka of the Ashtar Space Command has been appointed on ourbehalf to represent us at their Council Meetings.Within our Solar System, we have a local protective force namedthe "Ashtar Command", an enormous Fleet of interplanetary space crafton station watching over us and protecting us during our time ofpreparation for Ascension. They are answerable directly to theGalactic Federation and to our own Earth Spiritual Hierarchy andtheir fleet personnel are made up of participants from many otherSolar Systems within our Galaxy and Universe. The Ashtar Command'sfirst responsibility is of protecting us from any outsideinterference or intrusion by Alien spacecraft of the remaining Forcesof Darkness. They also have the function of assisting us to evacuateEarth when the great planetary "Changes" finally begin. This greatInterplanetary Fleet is composed of over 100,000 Mother Shipsstationed within our Solar System and with over 150-200 millionCosmic personnel watching over us. They function on the Fifth-Dimension level and are therefore not visible to our physical Third-Dimension sight. This Force is led by its Commander, Ashtar, a highlyevolved soul who is well-known throughout the Universe as a staunchprotector of freedom. He is described as being of a strict andupright military bearing and an important member of many Universal,Galactic and Intergalactic Councils. His own directly led personnelnumber about 20 million, and there are also over 4 million SpaceBeings working down on Earth's surface to unobtrusively assist us.The Ashtar Command has its Headquarters on one of the large 'City'mother-ships, the "Shan Chea". This Mother Ship is over 26 miles/42kmlong, 8 miles/13km wide and 5 miles/8km high, with 12 major deckareas, with further Mezzanines each of 40ft/12m height. One of themiddle deck areas is high enough to have its own artificial "sky" andminiature "Sun", with green countryside, lakes and gardens below forrelaxation and recreational use. The Mothership is too large toapproach us closely, as its great size could adversely affect themagnetic balance of Earth's orbit. This Ship, like the hundreds ofother large Mother Ships within the Ashtar Fleet, therefore has manysmaller shuttle or "Scout Craft" on board which are able to approachus more closely. These are regularly used to monitor our surface andatmospheric conditions, correct geological inbalances such aspotential earthquakes, or else be used to evacuate us during themajor physical Earth changes. They are able to make themselves fullyvisible to our physical eyesight when needed through temporarilylowering their own vibration rates down to our Third-Dimensionallevel. Up to now, they have not been permitted to reveal themselvesuntil the time is correct for Earth Humans' final Ascension. Thus,when the major Earth Changes do arrive, we shall then see a greatArmada of millions of Scout Ships descending from the sky to evacuateus. We will be evacuated either to the safety of the Mother Shipsoverhead, or else taken to the "Inner Earth" Argharthian Civilizationwhere alternative habitations have been prepared for the duration ofEarth's surface cleansing.Commander ASHTAR gives this 'overview' of the Ashtar Command and itswork:"There are millions of craft operating in this Solar System at alltimes and many, many of these belong to the Ashtar Command. Some arestationed far above your Planet and are more or less stationary forlong periods of time, keeping track of the Earth on their monitoringsystems. Others move about, discharging their various duties. We havesmall scout craft doing surveying activities and we have larger craftwith extended range that are capable of operating in space and whichvisit planets in other solar systems."We also have what you know as 'Mother Ships' or 'mother craft', withmany smaller craft coming and going from the Mother Ship. There isthus a great deal of activity in what Earthlings think of as emptyspace."Our purpose is service, and we go where we are needed anywhere inthis Sector of the Galaxy. Our Headquarters is on one of the largestof the Mother Craft, and orders and instructions come from thisCraft. It is a city in itself. Most of our people are natives of oneor another of the Planets within this Solar System, but also we dohave those working with us from other solar systems. Our workers dovisit their home Planets at various times on what you might callvacations. Most of us have worked together for a very long time; weare a well-knit Confederation and feel that we are an effective one."[Commander ASHTAR, channeled by Gladys Rodehaver and quotedin "Ashtar: A Tribute" - compiled by Tuella, Guardian ActionPublications. The full text of "ASHTAR - A Tribute" can be read ordownloaded from the link at the end of Book II]We also have to be aware, however, that not all 'Space Ships' makingcontact with Earth come as representatives of the Galactic Federationof Light. Commander KORTON of the Ashtar Command, explains:"There are those who do come, who are not from this Allegiance andwho have no part in it. They come as observers and for their ownends. They are often highly scientific geniuses, and their materialto their contacts can be highly impressive - indeed, almost alwaysis. But they have come for the purpose of collecting data for theirpersonal ends and not to give of themselves for the good of thePlanet. These are not necessarily what you would call the "DarkForces", which is yet of another deeper allegiance."Now the so-called "Dark Forces" (a balancing agent in the Cosmos)are those of our own Galaxy who are still openly opposed to theBrotherhood of Light, its principles and standards and goals formankind and the Planet Earth. They would seize the Planet if thatwere possible, to control it for their own purposes, which woulddestroy the freedom of Man. Commander Ashtar has been one of the moststaunch defenders of the freedom of Man and his inherent right tochoose, to decide to fashion his own embodiment, without outsidepressures put upon him."The bands of renegades that patrol the terrestrial realms areimmediately dispatched to their proper level when overtaken intrespassing activities within this Solar System. The Fleets of theHeavenly Commands are prompt to transport such intruders in masterlyfashion."[Commander KORTON, channeled by Tuella, in "Ashtar: A Tribute" -Guardian Action Publications. The full text of "ASHTAR - A Tribute"can be read or downloaded from the link at the end of Book II]As a further and important example of its work, the GalacticFederation has since the end of World War II been greatly concernedfor the safety of Planet Earth, more so from our own internallycreated threat than an outside one.The development of Earth's experimentation and use of nuclear energyafter World War II caused grave concern throughout the Galaxy. Thisnuclear danger was a major reason why our Planet began to experienceso many UFO visitations during the early 1950s. The inhabitants ofother Solar Systems were greatly concerned at this new and da(Message over 64k, truncated.)

PERSONAL AND PLANETARY CHANGES of 2012

2009-07-11T13:40:00.000-07:00

A key truth is that there is a DIVINE PLAN. The future belongs tothose that trust in the process and are willing to go with the divineplan. The main tool for understanding this plan is the Mayan calendar.The truth about the Mayan calendar is really not difficult tounderstand. The problem is only that we have all been conditioned bya materialist mind that makes us look for the ultimate explanationsin the material reality rather tha in the divine plan. Needless tosay, many, especially in the West, have egos that find it difficultto accept that they are subordinated to a divine plan that can noteven potentially be manipulated by physical means. - Carl JohanCalleman.NEWS FLASH!!!Why farmers are being paid to leave their landThe Divine Plan2008 - the Disclosure2012 Unlimited philosophy1. Humanity and Planet Earth are currently going through a hugechange or shift in consciousness and reality perception.2. The Mayan civilization of Central America was and is the mostadvanced in relation to time-science knowledge. Their main calendaris the most accurate on the planet. It has never erred. They actuallyhave 22 calendars in total, covering the many timing cycles in theUniverse and Solar System. Some of these calendars are yet to berevealed.3. The Mayan fifth world finished in 1987. The sixth world starts in2012. So we are currently "between worlds". This time is calledthe "Apocalypse" or revealing. This means the real truth will berevealed. It is also the time for us to work through "our stuff"individually and collectively.4. The Mayan sixth world is actually blank. This means it is up tous, as co-creators, to start creating the new world and civilizationwe want now.5. The Mayans also say that by 2012-- we will have gone beyond technology as we know it.- we will have gone beyond time and money.- we will have entered the fifth dimension after passing through thefourth dimension- Planet Earth and the Solar System will come into galacticsynchronization with the rest of the Universe.- Our DNA will be "upgraded" (or reprogrammed) from the centre of ourgalaxy. (Hunab Ku)"Everbody on this planet is mutating. Some are more conscious of itthan others. But everyone is doing it" - Extraterrestrial EarthMission.6. In 2012 the plane of our Solar System will line up exactly withthe plane of our Galaxy, the Milky Way. This cycle has taken 26,000years to complete. Virgil Armstrong also says that two other galaxieswill line up with ours at the same time. A cosmic event!7. Time is actually speeding up (or collapsing). For thousands ofyears the Schumann Resonance or pulse (heartbeat) of Earth has been7.83 cycles per second, The military have used this as a veryreliable reference. However, since 1980 this resonance has beenslowly rising. It is now over 12 cycles per second! This mean thereis the equalivant of less than 16 hours per day instead of the old 24hours. Another intrepetation is - we, or rather Consciousness havebeen down this same road seven times before over the last 16 billionyears. Each of these cycles of Creation runs 20 times faster than thelast one. The same amount of Creation is paced 20 times tighter. Thisis why time seems to be going so fast. It is not "time" but Creationitself that is accelerating. (see Mayan Calendar Central)8. During the Apocalypse or the time "between worlds" many peoplewill be going through many personal changes. The changes will be manyand varied. It is all part of what we came here to learn orexperience. Examples of change could be- relationships coming to anend, change of residence or location, change of job or work, shift inattitude or thinking etc.9. Remember, in any given moment we are making small and largedecisions. Each decision is based on LOVE or FEAR. Choose love,follow your intuition, not intellect and follow your passionor "burning inner desire." Go with the flow.10. Thought forms are very important and affect our everyday life. Wecreate our reality with thought forms. If we think negative thoughtsof others this is what we attract. If we think positive thoughts wewill attract positive people and events. So be aware of your thoughtsand eliminate the unnecessary negative or judgemental ones.11. Be aware that most of the media is controlled by just a few. Usediscernment! Look for the hidden agendas. Why is this informationbeing presented to you? What is "their" real agenda? Is it a case ofproblemreactionsolution? Do "they" create a problem so that "we"react and ask for a fix, then "they" offer their solution?The "solution is what "they" really wanted in the first place.12. Remember almost nothing happens by accident. Almost all "events"are planned by some agency or other. Despite this, it is a veryexciting time to be alive!The truth shall set you free!Are you feeling the Quickening?The Shift of the Ages has already begun!Ancient prophecies predicted it. Indigenous traditions honor it.Changes within the Earth are affecting our sleep patterns,relationships, the ability to regulate your immune system and yourperception of time. We are living a process of initiation that wasdemonstrated over 2,000 years ago, preparing you to accept tremendouschange within your body.That change is happening now.SOME POSSIBLE EFFECTS OF THE CHANGES* Migraine headaches, tiredness* Electrical sensations in the limbs and spinal column* Cramps in the muscular networks* Flu like symptoms* Intense dreams.* The human body will become more sensitive as a result of the newvibrations.* The resonance of Earth has been 7.8Hz for thousands of years. Since1980 it has risen to over 12Hz.This means that 16 hours now equate to a 24 hour day. Time isspeeding up!* The physical body has already begun to change. A new light body isbeing created.* Our DNA is being re-programmed from the Universe (as predicted inthe Mayan Prophecy).We are going from 2 strand back to 12 strand DNA.* Greater intuitive and healing abilities will emerge.* Eyes will become cat like in order to adjust to the new atmosphereand light.* All newly born children will probably be telepathic at birth.* All plagues of the 90's, including AIDS will be gone.To: DNA UpgradesYOU ARE BECOMING A GALACTIC HUMAN !Gods in AmnesiaTo quote from a song by Tom Waits:"Well the moon is brokenAnd the sky is crackedCome on up to the houseThe only things that you can seeIs all that you lackCome on up to the houseAll your cryin' don't do no goodCome on up to the houseCome down off the crossWe can use the woodCome on up to the houseCome on up to the houseCome on up to the houseThe world is not my homeI'm just passin thruCome on up to the house---Does life seem nasty, brutish and shortCome on up to the houseThe seas are stormyAn you can't find no portCome on up to the houseThere's nothin' in the worldThat you can doYou gotta come on up to the houseAnd you been whipped by the forcesThat are inside youCome on up to the houseWell you're high on topOf your mountain of woeCome on up to the houseWell you know you should surrenderBut you can't let goYou gotta come on up to the house"(Waits/Brennan)Published by Jalma Music (ASCAP)Released on Shock Records and Epitaph RecordsDiscernment in 2008 and beyondAs we move into the fourth dimension we are experiencing a shift inconsciousness. The fourth dimension is more a state of mind than anactual place. When you are living your life with all of your chakraswide open, and all of those around you are experiencing life in thesame way, it will be in the fourth dimension.Discernment applied to different sources of information is becomingof paramount importance.The many agendas for Planet Earth and its inhabitants come from manysources and some are published in the media. Various extraterrestrialsources are talking about many possible scenarios to take placewithin the next 5 to 10 years. Some are talking about government DNAand mind control, the New World Order by 2003, annihilation fromnegative ETs etc. Some are talking about the Ascension (Rapture) ofmany of us, together with Planet Earth, possibly helped by thepositive ETs. All these scenarios are possible, depending on your ownreality. The message is to follow your heart, your gut feelings andintuition, not your intellect. Be discerning with the feelings andinformation you process. Does it resonate with you. Work towardshealing the planet and yourself and say no to those who wish tocontrol us. Following the Mayan calendar can help free us from thetime and money circle, liberate the mind and open the way to the newage beyond time and money.Click on a link to a pageIf you have come to this site via a search engine, you may be missingthe subject list on the left (frame).Try using www.2012.com.au in your browser to find us.http://www.2012unlimited.net/Site.A.html

Cusp Of Great Cycle

2009-07-11T13:39:00.000-07:00

Galactic Synchronization; Jose Arguelles says in his book TheMayan Factor, the 5125-year Great Cycle marks Earth's passage througha " resonant frequency synchronisation beam", which will prepareEarth and humanity for an ascension, or evolutionary leap to the nextdimension."The Hopi and Mayan elders do not prophesy that everything will cometo an end. Rather, this is a time of transition from one World Ageinto another. The message they give concerns our making a choice ofhow we enter the future ahead. Our moving through with eitherresistance or acceptance will determine whether the transition willhappen with cataclysmic changes or gradual peace and tranquility. Thesame theme can be found reflected in the prophecies of many otherNative American visionaries from Black Elk to Sun Bear." - JosephRobert Jochmans3rd Rare White Buffalo Born on Wisconsin FarmFri Nov 23 14:19:00 2007Map of Mayan Civilization centresCusp Of Great CycleWe are living today in the cusp of the Mayan end times, the end of agalactic day or time period spanning thousands of years. One galacticday of 25,625 years is divided into five cycles of 5,125 years.The Great Cycle of the Mayan Long Count calendar ends on the wintersolstice of 2012 A.D. Following Mayan concepts of cyclic time andWorld Age transitions, this is as much about beginnings as endings.In fact, it was considered by the ancient Mayans to signify thecreation of a new World Age. We are almost at the end of the fifthand final 5,125 year cycle!Mayan Prophecy 2012: Entering Our Galactic DayMany of us are aware of the Mayan calendar but not many people trulyunderstand what it means and how it works. Yes the calendar does endon December 21, 2012, but what does that mean? How does it come tothat? What is their calendar based off of?The Mayans had a very precise understanding of our solar system'scycles and believed that these cycles coincided with our spiritualand collective consciousness. The most significant of which has muchto do with the 2012 prophecies. In the following writing, we willwalk through the main details of their prophecies surrounding the2012 transition. How the transition takes place (from an astronomicalperspective), what it means for us, and when the cycles take place.We'll start with the basic prophecies and later move deeper into theexplanation of the cycles.The Mayans prophesied that from 1999 we have 13 years to realize thechanges in our conscious attitude to stray from the path of self-destruction and instead move onto a path that opens our consciousnessto integrate us with all that exists.The Mayans knew that our Sun, or Kinich-Ahau, every so oftensynchronized with the enormous central galaxy. And from this centralgalaxy received a 'spark' of light which causes the Sun to shine moreintensely producing what our scientists call 'solar flares' as wellas changes in the Sun's magnetic field. The Mayans say that thishappens every 5,125 years. But also that this causes a displacementin the earths rotation, and because of this movement greatcatastrophes would be produced.The Mayans believed the universal processes, like the 'breathing' ofthe galaxy, are cycles that never change. What changes is theconsciousness of man that passes through it. Always in a processtoward more perfection. Based on their observations, the Mayanspredicted that from the initial date of the start of theircivilization, 4 Ahau, 8 Cumku which is 3113 B.C., after one cyclebeing completed 5,125 years in their future, December 21st, 2012. TheSun, having received a powerful ray of synchronizing light from thecenter of the galaxy, would change its polarity which would produce agreat cosmic event that would propel human kind to be ready to crossinto a new era, The Golden Age. It is after this, that the Mayans saywe will be ready to go through the door that was left by them,transforming our civilization based on fear to a vibration muchhigher in harmony.Only from our individual efforts could we avoid the path to greatcataclysm that our planet will suffer to start a new era, the sixthcycle of the Sun. The Mayan civilization was in the fifth cycle ofthe Sun, and there were four other great civilizations before themthat were destroyed by great natural disasters. They believed thateach cycle was just one stage in the collective consciousness ofhumanity.In the last cataclysm of the Mayans, the civilization was destroyedby a great flood that left little survivors of which were theirdescendants. They believed that having known the end of their cycle,mankind would prepare for what is to come in the future and it isbecause of this that they would have preserved the dominant species;the human race. They say that coming changes will permit us to make aquantum leap forward in the evolution of our consciousness to createa new civilization that would manifest great harmony and compassionto all humankind.Their first prophecy talks about 'The Time of No-Time'. A period of20 years, which they call a Katún. The last 20 years of the Sun'scycle of 5,125 years. This cycle is from 1992 - 2012. I'll explainthis in greater detail later. They predicted that during these times,solar winds would become more intense and could be seen on the Sun.This would be a time of great realization and great change formankind. And it would be our own lack of preservation andcontamination of the planet that would contribute to these changes.According to the Mayans, these changes would happen so that mankindcomprehends how the universe works so we could advance to superiorlevels, leaving behind superficial materialism and liberatingourselves from suffering.The Mayans say, that seven years after the start of Katún, which isto say 1999, we would enter a time of darkness which would force usto confront our own conduct. The say that this is the time whenmankind will enter 'The Sacred Hall of Mirrors'. Where we will lookat ourselves and analyze our behaviors with ourselves, with others,with nature and with the planet in which we live. A time in which allof humanity, by individual conscious decisions, decides to change andeliminate fear and lack of respect from all of our relationships. TheMayans prophesied that the start of this period would be marked by asolar eclipse on August 11, 1999, known to them as 13 Ahau, 8 Cauac.And would coincide with an unprecedented planetary alignment,the 'Grand Cross' alignment. This would be the last 13 years of theKatón period. The last opportunity for our civilization to realizethe changes that are coming at the moment of our spiritualregeneration.For the Mayans, everything is numbers and the time of the 13 sacrednumbers started in August 1999. They predicted that along with theeclipse, the forces of nature would act like a catalyst of changes soaccelerated and with such magnitude that mankind would be powerlessagainst them. Also, that our technologies in which we rely on so muchwould begin to fail us. We would no longer be able to learn from ourcivilization in the way that we are organized as a society. They saidthat our internal, spiritual development would require a better placealong with a better way to interact with more respect and compassion.The first prophecies were attained by their study of our Sun. TheMayans discovered that the entire solar system moved. That even ouruniverse has its own cycles. Repetitive periods which begin and endlike our day and night. These discoveries lead to the understandingthat our solar system rotates on an ellipse that brings our solarsystem closer and further from the center of the galaxy. In otherwords, according to the Mayans, our Sun and all of its planets rotatein cycles in relation to the center of the galaxy or Hunab-Kú, thecentral light of the galaxy. It takes 25,625 years for our solarsystem to make one cycle on this ellipse. One complete cycle iscalled a galactic day. The cycle is divided into two halves similarto our day and night. The half closest to the central light, is oursolar system's 'day' and the half furthest away is its 'night'. Eachday and each night lasts 12,800 years. Which is to say, the centralgalaxy is the Sun for our entire solar system.The Mayans discovered that every grand cycle has its minor cycles,that carry the same characteristics. One galactic day of 25,625 yearsis divided into five cycles of 5,125 years. The first cycle is thegalactic morning. When our solar system is just coming out of thedarkness to enter the light. The second cycle is the mid-day. Whenour solar system is closest to the central light. The third cycle isthe afternoon. When our solar system begins to come out of the light.The fourth cycle is the late-night. When our solar system has enteredits furthest cycle from the central light. And the fifth and lastcycle is night before dawn. When are solar system is in its lastcycle of darkness before starting again. This is the cycle we arecurrently coming out of.The Mayan prophecy tells us that in 1999, our solar system began toleave the end of the fifth cycle which started in 3113 B.C. and thatwe find ourselves in the morning of our galactic day, exitingdarkness and on the verge of being in plain day of our central galaxyin 2012. They say that at the beginning and end of these cycles,which is to say, every 5,125 years, the central sun or light of thegalaxy emits a ray of light so intense and so brilliant that itilluminates the entire universe. It is from this burst of light thatall of the Suns and planets sync. The Mayans compare this burst tothe pulse of the universe, beating once every 5,125 years. It isthese pulses that mark the end of one cycle and the beginning of thenext. Each pulse lasting 20 years, a Katún.So we come back to what they call 'The Time of No Time'. It is anevolutionary period, short but intense, inside the grand cycles wheregreat changes take place to thrust us into a new age of evolution asindividuals and as mankind.As individuals we will have to make decisions that will affect usall. If we continue on this negative path of hate, an eye for an eye,destruction of nature, of fear and egoism, we will enter straightinto the time of destruction and chaos, and we will disappear as thedominant race of this planet. If we become conscious and realize thatwe all form part of a great organism, and that we should respect oneanother and be grateful to our planet, then we will move directlyinto positive growth, our Golden Age. Our planet, the Sun and theGalaxy are awaiting our decision. It is up to us what will happen inthis time of change. Whether we go through a time of suffering anddestruction or we find ourselves united in one positive consciousnessmoving closer to our next stage.Please notice the events of our planet as evidence that the Mayanprophecies are worth listening to and learning from. Share thisinformation and help us all move toward a better future, where we canthrive in a new era of positivity. It has never been so important.www.december212012.com/articles/mayan/7.shtmlWhat is so special about the Mayan Calendar?"The person with no previous exposure to the Mayan Calendar willusually initially be surprised by the fact that some people todaytake such an interest in an ancient calendar. After all, humanhistory has seen a high number of different calendars. Is not thenthe Mayan calendar just a very specialized subject of interest onlyto specialists or history buffs? "Why would the world today needanother calendar than the Gregorian or Muslim that are currently inuse, and why should this be the Mayan calendar?" some may ask.By Carl Johan CallemanWell, to begin with most people probably have a much too limited viewof the importance of the Mayan civilization, and Native Americantraditions generally. In fact, at their height in the 5th to 9thcenturies AD, the Mayan cities would be among the largest in theworld and developed the most advanced mathematics and astronomy oftheir day. And so, even if the Native American civilizations hardlysurvived the later contact with the Europeans they were and are thecarriers of a significant and irreplaceable part of the global humanconsciousness.When we talk about the Mayan Calendar something profoundly differentis also meant than just a system to mark off the passage of time. TheMayan Calendar is above all a prophetic calendar that may help usunderstand the past and foresee the future. It is a calendar of theAges that describes how the progression of Heavens and Underworldscondition the human consciousness and thus the frames for ourthoughts and actions within a given Age. The Mayan Calendar providesan exact schedule for the Cosmic Plan and the unfolding of all thingsthat come into existence. There is now ample empirical evidence forthis, something that shines new light on the age old questions ofmankind. Things do exist for a reason. The reason is that they fitinto the divine cosmic plan. For those that seriously engage in astudy of the Mayan Calendar this soon becomes evident and the formermaterialist world view loses all relevance. The Mayan Calendar is agateway to the worlds of consciousness which the majority of humanityhas been blinded to through the use of false or delusory calendars.Since everything that exists is an aspect of consciousness, and theMayan Calendar describes the evolution of consciousness in all of itsaspects, no stone is left unturned for the serious student of theMayan Calendar. All of science is affected, all of religion isaffected, all of life is affected. We are here for a reason. Time isno longer equated with money, but with spirit. Time is inspiration!2012 in briefThe Mayan civilization of Central America was and is the mostadvanced in relation to time-science knowledge. Their main calendaris the most accurate on the planet. It has never erred. The Mayanfifth world finished in 1987. The sixth world starts in 2012. So weare currently "between worlds"1. Humanity and Planet Earth are currently going through a hugechange or shift in consciousness and reality perception.2. The Mayan civilization of Central America was and is the mostadvanced in relation to time-science knowledge. Their main calendaris the most accurate on the planet. It has never erred. They actuallyhave 22 calendars in total, covering the many timing cycles in theUniverse and Solar System. Some of these calendars are yet to berevealed.3. The Mayan fifth world finished in 1987. The sixth world starts in2012. So we are currently "between worlds". This time is calledthe "Apocalypse" or revealing. This means the real truth will berevealed. It is also the time for us to work through "our stuff"individually and collectively.4. The Mayan sixth world is actually blank. This means it is up tous, as co-creators, to start creating the new world and civilizationwe want now.5. The Mayans also say that by 2012we will have gone beyond technology as we know it.we will have gone beyond time and money.we will have entered the fifth dimension after passing through thefourth dimensionPlanet Earth and the Solar System will come into galacticsynchronization with the rest of the Universe.Our DNA will be "upgraded" (or reprogrammed) from the centre of ourgalaxy. (Hunab Ku)Everybody on this planet is mutating. Some are more conscious of itthan others. But everyone is doing it.6. In 2012 the plane of our Solar System will line up exactly withthe plane of our Galaxy, the Milky Way. This cycle has taken 26,000years to complete. Virgil Armstrong also says that two other galaxieswill line up with ours at the same time. A cosmic event!7. Time is speeding up (or collapsing). For thousands of years theSchumann Resonance or pulse (heartbeat) of Earth has been 7.83 cyclesper second, The military have used this as a very reliable reference.However, since 1980 this resonance has been slowly rising. It is nowover 12 cycles per second! This means there is the equivalent of lessthan 16 hours per day instead of the old 24 hours.8. During the Apocalypse or the time "between worlds" many peoplewill be going through many personal changes. The changes will be manyand varied. It is all part of what we came here to learn orexperience. Examples of change could be- relationships coming to anend, change of residence or location, change of job or work, shift inattitude or thinking etc."What is so special about the Mayan Calendar?http://enlightenment.en.funpic.de/index.phpPacal Votan's prophetic call is alerting present-day humanity thatour biological process is transforming, approaching the culminationof a 26,000 year evolutionary program. Bringing the return ofuniversal telepathy, heightened sense capacity, and self-reflectiveconsciousness, this is a return to the sacred domain of our innertechnology.This grand cycle of evolution will culminate winter solstice,December 21, 2012 AD.This time we are now in has been called "The Time of Trial onEarth," "Judgement Day," "The Time of Great Purification," "The Endof this Creation," "The Quickening," "The End of Time as We KnowIt," "The Shift of the Ages." It is foretold that the completion ofthe Precession brings regeneration of Earth, offering awakening toall open, willing hearts. Many peoples spoke of these last days ofthe Great Cycle, including the: Maya, Hopi, Egyptians, Kabbalists,Essenes, Qero elders of Peru, Navajo, Cherokee, Apache, Iroquoisconfederacy, Dogon Tribe, and Aborigines.Mayan Prophecies and Calendar"The Gregorian calendar is not in harmony with the forces of nature.The original Egyptian calendar was. But the Egyptian calendar waslater modified by the Greeks/Spartan and then the Romans etc. 30 yrsafter the birth of Christ, the calendar was off by 12 days. They hada council to bring it back (Julian). In 1582 it was again out of lineand Pope Gregory brought in the best astronomers to align it onceagain. It still suffer changes. The Russian Orthodox did not acceptthis calendar until much later.The Mayan calendar will need to be adjusted by one day in 380,000years.The Aztecs use different glyphs and is basically the same as theMayan only slightly less evolved. Their glyphs are better in theirrepresentations of the energies though.The Earth changes will continue until 2012. The Elders say that theprocess can be easy and aligned or can be catastrophic. Human energywill decide this.Time and the calendar begin on the equinox of 3/21.There had been a cycle of darkness that lasted 468 years (9 X 52) andended on 3/30/1993.We are now in a transition period called the 'Cycle of the merge ofthe dark and the light.' During this time humanity is going throughgreat transition.The cycle of light will come in full force on 12/21/2012.This is considered the cycle of 13 lights and 13 heavens.Many cycles begin on that same date.Mother Earth as a living entity will transcend to another level orfrequency or consciousness and a new and special era will begin.The preparation for this is now in the womb of the Earth so to speakand the process of change is bringing transcendental manifestations.This new era will be very positive. "Let all beings rise. Let not oneor two stay behind".The times are here for total brotherhood.The spirit beings, different philosophies, different races must beginto weave together all knowledge to create the tapestry of harmony andbalance. We are all seeing the evidence of this shift in humanconsciousness now. ...Quetzalcoatl, the feathered serpentQuetzalcoatl, the feathered or plumed serpent, represents kundaliniwhich is the movement of energy from the Earth to the base of thespine then up the spine. This serpent/fire represents transcendence.Quetzalcoatl, "The whole American continent is represented by aneagle or condor. It (America) has been called to take the torch forthese times. One wing represents the physical and the other thematerial. The spiritual wing must continue to lift. When balancecomes of both wings, then America will come unto it's own bringingthe spiritual and material resources together."Mayan Prophecies and Calendarhttp://www.crystalinks.com/mayanprophecies.htmlMadrid Codex: (75-76)WHAT HAVE THE HOPIS, MAYANS, AND OTHER NATIVE AMERICAN PEOPLESFORESEEN ABOUT THE DESTRUCTION OF THE WORLD IN THE YEAR 2000?Both the Hopis and Mayans recognize that we are approaching the endof a World Age. But the former, however, offer no time limits, whilethe latter have a calendar system whose grand Thirteen Baktun cyclewill end either on December 24, 2011 or June 6, 2012 (depending onyour method of calculation). In both cases, however, the Hopi andMayan elders do not prophesy that everything will come to an end.Rather, this is a time of transition from one World Age into another.The message they give concerns our making a choice of how we enterthe future ahead. Our moving through with either resistance oracceptance will determine whether the transition will happen withcataclysmic changes or gradual peace and tranquility. The same themecan be found reflected in the prophecies of many other NativeAmerican visionaries from Black Elk to Sun Bear.This concept that we can make choices concerning our future destiniesis one found not only in Native American prophecies but is really anessential ingredient in all true prophetic pronouncements. Trueprophecy is meant to be a reflection on the hidden natures andmotivations of human behavior, both individually and collectively, aswell as the future options based on the human ability to make achoice. True prophecy is thus more than merely a forecast. Itspurpose is to provide the lesson that is to be learned from apotential future prognostication so that, if possible, the lesson isaccepted and processed beforehand. Thus the course of the future canactually be changed, and a different pathway of prophesied events canbe manifested into reality.In this context, the period of time between now and the year 2012,with 2000 as the benchmark, appears to be shaping up into a decisivetime period when important choices will be made and when any numberof timelines for the future are possible. True prophecy is our guideto determine what those different timelines are and how we can makethe right choices.TOP 10 PROPHECIES FOR THE YEAR 2000by Joseph Robert JochmansAligning With the Spirit of the Maya Calendar End-Date 2012by Dwayne Edward RourkeJanuary 1, 2000A great turning of the Gregorian calendar wheel has brought us to thethreshold of a new millennium. Throughout the planet, people arefilled with the sort of expectancy, excitement and anxiety such athreshold evokes. However, if any of us are looking to the calendaritself for guidance as to how to align with the spirit of this newtime, we will likely be disappointed. Very little is provided there,other than a rather utilitarian segmentation of time into years,months and days. In contrast, the workings of a sacred calendar suchas that found throughout Mesoamerica and especially in those areasinhabited by traditional Mayan people, provide a wealth of symbolismable to empower its adherents with insight and energy.Clearly, all calendars throughout the world are arbitrary man-madeconstructions. Generally, they are based on alignment with particularcelestial phenomena such as the solar or lunar year. Mayan calendarsare no exception and currently the Mayan calendar tradition callsattention to the day we call December 21 , 2012. The Maya have beenaware for hundreds of years that on that Winter solstice day, aunique astronomical event will occur: a very rare conjunction of theSun with the ecliptic of the Milky Way galaxy....In the direction EAST, universally acknowledged as the place of newbeginnings, the Maya place the hieroglyph CHICCHAN (pronunciation:cheek'chan). CHICCHAN is the serpent mind, the mind that isconstantly renewed and regenerated, through a process of sheddingwhat no longer serves us. The physical body itself can be seen as anevolutionary skin periodically released, as one life ends and anotherbegins. It is a body fueled ultimately by a form of solar energy theMaya call kultunlilni. Kultunlilni is the vital life force empoweringall human growth and development. This crucial life-force is the sameas what is known in Hindu cosmology as the serpent power: kundalini.Kundalini is the great evolutionary force making of each body and itsoccupant, a potentially powerful source of solar wisdom. Importantfor us to remember, however, is that this primary, very intimate andvery powerful source of wisdom is only accessible to the extent thatwe are able to hear what our bodies, as carriers of its sacred gift,are actually telling us. Inevitably in this process, we turn to thosewith whom we feel a strong attraction or affinity. "Aligning With the Spirit of the Maya Calendar End-Date 2012http://www.dwayneedwardrourke.com/Pages/Mill2012.htmWhat is the Millennium all about?Consensus indicates that we are coming out of what the Indiantradition names Kali Yuga (this is the age of darkness/ignorance) andare on the verge of entering the Satya Yuga (the age of truth) whenall falsehood will expose itself and drop away. The Yuga which linksthese two Yugas is named Krita Yuga ( Age of transition.)From the Western Astrological perspective this seems to correspondwith the understanding that we are transiting from the Piscean Age tothe Age of Aquarius. The onset of the Aquarian Age speaks to us ofspiritual awakenings, of the perfection of each human being, throughan awareness of our own spiritual self. The time of rebirth and greatspiritual development on earth. All this heralding a time of muchgreater joy and positivity.Yet in the Christian tradition the generally accepted idea is thatthe Millennium starts around the year 2000. Websters 9th CollegiateDictionary, USA, 1983 gives a definition as follows:- "The 1000 yearsmentioned in the Book of Revelation, chapter 20 during which Holinessis to prevail. A period of great happiness or human perfection".In the Islamic tradition there are many instances where the HolyKoran and the Hadith mention a future time of judgement &resurrection, known as the Qiyamah time. In the traditions of theprophet this time is indicated as coming some time after 1400 years(of the Hijri calendar), which again seems to coincide with thecoming Millennium & twenty first century.For Buddhists there is some expectation that the Wheel of Dharma, themetaphorical wheel of time is set to turn for the first time in 2500years since Lord Buddha's advent. Gautama Buddha apparently taughtthat each revolution of the wheel signalled a new beginning, orrebirth for humanity.From the Book of Prophecies of the Knight John of Jerusalem (11thCentury) comes the following: "The millennium that comes after thismillennium will change into a light time. People will love and shareand dream, and dreams will come true." Further it adds: "People willbe one big body of which every person is a tiny part. Togetherthey'll be the heart and they'll speak one language." "Men will havereached heaven" "Men will know the Spirit of all things" "People willreceive a second birth and the Spirit will come into them."Ancient Sibylline Oracles of the Roman era perhaps also add to thecollective vision of what the future may hold...for example "Viceshall leave the earth and be sunk in the divine ocean"William Blake (1757-1827) speaks of the Judaic tradition in hiswork: `The Marriage of Heaven and Hell'. V14 as follows: The ancienttradition that the world will be consumed (overthrown) in fire at theend of six thousand years is true,....For the cherub with his flamingsword is hereby commanded to leave guard at(the) tree of life: andwhen he does, the whole creation will be consumed (overthrown) andappear infinite and holy, whereas it now appears finite and corrupt.If the doors of perception were cleansed every thing would appear toman as it is, infinite. For man has so closed himself up, till hesees all things thro' narrow chinks of his cavern.So what does the past say about the present? Well in short-manythings. What is intriguing is the faint echo from the past whichinforms us of a hitherto unsuspected phenomenon, namely the coming ofa feminine spiritual personality, a Mother, who will facilitate acollective rebirth. Here are some selected references which allude tothis happening!Predictions about the Spiritual MotherIn a book published in 1887 titled "The Mystery of the Ages" byMarie, Countess of Caithness (Page 316-317) the following predictionappears:- "It was generally considered, at the turn of the nextcentury, that the next Divine incarnation was about to come to earthand would be female, the advent of Divine Wisdom, or Theo-Sophia, andthat the present age would be the age of making known all that whichhas been kept secret from the beginning."This is an extract from the Nadigranth compiled by Mr ShantaramAthvale. The Nadigranth was originally written in Sanskrit 2000 yearsback by the ancient astrologer Bhrigumuni and later updated &translated into Marathi and titled the Kak Nadi by Kakayyar Bhujanderwho was a great astrologer and seeker who lived nearly 300 years agoin India. In this particular extract Shantaram Athvale refers to thewritings from Kak Nadi written by Kakayyar Bhujander:"While Jupiter is in Pisces a great Yogi will incarnate on the Earth.By 1970 it will have become quite evident to many people that a newera will have started. Human life will undergo a complete revolution.This Yogi will be the Incarnation of Parabrahma and will have all thedivine powers.By the new method of yoga devised by the great Yogi, human beingswill be able to attain the joy of Moksha within one lifetime. Whileliving ordinary lives people will achieve Yoga – Union with God. Inthe end all the nations of the world will come together with thefeeling of oneness. There will be a great international conference ina big city of the world. The whole of the humanity will understandthe importance of prayer and all the nations will unite together.Due to new scientific discoveries science and religions would becomeone. With the help of science the existence of God and the Soul couldbe proved. The veil of ignorance and Maya would be drawn aside andBrahmananda, Moksha which could previously only be attained by yogisas a result of very hard work and severe penance would become easilyavailable to many human beings."William Blake (28 Nov 1757-12 Aug 1827) gives us this prophetic poemtitled "To Morning." Seemingly it is an invocation to what heperceived as the feminine aspect of the Divine, whom would facilitatethe dawning of a new age and the unlocking of Heaven on Earth."O Holy Virgin, Clad in purest white Unlock heaven's golden gates andissue forth Awake the dawn that sleeps, that sleeps in heaven Letlight rise from the chambers of the East"C.S Lewis (1898-1963) in his book the Great Divorce describes somekind of approaching procession of great joyousness. "If I couldremember their singing and write down the notes, no man who read thatscore would ever grow sick or old. Between them went musicians: andafter this a lady in whose honour this was being done" and "Everyyoung man or boy that met her became her son" further "Every girlthat met her became her daughter" and "There are those that stealother peoples children. But her motherhood was of a different kind.Those on whom it fell went back to their natural parents loving themmore. In her they became themselves. And now the abundance of lifeshe has in Christ from the Father flows over into them." andalso..."Redeemed humanity is still young, it has hardly come to itsfull strength. But already there is joy enough in the little fingerof a great saint such as yonder lady to waken all the dead things inthe universe to life."The R.S.V. Christian Bible, Revelation, chapter 12, verse 1, tells usprophetically of a marvellous event to come, of a sign, of awoman. "And a great portent appeared in heaven a woman clothed withthe sun with the moon under her feet and on her head a crown oftwelve stars."In the Prophecies of John of Jerusalem an 11th century knight we readthe following regarding `the Mother' and the coming Millenniumtime. "She will be a great Master of the future times....." "She willbe the Mother of the Millennium that comes after theMillennium." "After the days of the devil She will make the softnessof a Mother flow. g) In the Christian Gnostic Gospel of Thomas thismysterious divine feminine power is alluded to in verse 101 as:- "Mymother gave me birth My true Mother gave me Life"The Essene Gospel of Peace, Book 1 (Page 7), speaks of this feminineaspect of the divine as being an inner life force, as something to berealised. "Your Mother is in you, and you in her, She gives you life."In ancient writings of the Bible and also Gnostic records...theenergy now known to many today as Kundalini energy is called byvarious names such as: Sophia, Life, Mother of the living or Wisdom.This force called Wisdom is likened to a feminine energy, and even afeminine personality ........ named as She and Her. In these writingsthe words; She...Her ...Wisdom & Holy Spirit are used interchangeablyto refer to this feminine aspect of the Divine. Also later known inChristian texts as the Holy Ghost, Comforter, Counsellor and Redeemer.From the ancient Wisdom of Solomon written some 2500 years back weread: Chapter 6, Verse, 12-17: 6.12-"Wisdom is radiant and unfadingand she is easily discerned (recognised) by those who love her, andis found by those who seek her. 6.13-She hastens to make herselfknown to those who desire her. ..... and 6.16-She goes about seekingthose worthy of her, and she graciously appears to them in theirpaths, and meets them in every thought.7. 22-24-For in her there is a spirit that is intelligent, holy,unique, manifold, unpolluted, distinct, invulnerable, loving thegood, dynamic (keen), irresistible, beneficent, humane, steadfast,sure, free from anxiety, all-powerful, overseeing all, andpenetrating through all spirits .........................that areintelligent and pure and most subtle.7.24-For wisdom is more mobile than any motion; because of herpureness.... she pervades and penetrates all things. . 7.25-For sheis a breath (wind) of the power of God, and a pure emanation of theglory of the almighty; therefore nothing defiled gains entrance intoher.7.26-For she is a reflection of eternal light, and a spotless mirrorof the working of God, and an image of his goodness.7.27-Though she is but one, she can do all things, and whileremaining in herself, she renews all things; in every generation shepasses into holy souls and makes them friends of God, and prophets:7.28-For God loves nothing so much as the man who lives with wisdom.7.29-For she is more beautiful than the sun, and excels everyconstellation of the stars. Compared with the light she is found tobe superior,....8.1-She reaches mightily from one end of the earth to the other, andshe orders all things well.8. 4-For she is an initiate in the knowledge of God,8.5-If riches are a desirable possession in life what is richer thanwisdom, who effects all things?8.6-And if understanding is effective, who more than she who is thefashioner of what exists?8.8-And if any one longs for wide experience, she knows the things ofold, and infers the things to come; she understands turns of speechand solutions to (life's) riddles she has foreknowledge of signs andwonders and the outcomes of seasons and times.8.16-When I enter my house, (the body/ temple) I shall find rest withher, for companionship with her has no bitterness, and life with herhas no pain, but (is)gladness and joy.8. 17-18-For in kinship with wisdom there is immortality and infriendship with her....pure delight and in labour's of her hands,unfailing wealth, and in experience of her company, understanding andrenown in sharing her words.9.11-For she knows and understands all things,.....And what of Sophia, of Wisdom, of the Holy Spirit, Comforter,Counsellor, Redeemer? Well people say She is here, residing withineach and everyone of us as a sleeping potential, an inner life force,known widely as the Kundalini energy. This unique energy resides inthe sacrum (sacred) bone. It is said that She can be awakened if onetruly desires it so. It sounds like a dream but that's what thismusic seeks to proclaim and celebrate. Further it is said that theone who resurrects this inner Divine Life Force, en-masse, is theDivine Mother, Goddess, Holy Spirit, who is verily a Comforter,Counsellor, Redeemer.This inner living resurrection can be enjoyed every day, and eachsecond by those who experience it. What's more, it is celebratedglobally on the anniversary of the opening of the Sahasrara. TheSahasrara is the universal energy centre located at the crown of thehead, at the fontanelle, the seventh chakra or highest centre ofconsciousness, known otherwise as the thousand petalled lotus. It isthrough this last centre that one is able to connect with the allpervading universal divine "that is". On the day it was opened on acosmic level it is said that the whole atmosphere was filled withtremendous chaitanya (divine life force energy-vibrations) and therewas tremendous light in the sky, and the whole thing came on theEarth. Since that day, thousands upon thousands of seekers from everynation have crossed paths with the one who `delivers the goods'. Foras the Ancient Wisdom of Solomon promises: Verse 6. 12 – "Wisdom isradiant and unfading and she is easily discerned by those who loveher, and is found by those who seek her." "She hastens to makeherself known to those who desire her." and "...she goes aboutseeking those worthy of her, and she graciously appears to them intheir paths, and meets them in every thought. Hence the songlyrics: "She was also in your City. Haven't you heard?"Every year since 1970, the moment when the last centre in ourevolutionary assent was opened, great celebrations have been takingplace with people gathering from every nation & religious traditionsomewhere on the world stage. And the day of commemoration – May 5th.Hence, it was a big surprise to find some predictions regarding thisparticular day, May 5th, for the year 2000, the so called Millenniumyear.The Fernbank Science Centre Planetarium of Emory University inAtlanta, Georgia, USA have carried out various assessments andconcluded that there will be a line-up of planets (heavenly bodies)in the next Millennium. Such line-ups may have only the subtlest ofeffects upon our lives, so no armageddon type scenarios, please. Inshort various planets; Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn, andthe Sun and the new Moon will come into alignment with Earth, in amost unique conjunction or union. Momentarily being connected alonginvisible gravitational lines of energy. Like a cosmic string ofpearls. Perhaps this will be a particularly auspicious day. And when?On the precise date of May 5th, 2000. This is mentioned only to sparkcuriosity, to lead the attention onward, to activate the seeking andquesting faculty, to stimulate the desire to know, feel andexperience the eternal. Everyone can do it..... if they wish!All this excitement about the so called Millennium may lead us in thewrong directions. The Millennium isn't a one moment event, ifanything it more clearly represents a dawning. As a seed sprouts andpromises new growth, so we might look upon the idea of theMillennium. After all, this time business is in essence just a manmade concept, and perhaps not too much should be made of it. In anyevent it is commonly debated that the Julian (Christian calendar) isonly accurate to about plus or minus seven years. (So the Millenniumcould really be anywhere between 1993-2007).Hence, some say, it is best to stay in the present and tap into thatinner state beyond time, the fifth dimension, accessible by achievinga state of `thoughtless awareness' at the Sahasrarachakra.....otherwise known as the Turiya State or Eternity.Rabindranath Tagore (1861-1941), who was awarded the Nobel prize forliterature in 1913 makes the following plea:- "Oh! Mother, let mymind awake slowly on the Sacred Shore of the sea, where great soulsof the world have come together to offer their pranams. Here withoutstretched hands we bow-down to the Divine in human form. Inbounteous poetry and in great joy we adore thee. Behold here ohseeker! The mountain of meditation with rivers resounding and dancingto the solemn music of heaven. Adore here your Sacred Mother Earthwhere great souls have come together on the seashore to offer theirpranams. Come oh! Aryans, come non Aryans, come Hindus and Muslims.Come come oh Englishmen, come Christians, come oh Brahmins purifyyour heart, hold the hands of the down-trodden and out-castes. Removeall ills and disrespect. Come quickly for the coronation (anointing)of the Mother," Blossom Time is indeed here! This is the season!— Geoffrey GodfreyKnowledge of Reality Magazine 1996-2006--------------------------------------------------------------------------------QUOTES OF SHRI MATAJI--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Shri Mataji Nirmala Devi"But today it is the day I declare I am the One who have to save thehumanity. I declare I am the One who is Adi Shakti, who is the Motherof all Mothers, who is the Primordial Mother, the Shakti (DivinePrimordial Power) of the Desire of God, who has incarnated on thisEarth to give meaning to itself, to this Creation, to human beings,and I am sure that through My Love and Patience and My Powers I amgoing to achieve it.I was the One who was born again and again. But now I have come in Mycomplete Form and with complete Powers. I have come on this Earth notonly for salvation of human beings, not only for their emancipation,but for granting them the Kingdom of Heaven, the Joy, the Bliss thatyour Father wants to bestow upon you."Shri Puratana Devi(Purantana: Primordial or Ancient)On July 26, 1995, the Great Primordial Goddess revealed that theMiracle Photo was genuine. Implying that over the duration of 21 fullmoons all the Messengers of God Almighty had given enough evidencenecessary for the Believers on Earth to surrender to the DivineMessage to humanity the Great Primordial Mother ended Her Revelationswith these parting words: "We Have Done Our Job Here." Thus 1995 fitsperfectly with the ancient Mayan prophecy that "a calendar cycle oftwice the Kal-tun of 260 years had to go by in order for the Solarculture to flourish again for the benefit of all humanity." Theactual prophecy reads;"In the year 1475, before the arrival of the Spanish, The SupremeMaya Council revealed the long-held vision of an ancient SolarGrandmother named X'Nuuk'K'in, that a calendar cycle of twice the Kal-tun of 260 years had to go by in oder for the Solar culture toflourish again for the benefit of all humanity. In the spring of1995, this 520 year period will be completed. Thus, 1995 is adecisive year and the human race will have to enter the path of thecosmic light if it is to remain a thinking species. Humans will haveto seek the path of initiation on Earth and in Heaven. Through SolarInitiation they will be able to see the luminosity of the GreatSpirit...through Solar Initiation, the sleeping body of humankind canbe awakened." Hunab K'u (Creator) will flash like lightening thatwill pierce through the shadows that envelop the human race. Let usprepare to receive the light of knowledge" (paraphrased Mayanprophesy)www.nativenet.uthscsa.edu/--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Temple of KukulkanTemple of Kukulkan (Serpent)"Quetzalcoatl taught the ancients all the necessary skills to advancetheir civilization, from mathematics and science to agriculture andastronomy, as well as the famous Mayan calendrical formulae whichpredicts the end of the world to be December 21st 2012. He taught thepeople to live in peace and then moved on disappearing across thesea, but he promised he would someday return. Unfortunately for theancient inhabitants of Mexico they mistook the arrival of the Spanishconquistadors and Cortez in 1519 as Quetzalcaotl's return, bringingabout their tragic doom. Accepting them with open arms and treatingthem with utmost reverence the ancient people expected their newlyarrived god to bestow great benevolence upon them. Instead theSpanish invaders brought nothing but greed and brutality for theirtrusting hosts.The name Quetzalcoatl (ket-tsul'kwot-ul) means "plumed or featheredserpent". We must certainly then mention the great ancient city ofChichen Itza on Yucatan peninsula in Mexico. There, twice a year, anamazing spectacle related to the feathered serpent god takes place:"The Temple of Kukulkan (the Feathered Serpent God, also known asQuetzalcoatl) is the largest and most important ceremonial structureat Chichen Itza. This ninety-foot tall pyramid was built during theeleventh to thirteenth centuries directly upon the multiplefoundations of previous temples. The pyramid is a store-house ofinformation on the Mayan calendar. ... The northern stairway was theprincipal sacred path leading to the summit. At sunset on the vernaland autumnal equinoxes, an interplay between the sun's light and theedges of the stepped terraces on the pyramid creates a fascinating -and very brief - shadow display upon the sides of the northernstairway. A serrated line of seven interlocking triangles (chakras)gives the impression of a long tail leading downward to the stonehead of the serpent Kukulkan (Kundalini), at the base of thestairway." (Linda Casselman)So then, on these two very important dates, the vernal and autumnalequinoxes, it appears that Quetzalcoatl is indeed present among hispeople as the shadow of the serpent moves along the steps of thePyramid of Kulkulkan."This Power is placed in the triangular bone which is called assacrum, which means Greeks knew about this centre. They very wellknew about it, that's why they called it sacred, sacrum. In manycountries there has been a manifestation that they know about thisparticular Power.I happened to go to Colombia where I collected an authentic antiquecopy of the antique necklace. The necklace had at its bottom aKundalini and even the earrings had the Kundalini, but, surprisingly,it was from the Indians of America, though it is now kept in themuseum in Colombia. It was in America that people knew aboutKundalini, definitely absolutely in three and a half coil they haddone this pattern very well. Is very surprising that it was done evenbefore Columbus came here."Shri Mataji Nirmala DeviPhiladelphia, USA — Oct 15, 1993--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Serpent Mound and associatedconstellations-Draco and the LittleDipper. Aerial photo Great Serpent MoundA most fascinating ancient Native American archaeological site foundin Ohio, USA, called the "Great Serpent Mound", features anundulating snake's body, its coiled tail reminiscent of the Kundalinilying dormant in the sacrum. In its mouth appears an egg, symbol ofthe potential actualization of Second Birth.Is it possible, then, that the ancient Native American Peoples wereworshiping the Divine Feminine and were deeply aware of the symbolic,spiritual significance of the Serpent Power and the Primordial Egg?Although scholars are uncertain as to the precise significance ofthis Great Serpent Mound, it is, however, highly likely that thissite was revered by American Indians as the sacred representation ofKundalini awakening (Second Birth).Other sources offer added information on the Great Serpent Mound:"The Great Serpent Mound, in Adams County, Ohio, USA, is consideredto be the world's largest serpent effigy. The mound is a quarter of amile long and five feet high, and it was originally much higher."[1]"The Great Serpent Mound continues to wind its quarter-mile lengthalong an Ohio hilltop...By the end of the nineteenth century,archaeologists were able to show that the mounds had in fact beenbuilt by Native American civilizations many centuries before-a-long-lost-civilization such as Greece, Persia, Holy Land or mythicalisland of Atlantis."[2]"...the two structures [Stonehenge and the Great Serpent Mound in theUSA] share the same timeline. From carbon dating in and aroundStonehenge, the Council for British Archaeology (CBA) gives an earlydate for the core of Stonehenge at 3,000 B.C.E. or 5,000 years ago.The design of Serpent Mound was conceived about 5,000 years ago aswell-and is therefore among the oldest of earth and stone works inNorth America--or in fact the world. In this, Stonehenge and SerpentMound are coeval. That time period is referred to in North Americanarchaeology as being of the "Archaic Period" (approximately 6000B.C.E. to 1000 B.C.E.)www.greatserpentmound.info/stonehenge.htmlReferences[1]Calloway, Colin G.Indians of the Northeast / Colin G.Calloway -The First Americans series.New York, NY,USA. Facts on File,Inc.Copyright,1991.ISBN: 0-8160-2389-1. pp. 15,16[2]Wood, Marion. The World of Native Americans, First Edition. NewYork, NY10010,156 Fifth Ave. Peter Bedwick Books.1997. ISBN:0750022760(hc.) pp.10,11--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Shri Mataji Nirmala Devi"It is important to understand about your own Kundalini, as Selfrealisation is Self knowledge and the one who gives Self knowledge isyour own Kundalini because when she rises , she points out what arethe problems on your Chakras. Now we say that it is pure desire. Itis your chaste desire. It has no lust or greed in it. That power isyour Mother and She Is settled down in the triangular bone. She knowseverything about you just as a tape recorder. She is absoluteknowledge. Because She is so pure that whatever Chakra She touches,She knows what is wrong with that Chakra before hand; so She is quiteprepared and She adjusts herself fully so that you do not get aproblem by the awakening. If any Chakra is constricted , She waitsand goes on slowly opening that Chakra.The Kundalini is the primordial power and is reflected in you. In ahuman being, it is like many strands of energy, like rope. Thisenergy is all twisted together to form that Kundalini. In a humanbeing the strands are 3 x 7 = 21 Nadis raised to the power of 108.When your kundalini rises, one or two strands out of this come up andpierce the fontanelle bone. It has to pass through the innermost nadiknown as Brahma Nadi. It is a spiral movement throughout. Thekundalini is spiral and nadis are also like a spiral. The outer mostnadi is the right side Nadi, "Pingala Nadi". The second innermost isIda Nadi. She starts sending these threads through Brahma Nadi; bythat they relax the centre. By relaxing of Centre, the sympatheticnervous system also starts relaxing, your pupils start dilating andwhen it has pierced the Agnya, then the eyes will be completelydilated and shining. Then She enters into Sahasrara.It is absolutely the pure light of knowledge of love, compassion andattention. All these things are in that energy. We know of manyenergies like electrical, light energy etc. These energies cannotthink. They cannot adjust and work on their own.They have to be handled by us. But this energy itself is the livingenergy and knows how to handle itself. It thinks. If you see a seedbeing sprouted, you will find at the tip of the seed, there is asmall little cell which knows how to go around the soft places, howto encircle the stones and how to find its way towards the source.That cell has got a little Kundalini in it. But within you atremendous force of Kundalini exists. When a realised soul says thathe should have more compassion, as my compassion, is not alright; myconcern about others, my generosity is not alright, I have exploitedother's love. Then this energy starts moving, giving you that greaterdimension of love and compassion. If you do not want to grow in yourawareness then She does not supply the energy which is stored in you.The Kundalini is there to nourish you, look after you and make yougrow by giving you a higher, wider and deeper personality. All herpower is nothing but love. She gives the power to forgive. Even whenyou think, the energy for thinking comes from Kundalini because youare asking her help.The power of Kundalini is absolute purity, auspiciousness, holiness,chastity, self respect, pure love, detachment, concern, enlightenedattention to give you Joy. As a mother will try whatever is possibleto give Joy to her child, in the same way, this Kundalini has onlyone power and that is how to give Joy to her own Children. When wetalk in the light of Kundalini, we have to understand that this lightspreads in your life, outside your life and expresses itself in avery beautiful manner.When you worship Adi Kundalini, the reflection in you, which is yourKundalini, is very happy. Also the deities feel happy.The power of Kundalini which is your own Mother has to rise andmanifest itself, because of your Pure Desire. In your introspection,pujas and in your Meditation, you should see for yourself, why areyou in Meditation. It is for Pure Desire of compassion and love to beawakened within us. The growth has started and you will find thatthis shell which is human conditioning and ego will just break open.It is in the triangular bone, which comes up, manifests and can savethe whole world. Just see the magnificence, the expansion, thegreatness of this Kundalini which was within you and which came up inits full strength and has shown tremendous things.The joy we feel during music recitals is because Kundalini isdancing. She gets happy because you ask for nothing but enjoyment ofcollectivity.You are yourself fully connected when you are absolutely detached andyour Kundalini is dancing. You are alone and never alone. Thisoneness with the whole gives you all the security and joy you want.That's why the Kundalini awakening means collectivity. Unless anduntil you want pure collectivity in your being Kundalini won't rise.When you worship Adi Kundalini, You are trying to cleanse yourKundalini, as well as please the Deities. This is an object. Itcannot be changed. But the reflector can change. The movement ofKundalini depends on temperament of person. Kundalini can give youhonesty, and faith in honesty by actualising the experience.Supposing you want to go to a garden and you are suddenly there. Thenyou will know that your desire is pure and it has worked out. Allsuch miracles happen. The pure desire works out because it ispowerful.When it works, the whole thing works out and you develop faith. Thatfaith is within you. Nobody can challenge you, if you have faith, itwill be done. Your Pure desire is now being fulfilled, you are nowconnected and you are now Divine. You are realised souls. You aredifferent from others. For you, all this subtle knowledge is beingabsorbed, because your Kundalini is absorbing it. Whatever isabsorbed is absorbed back by me. But that becomes like a barometer.You immediately know without thinking, asking, you know about anyonebecause Kundalini is the reflector. The better a reflector, youbecome, the more the Kundalini shows. Though Kundalini is anindividual Mother, in her functions and methods. She is just thesame. You cannot cheat the Kundalini, She knows you out and out. Wemust meditate to get into thoughtless awareness by which we allow theKundalini to grow."Shri Mataji Nirmala Devi--------------------------------------------------------------------------------"I am here to tell you about the last breakthrough of our evolution.This breakthrough of our evolution in our awareness has to happen inthese modern times and has been, moreover, recorded in the writingsof many seers. These are the times called as the "Decadent Times"last called by the great saint Vyasa who has written the Gita, and itis the decadence of humanity that we see around in every way possible.Now I would like to tell the secret knowledge of our inner beingwhich was known in India thousands of years back. For our evolutionand spiritual ascent there is a residual power within us which islocated in the triangular bone at the base of our spine. Thisresidual power was available thousands of years back in India, theawakening of the Kundalini was done, traditionally, on an individualbasis only. One guru would give awakening to on disciple. As a resultof that awakening, what happens is that you achieve your self-realisation, your self-hood. Secondly, when this power is awakened,it rises and passes through six subtle energy centres in your body,nourishing them and integrating them. Ultimately this power breaksthrough the fontanelle bone area called as the Talu or Divine Love,which is described in the Bible also as the "cool breeze of the HolyGhost", also in the Koran as "Ruh" and also in the India scripturesas "Paramchaitanya". Patanjali has called it as "Ritambhara Pragya".Whatever the name, this is a power which is all-pervading, which doesall the subtle works of living process, of evolutionary process. Theexistence of this all-pervading energy is not felt before realisationbut after self-realisation you can feel it on your finger tips or atthe centre of your palm or above the fontanelle bone area.Actually, this knowledge existed a long time beck but mycontribution, if there is any, is that we can now achieve en masserealisation. Thousands can achieve mass realisation. It is a gift ofthis time where it was predicted that such global transformation willtake place. In as many as 65 countries, thousands of people haveattained their self-realisation through Sahaja Yoga....May the Divine bless you all.Shri Mataji Nirmala Devi--------------------------------------------------------------------------------ADDITIONAL QUOTES--------------------------------------------------------------------------------Dresden CodexIn 1475, seventeen years before Christopher Columbus made his firstjourney to the "New World," the Supreme Maya Priestly Councilassembled to reveal that darkness would soon be failing upon theMayan people and that two calendar cycles would have to pass beforethe Mayan people would once again emerge into the light. Consideringthe devastation suffered by the Maya at the hands of the SpanishConquistadors, the prediction of darkness was amazingly accurate."According to Mayan calendar keeper, Hunbatz Men, the Spring Equinox(March 21) Of 1995 marked the end of that period of darkness, since520 years have now passed (each Mayan calendar cycle is 260 years).To mark the event, Hunbatz Men led a solar initiation on this date atChichen ltz , one of the largest and most frequently visited ruins inthe Yucatan Peninsula.This initiation offered a genuine spiritual experience for the tensof thousands who attended, most of whom were Mayan. The day wasfilled with wonder: Lamas from Tibet and leaders of the Supreme MayanCouncil bestowed blessings upon attendees; Mayan music and dance wasperformed on stage; and the incredible architecture of Chichen ltzwas available for all to view.The ceremony came to a climax late in the afternoon when a shadowimage of the serpent appeared on the Pyramid of Kukulcan. This imageappears bi-annually at Chichen Itz and is a testament to thearchitectural and astronomical talents of Mayan civilization. At theEquinox, the sun hits in such a way that a shadow forms on one of thepyramid's edges in the shape of a serpent's body. This shadow snakeconnects with a statue of a serpent's head at base of the pyramid tocomplete the image of a holy Mayan symbol, representing fertility andre-birth. Attendees responded with meditation, chanting, and prayer,and displayed reverence for the 'miracle."As we reflect on the event, it is hard not to think about the recentbirth of a white buffalo in Janesville, Wisconsin. This uniqueappearance fulfills an ancient Indian prophecy and signifies a newperiod of hope and renewal for Native American culture. According tothe Lakota Sioux, the birth of a female white buffalo promises unityamong people and a new respect for the earth. Let's hope both ofthese prophecies may be fulfilled."Mayan Prophecy: The Reawakening of the Cosmic Manby Aluna Joy Yaxk'in--------------------------------------------------------------------------------MAYAN PROPHESIES FOR THE NEW MILLENNIUMfrom elder Hunbatz Men"The Mayan prophecies are being fulfilled. Some are being fulfilledeven now. Some will be fulfilled on the morrow. The Mayan propheciesexist because the Mayas knew the cosmic time. They knew that incertain times it would be necessary to keep this cosmic wisdomsecret. This was the purpose of the prophecy so that they might beable to communicate their secrets to the initiates of the future.It is prophesied that initiates shall return to the sacred land ofthe Mayas to continue the work of the Great Spirit. Here in the landsof the Mayab, in the cycle of light, there surged a great wisdom,which would illuminate humanity for many millennia. This wisdom wasgiven to the Mayan-Itzaes.Now the reincarnated masters return to these lands of the Mayan tocommunicate with the great spirits of the Itzaes so that togetherthey may understand what shall be the new initiation which will beput to practice; so that humanity, the reincarnated masters and thegreat spirits of the Itzaes may fuse into one. Then they will be ableto travel like the wind, descend like the rain, give warmth like fireand teach like Mother Earth.These masters will come from many places. They will be of manycolors. Some will speak of things difficult to understand. Otherswill be aged. Some less so. Some will dance while others will remainsilent as rocks. Their eyes will communicate the initiatic message,which is to continue through the cycles of the next millennium.It is also prophesied that this initiation of cosmic wisdom is forfuture initiates. They will be young and old, men and women who willhave the understanding that this modern civilization is not meetingits educational responsibilities. It is well known that this so-called modern civilization has caused a regressive effect inspiritual development.The Mayan ceremonial centers begin to emanate the light of the newmillennium, which is much needed today. Many Mayan cosmic ceremonialcenters begin to beckon, with their solar reflection, the manyinitiates who will come to continue the work of the Great Spirit. Inmany Mayan ceremonial centers Solar Priests will begin to walk amongthe multitude of tourists. They will be touched by the Solar Prieststo be initiation with the cosmic wisdom. It will be then that theinitiates of the second level shall begin to work among the newinitiates."elder Hunbatz Men--------------------------------------------------------------------------------"Ah the Mayan Calendars end in 2012 means the end of time. I'm sureoften you have heard that enlightenment means realization of the soul(beyond space and time) in correlation with spirit (God, or creation).So do not fear, 2012 does not mean cataclysm, in fact, its theopposite, the coming of a new Golden Age, in which we will possessthe powers of the ancient ones. We will be able to levitate,manifest, and heal, and invocate magic. You will notice that more andmore people are becoming interested in crystals, enlightenment, andthe etheric and astral planes. At the same time, much chaos ishappening now to balance the worlds karma so we can all ascendtogether. This is the law, and by following it, we will ascend and befreed from karma. This is why many of you may be experiencing timesof turmoil. It is there for a reason, it will never happen again.There is actual scientific evidence that our DNA is evolving, andforming new strands, and the complete evolutionary process of our DNAwill be finished in 2012. With this we will be able to gain mysticalwisdom unknown by the children of man, yet known by the children oflight.For you see, from many ancient sources, it describes time as beingcircular. The wisdom and powers of creation possessed in ancienttimes, will come back to us again. The ancient descended from God, amotherland, Mu, Atlantis, then spreading and migrating into thepeople of India, Egypt, Greece, Persia..... All of these ancientmessengers carry the secret of the ancients, and all will relate tothe same thing (yet they are all on different parts of the world)meaning they descended from ONE. We are coming back to this ONE, andmore discoveries of Atlantis and our ancient past is emerging.Especially that of the crystals, which Atlantis used as a magicaltool of the Gods.Look to many sources, not just mine. Keep and open mind. Do notfollow me, rather take the wisdom I speak to thee, and use it on yourown path."Eleyzuel--------------------------------------------------------------------------------"A steadily quickening flow of earth changes has become so apparentin 1995 that even traditional media are paying attention. Earthtransformation was the cause of celebration of the HarmonicConvergence initiated by Jose and Lloydine Arguelles in August, 1987,and the Time Shift on July 26, 1992. The Time Shift marked the timein history when the planet entered a new sequencing of energy thatafter a magnetic pole shift in 2000, will be complete in December,2012. With the energy sequencing complete in 2012, Timeship Earthwill launch her voyage into fourth dimensional time in 2013.The map of planetary transformation into a new dimensional timestream was plotted in the Mayan calendar and interpreted by Jose andLloydine in the Dreamspell. In the 1950s, Euro-American astronomersran headlong into the stunning reality that Native Americans weremasters of a sophisticated astronomy previously unrecognized. Sincethe New World was conquered, the Europeans had believed that NativeAmericans were ignorant of astronomy. In fact, the Native Americanconcept was completely different than the European and thus notrecognized. Where European astronomers tracked large objects, such asthe sun and moon, in direct courses, the Native Americans trackedsmall objects relative to large objects, a far more complex andaccurate system. The two systems perceived the heavens from suchradically different view points, that the Europeans did not recognizethe Native American system as astronomy."www.lostcivilizations.net--------------------------------------------------------------------------------"When the Spanish conquered the Incas 500 years ago, the lastpachacuti, or great change, occurred. The Q'ero have been waitingever since for the next pachacuti, when order would emerge out ofchaos. For the past five centuries they preserved their sacredknowledge, and finally, in recent years, the signs were fulfilledthat the great time of change was at hand:- the high mountain lagoons have dried,- the condor is nearly extinct- and the discovery of the Golden Temple has occurred, following theearthquake in 1949 which represented the wrath of the sun.The prophecies are optimistic. They refer to the end of time as weknow it -- the death of a way of thinking and a way of being, the endof a way of relating to nature and to the earth.In the coming years, the Incas expect us to emerge into a golden age,a golden millennium of peace. The prophecies also speak of tumultuouschanges happening in the earth, and in our psyche, redefining ourrelationships and spirituality. The next pachacuti, or great change,has already begun, and it promises the emergence of a new human afterthis period of turmoil. The chaos and upheaval characteristic of thisperiod will last another four years, according to the Q'ero.The paradigm of European civilization will continue to collapse, andthe way of the Earth people will return. Even more importantly, theshamanic elders speak about a tear in the fabric of time itself. Thispresents an opportunity for us to describe ourselves not as who wehave been in the past but as who we are becoming.Pachacuti also refers to a great Incan leader who lived in the late1300s. He is said to have built Machu Picchu and was the architect ofan empire the size of the US. For the Incas, Pachacuti is a spiritualprototype -- a Master, a luminous one who stepped outside of time. Hewas a messiah, but not in the Christian sense of the only son of God,beyond the reach of humanity. Rather he is viewed as a symbol andpromise of who we all might become. He embodies the essence of theprophecies of the pachacuti, as Pacha means "earth" or "time," andcuti means "to set things right." His name also means "transformer ofthe earth."The prophecies of the pachacuti are known throughout the Andes. Thereare those who believe the prophecies refer to the return of theleader Pachacuti to defeat those who took the Incas' land. Butaccording to Dr. Villoldo, the return of Pachacuti is taking place onthe collective level. "It's not the return of a single individual whoembodies what we're becoming, but a process of emergence available toall peoples."The Q'ero have served as the caretakers of the rites and propheciesof their Inca ancestors. The prophecies are of no use unless one hasthe keys, the rites of passage. The Star Rites, or "Mosoq Karpay"(The Rites of the Time to Come), are crucial to the practical growthdescribed in the prophecies. Following the "despachos" (ritualisticofferings of mesa, or medicine bundles) at the ceremony in New YorkCity, the shamans administered the Mosoq Karpay to the individualspresent, transmitting the energies originating with the ancestors oftheir lineage. The transmission of the Mosoq Karpay is the ceremonyrepresenting the end of one's relationship to time. It is a processof the heart.This process of Becoming is considered more important than theprophecies themselves. The Karpay (rites) plant the seed ofknowledge, the seed of Pachacuti, in the luminous body of therecipient. It is up to each person to water and tend the seed so thatit can grow and blossom. The rites are a transmission of potential;one must then make oneself available to destiny. The Karpays connectthe person to an ancient lineage of knowledge and power that cannotbe accessed by the individual. It can only be summoned by a tribe.Ultimately, this power can provide the impetus for one to leap intothe body of an Inca, a Luminous One. That person is connecteddirectly to the stars, the Incan Sun of cosmology. The Q'ero believethat the doorways between the worlds are opening again. Holes in timethat we can step through and beyond, where we can explore our humancapabilities. Regaining our luminous nature is a possibility todayfor all who dare to take the leap.The Andean shamans say,"Follow your own footsteps. Learn from the rivers, the trees and therocks. Honor the Christ, the Buddha, your brothers and sisters. Honorthe Earth Mother and the Great Spirit. Honor yourself and all ofcreation." "Prophecies of the Q'ero Inca Shamanswww.bibliotecapleyades.net/profecias/esp_profecias_inca.htm--------------------------------------------------------------------------------"The Maya developed their calendar long before the Julian orGregorian calendars came into existence. The Mayan Calendar is basedon naturally occurring energy cycles and a close connection to MotherEarth, the Sun, and the Pleiades. Because the Maya honored MotherEarth and the energy cycles that are present here, they were in tunewith the cycles. They had access to information that is not availableto 'modern people' because 'modern people' are extremely limited bytheir belief systems.The Maya gained knowledge about many cycles which occur on Earth.They recognized a 13-day cycle of energy which comes from galacticsources. They also came to know a 20-day energy cycle coming from theSun. By studying the cycles and their interaction with each other,the Maya gained an understanding of life on Earth that far exceedsour 'modern' beliefs. Fortunately, this knowledge is becomingavailable to us at this time to assist in our 'return to naturalharmony'...As the Grand Cycle nears completion, something very interesting isalso happening in the Pleiades constellation. The star Maya is the3rd star of the Pleiades constellation. The star Maya passes throughthe Photon Band for about 2000 years and out of the band for about1,200 years. It's orbital path around Alcyone is shorter since it iscloser to Alcyone. Our Sun will enter the Photon Band in 1998 andbecome completely within the Band by 2002. As our Sun leaves theGalactic Night and enters the Band, the star Maya also enters thePhoton Band. These two stars are synchronized at this time. As thestar Maya returns to the Photon Band, the Mayan Beings of Light arereturning to Earth to assist us as the Grand Cycle comes tocompletion. Grand Events are about to occur and Ancient Wisdom isreturning to Earth. Know that you have all chosen to be here on Earthat this time to experience what will be...Time is not linear. We have been taught to think of Time as onlygoing forward, from one point to another. I think it is more accurateto think of Time as a spiral, as cycles. In an ancient time, ourMother Earth was pristine and all of her life forms lived in harmonyand honor. It is possible to heal the Earth and restore Her to herpristine state by merging the Ancient Times with the present. Toaccomplish this, we must first rid ourselves of the limitation ofbelieving that Time is linear. The Mayan and Dreamspell Calendars canassist us greatly in coming to a greater understanding of Time. It issomething that must be experienced. It is difficult to put into wordsbecause our language lacks the terms to express the nature of Time.We create our Reality. For whatever reason or purpose, the massconsciousness of humanity is embracing linear time and creating avery limited reality. As each of us shifts out of the massconsciousness, it helps to change the whole. Love and Honor yourMother Earth. Receive the Galactic Synchronization Beam from the Sun.Sing the song of your Soul. Listen to your Heart."www.web.axelero.hu/--------------------------------------------------------------------------------""We are living the times of the prophecies and now in anothercalendar of Ox Lahu Baktun. It also talks about the cycle of thegreat changes. In this cycle of the 5085 years in the Mayan calendarthere are still 15 more years to go before this calendar can becompleted. When this cycle is completed and another restoration ofthe planet will begin.The world once again has fallen into neglecting nature. The world hasbeen led by the materialistic ways, and humanity needs to transcendthis cycle and to live in a more subtle dimension. Right now only thespiritual people in this planet are living this process. Theindigenous groups of the planet are also living this process. But thegreat majority of humanity has no idea of these changes. Thesechanges can be very catastrophic. It is my goal that the differentindigenous and spiritual groups might come together as the newwarriors of the light. With their tools of love they bring themessage to humanity that their attitude needs to change. We needthese positive attitudes as far as the different indigenous andspiritual groups and their relationship with nature, with ourbrothers and sisters the trees, with our brothers and sisters theanimals, and with our Mother Earth.Even though we have neglected and abused Mother Earth, we have takenher skin off, we have contaminated her waters, we have contaminatedher wind, she is still serving us in a great way. Disobedientchildren we have been, yet she still loves us and nurtures us. Wemust understand that Grandfather Sun shines its light on us, nomatter what color or shape or size we are. We must see each otherwith this attitude in mind. If a great part of humanity begins tounderstand this process, not only on an intellectual level, but alsoat a level of living it, those drastic changes that those propheciestalk about might not be so drastic.Ancient sky watchers and wisdom keepers of the original traditions ofMother Earth remind us of our cosmic origins and how re-aligning withthe cosmos can give us essential energy needed to live togetherharmoniously and with honor for our Mother Earth. They teach thateverything that happens in the sky affects our perceptions and ourevolution. We are not separate from anything or anyone. It is clearthat these current times on Mother Earth are like no other. These arethe times in which all races, from all directions, must come togetherin harmony and unity."www.lightnews.org/--------------------------------------------------------------------------------"The earth will not be destroyed December 21st 2012. Mayan view thisdate as a rebirth - the start of the world of the fifth Sun.Going into the 5th dimension, it will be the start of a new era. Atsunrise Dec 21st 2012, Earth will be crossing the galactic equator,aligning itself with the center of the galaxy for the first time in26,000 years. This will make a cosmic cross. This cosmic cross isconsidered the tree of life. This will open a channel for universalenergy to flow through Earth, cleansing it and all who dwell upon it.Rising all to a higher level of vibration. This process has alreadybegun."Mayan Prophecies By ThunderBeat--------------------------------------------------------------------------------"Mayan ProphecyHunbatz Men tells of an ancient confederation of Native Americanelders made up of representatives from Nicaragua to the ArcticCircle. They have been meeting for thousands of years and continue todo so today. Before the Spaniards came the confederation decided tohide the Mayan teachings, entrusting certain families with theircare. Hunbatz Men is an inheritor of that lineage. In his bookSecrets of Mayan Science/ Religion, he reveals teachings that mirrorthe Hindu and Buddhist ones of astrology, meditation, and theseptenary root of creation.He speaks of Kukulcan and Quetzalcoatl, not so much in light of anexpected return, but rather in terms of the possibility that each ofus can attain the same exalted stage by treading the path ofattaining knowledge. "To be Quetzalcoatl or Kukulcan is to know theseven forces that govern our body - not only know them but also usethem and understand their intimate relationship with natural andcosmic laws. We must comprehend the long and short cycles and thesolar laws that sustain our lives. We must know how to die, and howto be born."Don Alejandro Oxlaj is a seventh generation priest from Guatemala andhead of the Quiche Maya Elder Council. He has traveled throughoutNorth America, comparing the native prophecies of different tribes.In the coming year he hopes to record and publish, for the first timein 500 years, the Mayan prophecies of his people. (SI Dec. 96, p.21)What is enlightening in all of these statements is their consistenttone of reconciliation. The native groups are opening their doors topeople of every color, speaking of themselves as Rainbow Warriors.Their elders have reminded them to "remember the originalinstructions" when each tribe was given by the creator a mandate tofollow. That mandate has told them that now is the time to heal thepast, despite the centuries of pain and persecution. Now is the timeto join together and work in harmony to rehabilitate the planet andestablish an era of alignment and peace."Ancient Prophecies For Modern TimesBette Stockbauer--------------------------------------------------------------------------------"Regardless of everything scientists have learned about the Maya sofar, we constantly encounter unanswered questions. NO ONE HASSATISFACTORILY EXPLAINED WHERE OR WHEN MAYA CIVILIZATION ORIGINATED,or how it evolved in an environment so hostile to human habitation.We have almost no reliable information on the origin of theircalendar, hieroglyphic writing, and mathematical system; nor do weunderstand countless details pertaining to sociopoliticalorganization, religion, economic structure, and everyday life. Eventhe shattering catastrophe leading to the sudden abandonment of theirgreatest cities during the ninth century A.D. -- one of the mostbaffling archaeological mysteries ever uncovered -- is still deeplyshrouded in conjecture."Author Charles Gallenkamp, Maya: The Riddle and Rediscovery of a LostCivilization,Viking Penguin Inc. P. 57.--------------------------------------------------------------------------------"In Mayan myth, the winter solstice sun corresponds to the deity OneHunahpu, also known as First Father. The Mayan Sacred Book, the PopolVuh, sets the stage so that the Hero Twins' father (One Hunahpu) canbe reborn, thus beginning a new World Age. The dark rift has manymythic identities: it is the Black Road; it is the xibalba be (theRoad to the Underworld); it is a crevice in the branches of thecosmic tree (the Milky Way); it is the mouth of the Cosmic Monster(often portrayed as a frog, jaguar or snake with tree-like features);it is the birth canal of the Cosmic Mother. Overall, the dark-rift isbest understood as the birth canal of the Cosmic Mother, who we maycall First Mother, to complement First Father. In this way we cantrace how these various metaphors are found in Mayan CreationMythology. The date of this alignment is, again, the end date of the13-baktun Great Cycle - a cycle of approximately 5125 years. Thissuggests that the ancient Maya were aware of the impending alignmentand considered it to be of such importance to be a major transitionpoint, the Creation of a new World Age. In mythological terms, thisevent is about the union of First Father with First Mother or, moreaccurately, the birth of First Father (the winter solstice sun - thenew World Age ruler) from First Mother (the dark-rift in the MilkyWay). The headline appropriate for the upcoming event is: "CosmicMother Gives Birth to The First God." (quote from John Major Jenkins -1994)"The Mayan Connectionhttp://www.adishakti.org/mayan_end_times_prophecy_12-21-2012.htm

galactic synchronization part 2

2009-07-11T13:32:00.000-07:00

"Just as air is the atmosphere of the body,so time is the atmosphere of the mind;if the time in which we live consists of uneven months and daysregulated bymechanized minutes and hours, that is what becomesof our mind: a mechanized irregularity.Since everything follows from mind, it is no wonder thatThe atmosphere in which we live daily becomes more pollute,And the greatest complaint is: 'I just don't have enough time!'Who owns your time, owns your mind.Own your own time and you will know your own mind."Jose and Lloydine ArguellesTime, 13-Moon Calendar and LiberationFOREWARD NOTE:According to Dr. José Argüelles, PhD.: "The simple and easiest way toreprogram your daily awareness of the actual nature of time is tofollow the 13 Moon Calendar.""From a whole system perspective, time, humanity, and nature areinseparable. Our physical and emotional bodies are moved by the samelunar, solar and planetary forces. Where we appear separate in space,we are unified in time.When we structure our lives by the artificial rhythm of the clock and12-month calendar, we expose our central nervous system, andsubsequently, our entire mental-emotional body to the frequency of amachine."Through understanding the nature of time and applying the dailyaffirmations of the 13-moon calendar, our mind is synchronized withthe Galactic Synchronization Beam from the G-force (Zero Point, Pointof Creation) of The Source which reorients our mind into the now.Since the erroneous artificial 12:60 (12 months 60 minutes) timingfrequency reorients our mind to the past and to the future and not inthe now, our body, mind, emotion and spirit are not in synch. Nowonder we have health and social problems.I believe that the artificial 12:60 timing frequency most of theworld population are using is the root cause of human problemsbecause the 12:60 timing frequency is for machines and not forgalactic interdimensional humans whose physical, mental and emotionalbodies are moved and sustained by the same lunar, solar and planetaryforces. I also believe that healing, ascension, telepathy andenlightenment are made possible when the 13-moon calendar and Rinrimeditation are applied daily with advanced techniques of meditationwhich synchronize our heart unified psychic centers' (chakras)vibratory frequency with the heart of the galactic core's 13:20timing frequency and the heart of Mother Earth's crystalline coreexpanding our psychic consciousness neutralizing the sense ofseparation caused by living 12:60 timing frequency. Thus, we becometrue Surfers of the Zuvuya, a cosmic wave of energy that both definesand connects us all, riding high on our personal resonant wave ofSource energy. (See Kin Days of the Tzolkin & the Sacred MayanTzolkin)"Greater than any gift is the gift of time".In Lak'ech (Mayan for "I am another yourself"),Ricardo B. Serrano, Yogi Sharanananda, White Overtone WindFounder of the Cosmic Heart Spiral of Love Shakti Yoga ofManifestationThe following excerpts from Jose and Lloydine Arguelles' ThirteenMoons in Motion: A Dreamspell Primer explain the nature of time andthe vehicle of liberation through the use of the 13-moon calendar.The 13-Moon calendar and the Nature of TimeWelcome to the fourth-dimension! You've been here all the time, butjust haven't known about it! Your ideas of time have been programmedby the clock and the 12-month calendar. The clock is actually third-dimensional measurements of space applied to the idea of time; whilethe 12-month Gregorian calendar is an illogical and inaccurate effortof keeping a count of days.If the nature of space is interlocking sets and levels of atomic andmolecular structures, the nature of time consists of interlockinglevels and sets of holon simultaneities.Just as the atom is the primal model and unit of space, so the holonis the primal model and unit of time. Space is the third dimension,time is the fourth.The base holon unit is the 'perfect fifth:' a tetrahedron (four-sidedpyramid) and its invisible center point, the g-force core. G-force isthe 'mysterious' fifth force; its core is always in the now. Theholon-tetrahedron forms the underlying structure of the 13-tonewavespell. The 13-tone wavespell is the living cosmology of thefourth-dimension.The four visible points of the holon-tetrahedron create the two gatesand two towers of the wavespell: the magnetic gate (tone 1), theovertone tower (tone 5), the solar tower (tone 9), and the cosmicgate (tone 13). The nine remaining tonal positions create thenine 'chambers of the wavespell'.The wavespell is the fourth-dimensional 'standard of measure.' Thewavespell may be expanded or decreased according to the law of kinequivalents.A kin is the fourth-dimensional 'unit of measure.' In the wavespelleach of the 13 tones is accorded the equivalent of one kin. Thewavespell can accomodate the count of 13 days, where one kin is oneyear, and so on.The 13-moon calendar is also a wavespell, where one kin equals a moonof 28 days. Each 28-day moon is a perfect set of four seven dayweeks. Each set of four weeks of the 13-moon calendar isan 'augmented harmonic.' The harmonic is a four-kin unit, thesmallest aggregate unit of the 260-kin galactic spin.The purpose of the 13-moon calendar is to synchronize the solar-lunaryear of 365 days -- 13 moons of 28 days each, 52 weeks of seven dayseach, plus green day [Day-Out-of-Time] -- with the galactic spin of260 kin (days). The 260 kin galactic spin is the ceaselesslyspiraling vortex of time that synchronizes with the 13-moon calendarprecisely every 52 years.Each galactic spin consists of 20 13-kin (day) wavespells. Thesewavespells are arranged in five sets of four. Each set of fourwavespells is color-coded: red, white, blue, and yellow.The 13-moon calendar is programmed so that the color-coded 13-daywavespells appear in unending sequence as an overlay on the fourseven-day weeks of each moon.The 13-Moon Calendar: A Vehicle of LiberationThe 13-Moon calendar is a special application of the 13-tonewavespell cosmology. The wavespell is the form-in-time of universallife. Universal life means that everything is alive. Since everythingtakes its form in time, time is life, time is biology, galacticbiology, cosmic biology. The wavespell is actually a fourth-dimensional form of life, and may assume the qualities of a livingbeing.As a living being, the wavespell of the 13-moon calendar is aplanetary vehicle of liberation and enlightenment. The 13-mooncalendar is a vehicle which has the power of automatically andsimultaneously entering every human on the planet into the new timeof galactic culture on Earth.The new time of the thirteen moons is the new path of life forcreating equality and non-aggression on planet Earth. Once enteredinto, the new time of the 13-moon calendar synchronizes all humanswith themselves and with the planet. Confusion will be eliminated,and forgiveness and liberation may be instantly granted. Thisliberation is the liberation from fear and ignorance. Why and How?The 13-moon calendar places everyone in the correct time: now. The 13-moon calendar is without a history. It does not drag a past forwardbut brings the galactic order into focus, in the now. Now is withouta history. The corrrect time is now, and the only enlightenment isnow. Any now can be as simple as a breath of air, or as complex andoverlaid as a profound meditative reflection.Now-centered and without a history, the wavespell of the 13-mooncalendar is a vehicle of salvation for all of humanity and theplanet.The 13-moon calendar is a skillful means provided by the GalacticFederation to enable every human to experience her or his ownenlightenment. By following the 13-moon calendar, the human entersthe perfect form of the annual planetary wavespell. The wavespell isthe living galactic unit of time. It is the cosmobiological indicatorof higher dimensional existence. It is the way lower dimensionalexistence evolves and awakens into its galactically enlightened form.As an annual planetary wavespell, the 13-moon calendar describes thegalactically attuned enlightenment body of planet Earth. This is whyit is a complete vehicle and path of liberation from the confusionand torment of not knowing in the now -- which is enlightenment. As adescription of the enlightenment body of the Earth-in-time, thecalendar of the 13-moon wavespell can bring all humans intoenlightenment in the course of eight solar-lunar years.For more info, please download in PDF format Thirteen Moons inMotion: A Dreamspell PrimerThe Galactic Federation Comes in Peace!One day Earth Wizard Workshop by Ricardo B. Serrano, R.Ac.Home Introduction Tools Links ContactUpdated by Ricardo B. Serrano, R.Ac. © May 28, 2003http://www.holisticwebs.com/earthwizard/now.html

Galactic Synchronization

2009-07-11T13:30:00.000-07:00

Galactic SynchronizationThe auric field of the Earth is composed of the morphogenic fieldof every species,as well as the etheric field. Humans can do so much more and regainso much moreif they would open themselves and feel. Those who are connected tothe Earth are connected to everything that is the Earth andeverything that affects the Earth.There are intergalactic spheres, other spheres, and humans are only asmall part, a partthat has played a large role. We are moving into our ascension. It isno longer a matterof individual ascension. Now is the time for all of us to connect tothe whole. Weare all a part of a great whole that must step forward to take itsplace again. Galactic Synchronization beam showing13- Baktun cycles as thirteen morphogentic sub-feildsBaktun of the Star Planting- 3113 BC to 2718 BCBaktun of the Pyramid - 2718 BC to 2124 BCBaktun of the Wheel- 2124 BC to 1930 BCBaktun of the Western Mountain 1930 BC to 1336 BCBaktun of the house of Shang 1336 BC to 1141 BCBaktun of the Imperial Seal 1146 BC to ..747 BCBaktun of the Mind Teachers 747 BC to 353 BCBaktun of the Anointed One 353 BC to ..41 ADBaktun of the Lords Of Red & Black 41 AD ..to...435ADBaktun of the Maya 435 AD to .830.ADBaktun of the Holy Wars 830AD to 1224 ADBaktun of the Hidden Seed 1224AD to 1618ADBaktun of the Transformation of Matter 1618AD to 2012ADAD2013 onwards Galactic Synchronization. New Harmonic Field beyondDualityThe Need for Personal Change. If we are the Earth, if we are theForce, it follows that when Earth goes through changes when themagnetics of the Earth change, or if we have a polar reversal ourbodies are going to change, as well.These changes have a direct effect upon our perceptions of space andtime, upon our relationships, our careers, our sleep patterns, andhow we view ourselves in relation to one another. All of those thingsare affected by changes in the Earth. Each of us is experiencing, atleast to some degree, changes in our personal lives, that arereflecting the kinds of changes that are going on in the Earth atlarge.In the language of the ancients and our highest spiritual traditions,faith moves us intoa "space," where we can affect the forces of Nature around us andbring about the kinds of changes in our world that we call miracles.Western science says, coherent human emotion produces a chemicalchange in our bodies, and that chemical change has quantum effectsthat extend beyond our bodies and bring about changes in our physicalworld.When thought, feeling, and emotion become one in other words, whentheyare all aligned then we say to the mountain, "Move!" and the mountainmoves.http://www.crystallotus.com/TheYear2008/03.htm

CREE PROPHECY

2009-07-11T13:28:00.000-07:00

CREE PROPHECYWarriors of the RainbowLast century an old wise woman of the Cree Indian nation, named "Eyesof Fire", had a vision of the future. She prophesied that one day,because of the white mans' or Yo-ne-gis' greed, there would come atime, when the earth being ravaged and polluted, the forests beingdestroyed, the birds would fall from the air, the waters would beblackened, the fish being poisoned in the streams, and the treeswould no longer be, mankind as we would know it would all but ceaseto exist. There would come a time when the "keepers of the legend,stories, culture rituals, and myths, and all the Ancient TribalCustoms" would be needed to restore us to health, making the earthgreen again. They would be mankind's key to survival, they werethe "Warriors of the Rainbow". There would come a day of awakeningwhen all the peoples of all the tribes would form a New World ofJustice, Peace, Freedom and recognition of the Great Spirit.The "Warriors of the Rainbow" would spread these messages and teachall peoples of the Earth or "Elohi". They would teach them how tolive the "Way of the Great Spirit". They would tell them of how theworld today has turned away from the Great Spirit and that is why ourEarth is "Sick".The "Warriors of the Rainbow" would show the peoples thatthis "Ancient Being" (the Great Spirit), is full of love andunderstanding, and teach them how to make the "Earth or Elohi"beautiful again. These Warriors would give the people principles orrules to follow to make their path light with the world. Theseprinciples would be those of the Ancient Tribes. The Warriors of theRainbow would teach the people of the ancient practices of Unity,Love and Understanding. They would teach of Harmony among people inall four corners of the Earth.Like the Ancient Tribes, they would teach the peoples how to pray tothe Great Spirit with love that flows like the beautiful mountainstream, and flows along the path to the ocean of life. Once again,they would be able to feel joy in solitude and in councils. Theywould be free of petty jealousies and love all mankind as theirbrothers, regardless of color, race or religion. They would feelhappiness enter their hearts, and become as one with the entire humanrace. Their hearts would be pure and radiate warmth, understandingand respect for all mankind, Nature and the Great Spirit.They would once again fill their minds, hearts, souls, and deeds withthe purest of thoughts. They would seek the beauty of the Master ofLife - the Great Spirit! They would find strength and beauty inprayer and the solitude of life.Their children would once again be able to run free and enjoy thetreasures of Nature and Mother Earth. Free from the fears of toxinsand destruction, wrought by the Yo-ne-gi and his practices of greed.The rivers would again run clear, the forests be abundant andbeautiful, the animals and birds would be replenished. The powers ofthe plants and animals would again be respected and conservation ofall that is beautiful would become a way of life.The poor, sick and needy would be cared for by their brothers andsisters of the Earth. These practices would again become a part oftheir daily lives.The leaders of the people would be chosen in the old way - not bytheir political party, or who could speak the loudest, boast themost, or by name calling or mud slinging, but by those whose actionsspoke the loudest. Those who demonstrated their love, wisdom andcourage and those who showed that they could and did work for thegood of all, would be chosen as the leaders or Chiefs. They would bechosen by their "quality" and not the amount of money they hadobtained. Like the thoughtful and devoted "Ancient Chiefs", theywould understand the people with love, and see that their young wereeducated with the love and wisdom of their surroundings. They wouldshow them that miracles can be accomplished to heal this world of itsills, and restore it to health and beauty.The tasks of these "Warriors of the Rainbow" are many and great.There will be terrifying mountains of ignorance to conquer and theyshall find prejudice and hatred. They must be dedicated, unwaveringin their strength, and strong of heart. They will find willinghearts and minds that will follow them on this road ofreturning "Mother Earth" to beauty and plenty - once more.The day will come, it is not far away.The day that we shall see how we owe our very existence to the peopleof all tribes that have maintained their culture and heritage. Thosethat have kept the rituals, stories, legends and myths alive. It willbe with this knowledge, the knowledge that they have preserved, thatwe shall once again return to "harmony" with Nature, Mother Earth andmankind. It will be with this knowledge that we shall find our "Keyto our Survival".

Lelanie Fuller Stone "The Cherokee Lady" prophecies that speack of the Rainbow Tribe Gather

2009-07-11T13:27:00.000-07:00

Lelanie Fuller Stone "The Cherokee Lady"When the nine Major Faiths come together,there will be Peace in the World!OTHER PROPHECIES THAT SPEAK OF THE RAINBOW TRIBE GATHERINGBuddhist prophecy;"From the wars faith will be lost, they shall forget the meaning ofthe word teacher. But just then the Teachers will appear and incorners of the world shall be heard the true teachings. To the wordsof truth the people will be drawn, but those who are filled withdarknes & ignorance shall set obsticales. As a diamond shines light,the Enlightened One's teachings will return from many warriors oftruth.""The Banner of Shambala shall encircle the central lands of theEnlightened One. Those who accept shall rejoice, and those who denyshall tremble.-- The denier shall be given over to justice and shallbe forgotten. And the warriors shall march under the banner ofMaitreya (the Buddha who returns as the World Uniter). From the west,from the mountains, shall come my people. Who shall receive andsafeguard them? Thou?"Prophetic visions of many diferent faiths harmonize in thereforetelling of the teachers who will come bringing great light of anew Revelation of Faith/God/Spirit/LOVE.*Old Testament-Ezekiel (43:2) "the Glory of God came from the way ofthe east, and the earth shone with glory."*New Testament-Mattew 24:27 "For as the lightning comes from the eastand shines as far as the west, so will be the coming of the Son ofMan."*Native American, Black Elk saw a light coming from the east and wastold the wisdom would come from that direction . He saw THE peopletake the road of goodness & peace, the red road that runs north tosouth and the ancesters would now walk with them.*The vision of Djojobojo, Javanese King, promised the coming of lightfrom the east (towards the Holy Land) that would unite all religions,all races & social groups, bringing thousands of years of peace.*In the Doctrines & Covenants 43:22 Joseph Smith, the Mormon prophet,explains that the new Message from God will come as "when thelightnings shall streak forth from the east unto the west,-."*Quetzalcoatl, king of the Toltecs, said the return of the spiritthat spoke through him would be from the east.*Hopi chiefs were told that the light would bring this reawakeningwould come from the east. He would wear a red cloak or red hat.(Tibetan Llama?)

Rainbow Prophecies

2009-07-11T13:24:00.000-07:00

Rainbow PropheciesPeople Everywhere Are Created Equal!As prophecized the rainbow light warriors will unite, bringing love,healing and harmony to the world, but it starts within the heart,here and NOW!It takes ALL colors to make a rainbow!Warriors of the RainbowThere was an old lady, from the "Cree" tribe, named "Eyes of Fire",who prophesied that one day, because of the white mans' or Yo-ne-gis'greed, there would come a time, when the fish would die in thestreams, the birds would fall from the air, the waters would beblackened, and the trees would no longer be, mankind as we would knowit would all but cease to exist.There would come a time when the "keepers of the legend, stories,culture rituals, and myths, and all the Ancient Tribal Customs" wouldbe needed to restore us to health. They would be mankinds' key tosurvival, they were the "Warriors of the Rainbow". There would come aday of awakening when all the peoples of all the tribes would form aNew World of Justice, Peace, Freedom and recognition of the GreatSpirit.The "Warriors of the Rainbow" would spread these messages and teachall peoples of the Earth or "Elohi". They would teach them how tolive the "Way of the Great Spirit". They would tell them of how theworld today has turned away from the Great Spirit and that is why ourEarth is "Sick".The "Warriors of the Rainbow" would show the peoples thatthis "Ancient Being" (the Great Spirit), is full of love andunderstanding, and teach them how to make the "Earth or Elohi"beautiful again. These Warriors would give the people principles orrules to follow to make their path right with the world. Theseprinciples would be those of the Ancient Tribes. The Warriors of theRainbow would teach the people of the ancient practices of Unity,Love and Understanding. They would teach of Harmony among people inall four comers of the Earth.Like the Ancient Tribes, they would teach the peoples how to pray tothe Great Spirit with love that flows like the beautiful mountainstream, and flows along the path to the ocean of life. Once again,they would be able to feel joy in solitude and in councils. Theywould be free of petty jealousies and love all mankind as theirbrothers, regardless of color, race or religion. They would feelhappiness enter their hearts, and become as one with the entire humanrace. Their hearts would be pure and radiate warmth, understandingand respect for all mankind, Nature, and the Great Spirit. They wouldonce again fill their minds, hearts, souls, and deeds with the purestof thoughts. They would seek the beauty of the Master of Life - theGreat Spirit! They would find strength and beauty in prayer and thesolitudes of life.Their children would once again be able to run free and enjoy thetreasures of Nature and Mother Earth. Free from the fears of toxinsand destruction, wrought by the Yo-ne-gi and his practices of greed.The rivers would again run clear, the forests be abundant andbeautiful, the animals and birds would be replenished. The powers ofthe plants and animals would again be respected and conservation ofall that is beautiful would become a way of life.The poor, sick and needy would be cared for by their brothers andsisters of the Earth. These practices would again become a part oftheir daily lives.The leaders of the people would be chosen in the old way - not bytheir political party, or who could speak the loudest, boast themost, or by name calling or mud slinging, but by those whose actionsspoke the loudest. Those who demonstrated their love, wisdom, andcourage and those who showed that they could and did work for thegood of all, would be chosen as the leaders or Chiefs. They would bechosen by their "quality" and not the amount of money they hadobtained. Like the thoughtful and devoted "Ancient Chiefs", theywould understand the people with love, and see that their young wereeducated with the love and wisdom of their surroundings. They wouldshow them that miracles can be accomplished to heal this world of itsills, and restore it to health and beauty.The tasks of these "Warriors of the Rainbow" are many and great.There will be terrifying mountains of ignorance to conquer and theyshall find prejudice and hatred. They must be dedicated, unwaveringin their strength, and strong of heart. They will find willing heartsand minds that will follow them on this road of returning "MotherEarth" to beauty and plenty - once more.The day will come, it is not far away. The day that we shall see howwe owe our very existence to the people of all tribes that havemaintained their culture and heritage. Those that have kept therituals, stories, legends, and myths alive. It will be with thisknowledge, the knowledge that they have preserved, that we shall onceagain return to "harmony" with Nature, Mother Earth, and mankind. Itwill be with this knowledge that we shall find our "Key to ourSurvival".This is the story of the "Warriors of the Rainbow" and this is myreason for protecting the culture, heritage, and knowledge of myancestors. I know that the day "Eyes of Fire" spoke of - will come! Iwant my children and grandchildren to be prepared to accept thistask.The task of being one of the........"Warriors of the Rainbow".This version comes to us from Lelanie Fuller Stone "The CherokeeLady", who has published several books on Indian Herbal Medicine.This version she says was told to her as a young girl by hereGrandmother.

Albert Einstein prophecy

2009-07-11T13:23:00.000-07:00

Vanishing Bee Colonies, Doomsday Scenarios and SunspotsAlbert Einstein once said : "If the bee disappeared off the surfaceof the globe then man would only have four years of life left. Nomore bees, no more pollination, no more plants, no more animals, nomore man."Apocalyptic for sure. We haven't reached that point yet, but someworrisome indicators suggest dramatic drops in the bee population ofthe US are likely to impact crop production. This is not a smallagricultural sector that is being impacted either. In the US beespollinate more than $14 billion worth of seeds and crops each year.The disappearing bee phenomena isn't restricted to the US. In Europecountries are experiencing varying degrees of what investigatorsdescribe as "colony collapse disorder" (or CCD). Countries effectedinclude Germany, Switzerland, Spain, Portugal, Italy and Greece.However the most serious losses have occurred in the US. On the WestCoast keepers have seen bee population losses in the 30 to 60 percentrange. On the East Coast and Texas it gets as high as 70%. These arecatastrophic drops for an industry that considers around a 20%population decline to be an off-season norm.There are a number of different theories about why this is happening.After looking at a cross-section of scientific opinion I tend towardthe view that the decline in the bee population is being triggered bya variety of factors, rather than a single overriding cause.There is evidence that the immune system of bees has been adverselyeffected by modern agricultural practices. These range from use ofinsecticides to the controlled raising of bees in order to have anarmy of pollinators ready to service crops on schedule. Someresearchers take the view that genetically modified crops are acontributing factor in bee population decline. Stress figures into ittoo, given that increased pressure is being placed on colonies astheir habitat is squeezed each year due to urban development.Parasites are also an issue. The varroa mite introduced from Asia hasproved to be problematic.The decline in the health of the colonies can be demonstrated byresearch data. You know the problem has reached crisis levels when aguy like Dennis van Englesdorp with the Pennsylvania Department ofAgriculture uses an Aids analogy in an attempt to underscore theseriousness of the threat to bee populations.Researchers have discovered multiple infections co-existing in somecolonies, many of which were also infected with fungi, an indicatorthat the bees' immune systems were seriously compromised. Thiscompromised immune function may be related to genetically modifiedcrops and scientists are currently working to try to determine anypossible links. When you look at the stats though, on the surfacethere does seem to be a generalized cause and effect pattern. In theUS, which has experienced the most severe bee losses, 40% of the cornis now a GM insect-resistant strain. By contrast in Germany we areonly talking about 0.06%, mostly grown in the Mecklenburg-WesternPomerania and Brandenburg regions.A number of earlier studies investigated whether or not GM crops werehaving a negative impact on bees. One such study took place at theUniversity of Jenna from 2001 to 2004. The researchers used a GMmaize variant named "BT corn" that includes a gene from a soilbacterium in order to make it insect-proof. At first the study seemedentirely positive. No discernible negative effects were detected inthe bees from the BT corn. Then researchers discovered that when thebees were attacked by a parasite, the portion of the colony exposedto the BT corn had a much lower ability to fight off infection andshowed much more rapid levels of decline.There is a second set of factors though that raises concerns aboutquantum-mechanical effects related to magnetic fields andelectromagnetic waves. The majority of losses have been occurring asa result of bees being unable to navigate back to their hives. Beeshave been expiring singly, in a seemingly disoriented state far fromthe hive and this can't simply be attributed to immune system issues.There are two possible causes. One being our high-tech gadgetry,particularly mobile phone technology. The other cause odd though itmay seem, relates to so-called "sunspots" - the effect of solaractivity.At first glance it seems a bit far-fetched to make a connectionbetween the life of bees and mobile phones. However research suggeststhere may indeed be something to this theory. German research hasdetermined that bees showed a marked change of behavior when in thevicinity of power lines, and a study conducted at Landau Universityfound that bees avoided returning to the hive when mobile phones wereplaced nearby.A study by the mathematician Barbara Shipman, provides one of themore fascinating … one might even say `esoteric' theories. A criticalaspect of bee activity hinges obviously upon finding pollen sourcesand returning to the hive. According to Ms Shipman this routine isfacilitated by the dance the bees perform. She indicates that thedance is influenced by factors such as the polarization of the lightof the sun and variations in the earth's magnetic field.She goes further though and suggests bees are capable of identifyingquarks. I think it's a leap to suggest that bees can `perceive' thequantum field or even use it as a type of frame of reference. Myhunch is that their activity is pretty much instinctual, based upontheir highly specialized circuitry. Questions about whether or notthey can perceive quarks seems almost a moot point, especially sincethere is no way of proving it.Where the sunspot theory does hold up is that bees appear to be verysensitive to energy fluctuations. One study exposed a colony tobursts from a high-intensity magnetic field and concluded that thebees' reactions revealed a high sensitivity to nuclear magneticresonance, or NMR. This occurs when an electromagnetic wave altersthe orientation of the nuclei of atoms.Some scientists take the view that the next solar maximum may be oneof the most intense ever. Mausumi Dikpati, an astronomer with theNational Center for Atmospheric Research predicts a solar maximum for2012, a phenomena that last occurred in 1958. The sunspot generatesintense magnetism that can be felt on the earth. Dikpati evenbelieves that it is possible electronics will be effected, forexample GPS and mobile phone technology. Since solar cycle 24 beganin 2007 according to Mausumi's estimate, it's possible that thebehavior of bees is already being effected to some degree.The dramatic declines in the bee population appear to be due to acombination of factors. Insecticides, crop engineering, shrinkinghabitats and parasites have impacted the overall health and immunesystem of bees. The other factor contributing to bee decline relatesmost probably to side-effects of technology and solar activity.

Inca Prophecy

2009-07-11T13:20:00.000-07:00

Inca Prophecy are all witnessing many events which have been prophesied and arecoming to fruition in our time. There is one ancient Inca prophecywhich proclaims: "When the Eagle of the North flies with the Condorof the South, The Spirit of the Land, She will Reawaken" .As the story line in James Redfield's book, 'The Celestine Prophecy'describes, an ancient manuscript was discovered in the rain forestsof Peru. Although this book is described as an "adventure-tale" of aman's journey to discover this manuscript, the insights contained inthe book reveal a truth which goes well beyond an "adventure story"to a formula for living. The first insight is to "become conscious ofthe so-called coincidences in our lives" and to "understand thatchance encounters have deeper meaning".A series of profound coincidences began five years ago when I wasliving in my native Brazil. Many events took place in my life and Iconsciously understood the message that I should be in Machu Picchu,Peru, where my life would completely change. I journeyed to Peru witha spiritual group conducted by my Brazilian friend, psychologist,psychic, and channel, Luiz A. Gasparetto, at whose family's spiritualcenter I had studied metaphysics for fourteen years. (ShirleyMcClaine wrote about her experience with Luiz Gasparetto in herbook " Going Within" and, in fact, devoted an entire chapter to him).There, I was introduced to a light being, through Gasparetto, namedChuma, on my first visit to Machu Picchu. This experience completelytransformed my life. Chuma was a High Priestess of Machu Picchu in apast life. She gave our group of fifty people many material proofs ofher presence and the presence of other spiritual entities who live inMachu Picchu. Chuma said to us that the truth about Machu Picchu isthat it was a "university" at which special young studentscultivated, improved, and refined their knowledge of a spiritualscience. She also said that when humanity is prepared, a record bookwill be found which will reveal all of the secrets of the past,present, and future. When I read "The Celestine Prophecy," I feltthat the information, at least on a sub-conscious level, must havesome connection with this record book.After my first encounter with Chuma, I received a message to organizemetaphysical groups to offer the opportunity to others who dream ofvisiting Peru, to help them realize this dream, and enjoy their ownexperience. It was so strong and my heart was so open that I acceptedthe challenge and began offering metaphysical journeys to my nativeBrazilians to the sacred land of Peru.But the coincidences don't stop there. Three years ago I met myhusband in Brazil who is an American who was visiting my country. Wewere married one year later and I moved with him to the UnitedStates. A whole new world opened up to me and something reallyinteresting happened after my first arrival in the US. Chuma came tome and asked me to unify Brazilians and Americans in my journeys tothe Andes. At the beginning, I admit that I was really scared becausemy English was very poor and I had no experience with the NorthAmerican culture. But learning to trust my guide, once again, I didit!In 1992, I prepared my first Brazilian/American group to Peru. It wassuch a profound experience for me and everyone in the group that I amsure the experience will remain in our lives forever.Most of the time, the entity Chuma, who is my constant guide, doesnot give me too much information as to why I should do certain thingsin my work. Even though I did follow her direction and put together agroup of Brazilians and Americans, I did not know exactly why.Between this first combined group in July of 1992 and my last group,which took place in July of 1994, I went to conduct a group to theSouthwest areas of North America. In Santa Fe, I was given an articlewritten by a Peruvian spiritual messenger named Willaru Huayta, whohad visited North America a few months prior to my being there. Whenreading an interview with Willaru published in the book, "Profiles inWisdom" by Steve McFadden, I went into a state of completeunderstanding of Chuma's guidance. An excerpt from his article statesas follows:"We have been waiting five hundred years. The Inca prophecies saythat now, in this age, when the eagle of the North and the condor ofthe South fly together, the Earth will awaken. The eagles of theNorth cannot be free without the condors of the South. Now it'shappening. Now is the time. The Aquarian Age is an era of light, anage of awakening, an age of returning to natural ways. Our generationis here to help begin this age, to prepare through different schoolsto understand the message of the heart, intuition, and nature. Nativepeople speak with the Earth. When consciousness awakens, we can flyhigh like the eagle, or like the condor... Ultimately, you know, weare all native, because the word native comes from nature, and we areall parts of Mother nature. She is inside us, and we are inside her.We depend totally on the Earth, the Sun, and the Water. We belong tothe evolution of nature in our physical bodies. But we also have aspiritual body that comes from the Sun, not the Sun you can see withtwo eyes, but another Sun that lies in another dimension, a goldenSun burning with the fire of spiritual light. The inner light ofhumans emanates from this spiritual source. We came to Earth fromthis Sun to have experiences on Earth, and eventually we will returnto this Sun. We are children of the Sun."Today I know that the peoples of South America represent the condor,and that all the people of North America carry the eagle inside. Ifeel honored to be just one to open my heart and break the wallbetween North and South America.When we journey together in this sacred land and live through such aprofound experience, we will carry in our hearts forever the best ofour cultures which we shared, and this to me is how we can help toawaken Mother Earth and with our new awareness, become a brotherhoodand planetary citizens.

Seven Fires of the Anisinabe predictions

2009-07-11T13:19:00.000-07:00

The Seven Fires of the AnisinabeSeven prophets came to Anishinabe at a time when the people wereliving a full and peaceful life on the Northeastern coast of NorthAmerica. These prophets left the people with seven predictions ofwhat the future would bring. Each of the prophecies was called a fireand each fire referred to a particular era of time that would come inthe future. Thus, the teachings of the seven prophets are now calledthe Seven Fires.The first prophet said to the people, "In the time of the First Fire,the Anishinabe nation will rise up and follow the sacred shell of theMidewiwin Lodge. The Midewiwin Lodge will serve as a rallying pointfor the people and its traditional ways will be the source of muchstrength. The Sacred Megis will lead the way to the chosen ground ofthe Anishinabe.You are to look for a turtle-shaped island that is linked to thepurification of the earth. You will find such an island at thebeginning and at the end of your journey. There will be sevenstopping places along the way. You will know the chosen ground hasbeen reached when you come to a land where food grows on water. Ifyou do not move you will be destroyed."The second prophet told the people, "You will know the Second Firebecause at this time the nation will be camped by a large body ofwater. In this time the direction of the Sacred Shell will be lost.The Midewiwin will diminish in strength, a boy will be born to pointthe way back to the traditional ways. He will show the direction tothe stepping stones to the future of the Anishinabe people."The third prophet said to the people, "In the Third Fire, theAnishinabe will find the path to their chosen ground, a land in thewest to which they must move their families. This will be the landwhere food grows on water."The Fourth Fire was originally given to the people by two prophets.They come as one. They told of the coming of the Light Skinned race.One of the prophets said, "You will know the future of our people bythe face the Light Skinned race wears. If they come wearing the faceof brotherhood then there will come a time of wonderful change forgenerations to come.They will bring new knowledge and articles that can be joined withthe knowledge of this country, in this way, two nations will join tomake a mighty nation. This new nation will be joined by two more sothat four will form the mightiest nation of all. You will know theface of the brotherhood if the light skinned race comes carrying noweapons. If they come bearing only their knowledge and a hand shake."The other prophet said, "Beware if the Light Skinned race comeswearing the face of death. You must be careful because the face ofbrotherhood and the face of death look very much alike. If they comecarrying a weapon, beware. If they come in suffering, they could foolyou. Their hearts may be filled with greed for the riches of thisland. If they are indeed your brothers, let them prove it. Do notaccept them in total trust. You shall know that the face they wear isone of death if the rivers run with poison and the fish become unfitto eat. You shall know them by these many things."The fifth Prophet said, "In the time of the Fifth Fire there willcome a time of great struggle that will grip the lives of all Nativepeople. At the warning of this Fire there will come among the peopleone who holds a promise of great joy and salvation. If the peopleaccept this promise of a new way and abandon the old teachings, thenthe struggle of the Fifth Fire will be with the people for manygenerations. The promise that comes will prove to be a false promise.All those who accept this promise will cause the near destruction ofthe people."The prophet of the Sixth Fire said, "In the time of the Sixth Fire itwill be evident that the promise of the Fifth Fire came in a falseway. Those deceived by this promise will take their children awayfrom the teachings of the Elders; grandsons and granddaughters willturn against the Elders. In this way, the Elders will lose theirreason for living; they will lose their purpose in life. At this timea new sickness will come among the people. The balance of many peoplewill be disturbed. The cup of life will almost be spilled. The cup oflife will almost become the cup of grief."At the time of these predictions, many people scoffed at theprophets. They then had medicines to keep away sickness. They werethen healthy and happy as a people. These were the people who choseto stay behind in the great migration of the Anishinabe. These peoplewere the first to have contact with the Light Skinned race.They would suffer the most. When the Fifth Fire came to pass, a greatstruggle did indeed grip the lives of all Native people. The LightSkinned race launched a military attack on the Indian people through-out the country aimed at taking away their land and theirindependence as a free and sovereign people. It is now felt that thefalse promise that came at the end of the Fifth Fire was thematerials and riches embodied in the way of life of the light skinnedrace.Those who abandoned the ancient ways and accepted this new promisewere a big factor in causing the near destruction of the Nativepeople of this land. When the Sixth Fire came to be, the words of theprophet rang true as the children were taken away from the teachingsof the Elders. The boarding school era of "civilizing" Indianchildren had begun. The Indian language and religion were taken fromthe children. The people started dying at an early age... they hadlost their will to live and their purpose in living.In the confusing times of the Sixth Fire, it is said that a group ofvisionaries came among the Anishinabe. They gathered all the priestsof the Midewiwin Lodge. They told the priests that the Midewiwin Waywas in danger of being destroyed. They gathered all the sacredbundles. They gathered all the scrolls that recorded the ceremonies.All these things were placed in a hollowed out log from the ironwoodtree. Men were lowered over a cliff by long ropes.They dug a hole in the cliff and buried the log where no one couldfind it. Thus the teachings of the Elders were hidden out of sightbut not out of memory. It was said that when the time came that theIndian people could practice their religion without fear that alittle boy would dream where the Ironwood log, full of the SacredBundles and Scrolls were buried. He would lead his people to theplace.The Seventh Prophet that came to the people long ago was said to bedifferent from the other prophets. He was young and had a strangelight in his eyes. He said, "In the time of the Seventh Fire, NewPeople will emerge. They will retrace their steps to find what wasleft by the trail. Their steps will take them to the Elders who theywill ask to guide them on their journey. But many of the Elders willhave fallen asleep. They will awaken to this new time with nothing tooffer. Some of the Elders will be silent out of fear. Some of theElders will be silent because no one will ask anything of them.The New People will have to be careful in how they approach theElders. The task of the New People will not be easy. If the NewPeople will remain strong in their Quest, the Water Drum of theMidewiwin Lodge will again sound its voice. There will be a Rebirthof the Anishinabe Nation and a rekindling of old flames. The SacredFire will again be lit. It is at this time that the Light Skinnedrace will be given a choice between two roads. If they choose theright road, then the Seventh Fire will light the Eighth and finalFire, an eternal Fire of peace, love, brotherhood and sisterhood. Ifthe light skinned race makes the wrong choice of roads, thedestruction which they brought with them in coming to this countrywill come back at them and cause much suffering and death to all theEarth's people.Traditional Midewiwin people from other Nations have interpreted thetwo roads that face the Light Skinned race as the road to technologyand the other to spiritualism. They feel that the road to technologyrepresents a continuation of Head-Long rush to technologicaldevelopment.This is the road that has lead to modern society, to a damaged andseared Earth. Could it be that the road to technology represents arush to destruction? The road to Spirituality represents the slowerpath that traditional Native People have traveled and are now seekingagain.The Earth is not scorched on this trail. The grass is still growingthere. The prophet of the Fourth Fire spoke of a time when "twoNations will join to make a Mighty Nation."He was speaking of the coming of the Light Skinned race and the faceof brotherhood that the Light Skinned Brother could be wearing. It isobvious from the history of this country that this was not the faceworn by the Light Skinned race as a whole - that the Mighty Nationspoken of in the Fourth Fire has never been formed.

Deganawidah: The Two Serpents Prophecies

2009-07-11T13:17:00.000-07:00

Deganawidah: The Two SerpentsAmerican Prophecies by Scott PetersonWhen Deganawidah was leaving the Indians in the Bay of Quinte inOntario, he told the Indian people that they would face a time ofgreat suffering. They would distrust their leaders and the principlesof peace of the League, and a great white serpent was to come uponthe Iroquois, and that for a time it would intermingle with theIndian serpent as a friend.This serpent would in time become so powerful that it would attemptto destroy the Indian, and the serpent is described as choking thelife's blood out of the Indian people. Deganawidah told the Indiansthat they would be in such a terrible state at this point that allhope would seem to be lost, and he told them that when things lookedtheir darkest a red serpent would come from the north and approachthe white serpent, which would be terrified, and upon seeing the redserpent he would release the Indian, who would fall to the groundalmost like a helpless child, and the white serpent would turn allits attention to the red serpent. The bewilderment would cause thewhite serpent to accept the red one momentarily.The white serpent would be stunned and take part of the red serpentand accept him. Then there is a heated argument and a fight. And thenthe Indian revives and crawls toward the land of the hilly country,and then he would assemble his people together, and they would renewtheir faith and the principles of peace that Deganawidah hadestablished.There would at the same time exist among the Indians a great love andforgiveness for his brother, and in this gathering would come streamsfrom all over -- not only the Iroquois but from all over -- and theywould gather in this hilly country, and they would renew theirfriendship. And Deganawidah said they would remain neutral in thisfight between the white and red serpents.At the time they were watching the two serpents licked in thisbattle, a great message would come to them, which would make themever so humble, and when they become that humble, they will bewaiting for a young leader, an Indian boy, possibly in his teens, whowould be a choice seer. Nobody knows who he is or where he comesfrom, but he will be given great power, and would be heard bythousands, and he would give them the guidance and the hope torefrain from going back to their land and he would be the acceptedleader.And Deganawidah said that they will gather in the land of the hillycountry, beneath the branches of an elm tree, and they should burntobacco and call upon Deganawidah by name when facing the darkesthours, and he will return. Deganawidah said that as the choice seerspeaks to the Indians that number as the blades of grass, and hewould be heard by all at the same time, and as the Indians aregathered watching the fight, they notice from the south a blackserpent coming from the sea, and he is described as dripping withsalt water, and as he stands there, he rests for a spell to get hisbreath, all the time watching to the north to the land where thewhite and red serpents are fighting.Deganawidah said that the battle between the white and the redserpents opened very slowly but would then become so violent that themountains would crack and the rivers would boil and the fish wouldturn up on their bellies. He said that there would be no leaves onthe trees in that area.There would be no grass, and that strange bugs and beetles wouldcrawl from the ground and attack both serpents, and he said that agreat heat would cause the stench of death to sicken both serpents.And then, as the boy seer is watching this fight, the red serpentreaches around the back of the white serpent and pulls from him ahair which is carried toward the south by a great wind into thewaiting hands of the black serpent, and as the black serpent studiesthis hair, it suddenly turns into a woman, a white woman who tellshim things that he knows to be true but he wants to hear them again.When this white woman finishes telling these things, he takes her andgently places her on a rock with great love and respect, and then hebecomes infuriated at what he has heard, so he makes a beeline forthe north, and he enters the battle between the red and whiteserpents with such speed and anger that he defeats the two serpents,who have already been battle weary.When he finishes, he stand on the chest of the white serpent, and heboasts and puts his chest out like he¹s the conqueror, and he looksfor another serpent to conquer.He looks to the land of the hilly country and then sees the Indianstanding with his arms folded and looking ever so noble that he knowsthat this Indian is not the one to fight.The next direction that he will face will be eastward and at thattime he will be momentarily blinded by a light that is many timesbrighter than the sun.The light will be coming from the east to the west over the water,and when the black serpent regains his sight, he becomes terrifiedand makes a beeline for the sea.He dips into the sea and swims away in a southerly direction, andshall never again be seen by the Indians.The white serpent revives, and he too sees the light, and he makes afeeble attempt to gather himself and go toward that light.A portion of the white serpent refuses to remain but instead makesits way toward the land of the hilly country, and there he will jointhe Indian People with a great love like that of a lost brother.The rest of the white serpent would go to the sea and dip into thesea and would be lost out of sight for a spell. Then suddenly thewhite serpent would appear again on the top of the water and he wouldbe slowly swimming toward the light. Deganawidah said that the whiteserpent would never again be troublesome to the Indian People.The red serpent would revive and he would shiver with great fear whenhe sees that light. He would crawl to the north and leave a bloody,shaky trail northward, and he would never be seen again by theIndians. Deganawidah said as this light approaches that he would bethat light, and he would return to his Indian People, and when hereturns, the Indian People would be a greater nation than they hadever been before.

Mohawk Prophecy of the Seventh Generation

2009-07-11T13:16:00.000-07:00

Mohawk Prophecy of the Seventh GenerationAccording to the prophecy of the Seventh Generation, sevengenerations after contact with the Europeans the Onkwehonwe would seethe day when the elm trees would die. The prophecy said that strangeanimals would be born deformed and without the proper limbs. Hugestone monsters would tear open the face of the earth. The riverswould burn. The air would burn the eyes of man. According to theprophecy of the Seventh Generation the Onkwehonwe would see the timewhen the birds would fall from the sky. The fish would die in thewater. And man would grow ashamed of the way that he had treated hisMother and Provider, the Earth.Finally, according to this prophecy, after seven generations ofliving in close contact with the Europeans, the Onkwehonwe would riseup and demand that their rights and stewardship over the Earth berespected and restored.According to the wisdom of this prophecy, men and women would one dayturn to the Onkwehonwe for both guidance and direction. It is up tothe present generation of youth of the Kanienkehaka to provideleadership and example to all who have failed. The children of theKanienkehaka are the seventh generation.________________________________________

Cherokee Prophecies

2009-07-11T13:14:00.000-07:00

Cherokee PropheciesCherokee Star Constellation - Prophecy of the RattlesnakeThe Stars above and its configurations hold TIME UNTIME within itsgrasp upon all life. As all cultures sustain a Zodiac system writtenupon Time Untime so also the Chickamaugan Cherokee of the Americashold also an Ancient Zodiac of the heavens.Within the Zodiac of the Heavens of the Chickamauga Cherokee areetched Ancient designs written upon and within the lines of seeing.The Cherokee Zodiac is alive and moves and spins upon the rings ofTIME UNTIME. As the main outline remains its hold and is stationed inthe sky of stars its movement within that frozen outline does indeedchange with the movements of the other elements. Elements within therotations planets, stars, and bodies of the heavens. As othercultures station their Zodiac as a permanent fixture the CherokeeZodiac morphs or changes and becomes as if ALIVE. Always Alive,breaths, lives, and takes upon each constellation its own deeming ofthings, Time, Untime, and among those things, PROPHECY.The Constellations of the Chickamaugan Cherokee are 13 fold whichcontain the characterizations of mainly animals. Among the manydesign configurations seen written upon the stars are the designs ofanimals, objects, and many other elements of TIME UNTIME. The figuresof the sky are totally different from other cultures of the Zodiacexcept for a rare few which seem to be similar. The only one whichseems to relative to similarity is found within the CherokeeConstellation Scorpion and Snake and this in relation to others asScorpio and Serpent.This is the story of only one of those constellations. This is of theCherokee Constellation Rattlesnake. And within this one Constellationis found a PROPHECY. Within the Rattlesnake of the Heavens is foundTIME UNTIME foretold since the dawn of TIME.In the sky is found the figure of a Snake. And upon this snake it isthe outline of a Rattlesnake. Sometimes the Serpent and theRattlesnake take on its bearing of one or the other but the Snake ofthe Rattlesnake is ITS design.The Cherokee Rattlesnake Constellation is not like other cultures ofthe world. The Cherokee Rattlesnake in the Heavens has a head andwinds itself back and forth with its body as in sidewinding itself toits tail. The boundary of the Rattlesnake is unlike the boundaries ofother Zodiac cultures. In the Heavens the Pleiades Star System isfound as the tip of the Rattlesnake tail.The Rattlesnake of the Cherokee is very sacred and its sacredness iswritten even in the Heavens. Upon the mouth of the Rattlesnake isfound 52 scales. These scales in number of 52 is written upon theCalendar of the Cherokee and upon the wheels and rings of TIMEUNTIME. The Calendar of the Cherokee spins upon wheels and rings as asophisticated dating system. A dating system that not only tells TIMEof events, people, places, and things but also a very holy and sacredelement within the Cherokee culture itself of ALL THINGS.The Rattlesnake can sometimes be imaged as a serpent. To be a Serpentor to be the Rattlesnake depends on the knowing of the TIMES andTIMES of TIME UNTIME. To know the culture of the Cherokee and itsAncient design upon LIFE. One MUST know the things of TIME UNTIME inorder to place the constellation as a Rattlesnake or a Serpent. Butthis is another story.The stationary outline is always of the Rattlesnake. However upon thewheels of the Cherokee calendar is also found when where how what whoin its changing and transformation. The transformation is not thechanging of the shape of the Rattlesnake but the addition orsubtraction of elements upon the snake itself. These things also tellthe tales of the universe and all its bearing of what was, what is,and to be.On the Cherokee Calendar a great thing is foretold of things about totake shape within all things upon the earth, the heavens, and theuniverse. And the Rattlesnake Constellation is one of those whichspeaks as a voice of TIME UNTIME of things to be.Upon the Cherokee Calendar Rings and written in the StarConstellation Rattlesnake is a prophecy of TIME UNTIME.And so it is thus foretold ....When the Earth sees the fingers of Spearfinger strike Jupiter, whenthe ages of the Rings and wheels tell it is the ending of the ages ofcycles of 5, this will be the sign for the whole earth, for all theearth will see this thing, to wake up from sleep. These fingers thatstuck Jupiter was the comet fragments that hit Jupiter in the 1990sand the whole earth took of is majesty. This was the sign foretold onthe Calendar for the Cherokee people to WAKE UP to come out of sleep.The Cherokee Calendar also speaks its voice telling that at this timeof the fingers striking Jupiter that Orion Star System will awaken.And the Pleiades and Orion will war once again as in old. Jupiter andVenus will awaken to its destiny of TIME UNTIME of cycles. Orion willWAR with Pleadies, Jupiter will WAR with Venus. The time of theCherokee UKU's will be at hand.In the year 2004 and 2012 an alignment will take place both on theCherokee Calendar and in the heavens of the Rattlesnake Constellationboth. It is the time of the doublehead serpent stick. It is the timeof the Red of Orion and Jupiter against White Blue of Pleadies andVenus. It is the time of the Uku's choosing. It is the time of theBeloved Woman and MYSTERIES OF TIME UNTIME. It is the Time Untime ofthe THUNDERBOLT and the spirits of Lightning Mountains.In the year 2004 and 2012 the Cherokee Rattlesnake Constellation willtake on a different configuration. The Snake itself will remain,however, upon the Rattlesnake shall be added upon its head feathers,its eyes will open and glow, wings spring forth as a wingedRattlesnake, it shall have hands and arms and in its hands shall befound a bowl. The bowl will hold blood. Upon its tail of 7 rattlesshall be the glowing and movement of Pleiades.The Rattlesnake shall become a FEATHERED RATTLESNAKE or FEATHEREDSERPENT of TIME UNTIME.And upon the Rattlesnake is also the Milky Way. A crossing of theMilky Way shall be seen at these times.For the center of the Universe is what many know as the ConstellationSagittarius by modern man. But upon this constellation of is alsofound the Pleiades Star system which is what is different in theboundary of others and the Cherokee Zodiac.The Milky Way is ALSO a Tree ... STONE TREE. And upon Stone Tree isas a Tree with a tree trunk, branches, a top, and even roots. TheFlower and the Tree is also a tassel as corn. And upon the flower andthe tree is the TREE OF LIFE. REBIRTH, RENEWAL, NEW.And the Cherokee Calendar shall end in the year 2012. But upon thetimes just prior shall be the Feathered Serpent and its prophecy.Upon the Heavens design, within the Cherokee RattlesnakeConstellation, it is written. And upon the Rings of TIME UNTIME ofthe Cherokee Calendar it also says BEHOLD RATTLESNAKE CONSTELATION.And Remember.The Rings of the Cherokee Calendar are read by the winding motion ofthe Rattlesnake. To Add or to subtract TIME UNTIME. To MOVE theWheels backward or forward, to add a wheel to move the rings, to tellthe tale what was, what is, and to be. The Rattlesnake and it designtells the movement of the RINGS OF TIME.And in the sky heavens the motions of the movement of stars, planets,and life tell the tale of its bearing. For all is as the winding ofthe Rattlesnake. And in the year 2004 the Morning Star shall be firstand in the year 2012 the Evening Star shall be first. And upon thoseyears the crown of the Feathered Serpent shall bear its colors andhonor. The hands shall hold the bowl and the tail shall be as theroots of a Tree, The Pleaides Tree of the beginning.And in the Year 2004 and 2012 shall be the TIME UNTIME of theFeathered Serpent of the Sky Heavens. And the Rings shall turn uponthose years of prophecy foretold on the Rings of TIME UNTIME. AndYwahoo Falls Kentucky shall sing of Venus and the FeatheredRattlesnake.For this is not all the prophecy not all the things thereof. For ifit was meant for one to know and I give only part, then you havereceived a great gift. For if I tell all and it was not meant for oneto know then I have waisted my breath. For this is a sacred thing,the Venus Alignment and the Feathered Serpent of the Heavens.And in the Year 2012 the Cherokee Calendar Ends. And all is reborn.For the Feathered Rattlsnake comes and shall be seen in the heavensin the year 2004 to 2012.In the south of the americas ... it is related as the coming ofQuetzalcoatl. The Ancient Cherokee relate it as the coming of thePale One once again.The Rattlesnake Constelation shall appear with the Venus Alignment.The Stars of the Heavens of the Cherokee Zodiac, the Rings of theCalendar, and The Venus Alignment tell the story of a ChickamauganProphecy. For they all are aligned in the year 2004 to 2012.________________________________________Monster With The White EyesHanded down as a traditional Cherokee story from grandmother tograndchild, the storyteller cautions that long ago before theEuropeans discovered Turtle Island and her indigenous people, theelders of those people warned of the monsters with white eyes yet tocome.Similar stories are to be found among the Aztecs and Mexican people.The spirits foretold that the monster with white eyes would cross thegreat eastern water.The monster would possess evil and terrifying power, and would wreakdestruction in its path.The spirits of the animals and trees began to wither.Prophecy states that Mother Earth herself would be devastated and herheartbeat would become faint. The monster was said to devour thechildren of Turtle Island tribe by tribe, with no escape.If one did survive, its spirit would be dead since it would now belost and have no connection to its ancestors.The story tells that one day the Earth would begin to sing a deathsong due to the severity of the harsh conditions.When this happens, the children of the people who followed the white-eyed monster to the island would look into their hearts and realizethat they faced annihilation at the hands of their fathers.They would find that the spirits of the children of the tribes hadbeen reborn, waiting to guide the children of the white-eyed monster.The few keepers of the truth would emerge, becoming strong enough toovercome the power of the white-eyed monster, restoring Mother Earthback to health.The children of the tribes of Turtle Island would lead the peopleback to the right way. The races would live in peace, the spirit ofthe animals and trees would return to safety, and the monster withwhite eyes would fail to exist.Other such prophecies are to be found in the Cherokee Legend of theWhite Snake.[Snake is a metaphor for DNA]

Sir Arthur Conan Doyle prophecy

2009-07-11T13:08:00.000-07:00

Sir Arthur Conan DoyleA period of natural convulsions during which a large portion of thehuman race will perish.Earthquakes of great severity, enormous tidal waves would seem to bethe agents.War appears only in the early stages and appears to be a signal forthe crisis to follow.The crisis will come in an instant. The destruction and dislocationof civilized life will be beyond belief.There will be a short period of chaos followed by somereconstruction; the total period of upheavals will be roughly threeyears.The chief centers of disturbance will be the Eastern Mediterraneanbasin, where not less than five countries will entirely disappear.Also in the Atlantic there will be a rise of land which will be acause of those waves which will bring about great disasters upon theAmericans, the Irish and Western European shore, involving all of thelow-lying British coasts.There are indicated further great upheavals in the southern Pacificand in the Japanese region.Mankind can be saved by returning to its spiritual values.

Edgar Cayce prophecy

2009-07-11T13:05:00.000-07:00

Edgar CayceThe Sleeping ProphetEdgar Cayce (March 18, 1877 ¬ January 3, 1945), (the surnamepronounced "Casey") is generally remembered as an American psychicwho gave trance discourses on subjects like astrology, reincarnation,and Atlantis. He may have been the source for the idea thatCalifornia would fall into the ocean (though he never said exactlythis). Although Cayce lived before the emergence of the New Agemovement, he remains a major influence on its teachings.This popular image overlooks what to him were the more importantstrains within his work such as healing (the vast majority ofhis "readings" were given for people who were sick) or Christiantheology (Cayce being a lifelong, devout member of the Disciples ofChrist). Skeptics challenge Cayce's claim to psychic prowess, whileconservative Christians doubt this and/or his orthodoxy.Today there are several tens of thousands of "Cayce people." Most arelocated in the United States and Canada, but Edgar Cayce Centers arenow found in 25 other countries. The Association for Research andEnlightenment (A.R.E), headquartered in Virginia Beach, is the majororganization promoting interest in Cayce.Cayce was born on a farm near Hopkinsville, Kentucky on March 18,1877. At an early age he gave evidence of his budding talent: he wasable to master his school lessons by sleeping on his books. At theage of twenty-one he developed a gradual throat paralysis whichthreatened the loss of his voice. When doctors were unable to find acause for his condition, Cayce entered the same hypnotic sleep thathad enabled him to learn his school lessons years before. In thatstate, he was able to recommend a cure which successfully repairedhis throat muscles and restored his voice. It was soon discoveredthat he could do the same for others.For most of his adult life, Edgar Cayce was able to provide intuitiveinsights into nearly any question imaginable. When individuals cameto him with a question, he would place himself into a sleep-inducedsleep state. While in that state he could respond to virtually anyquestion asked. His responses have come to be called "readings".Today his psychic readings constitute one of the largest and mostimpressive records of intuitive information to emanate from a singleindividual.For many years the information dealt mainly with medical problems.Eventually the scope of his readings expanded to include such topicsas meditation, dreams, reincarnation, and prophecy. The transcriptshave provided the basis for over 300 popular books about Cayce'swork.Mr. Cayce's theories on the end times of this planet are veryenlightening and show a global major change in 1998. He prophecizedthe Sphinx had been built in 10,500 BC and that survivors of Atlantishad concealed beneath it a "Hall of Records" containing all thewisdom of their lost civilization and the true history of the humanrace. Cayce prophesied that this Hall of Records would berediscovered and opened between 1996 and 1998. He connected theopening to the second coming of Christ.Cayce ending every reading by saying, "We are through".The ReadingsEdgar Cayce gave over 14,000 "readings" during a period of 43 years(1901 to 1944). These are trance discourses which Cayce revealedwhile in a hypnotic or "sleeping" state. While "awake" he claimedgenerally not to remember what he had said while "asleep". Thereadings themselves explain that the unconscious mind has access toinformation which the conscious mind does not -- a common theoryabout hypnosis in Cayce's time. Most records come from the periodafter 1925, when his secretary Gladys Davis recorded the readings,and his wife Gertrude Evans Cayce "conducted" (guided) the readings.The readings are customarily divided into the following categories:Physical Readings: 9,603 extant readings.Otherwise known as "health readings" in which (typically) a patientwould be diagnosed and a cure prescribed. For some reason Cayceneeded to be told the patient's physical location, though this mighteasily be in another city or state (in the case of patients inquiringby letter). Cayce lore describes various incidental examples ofclairvoyance in the course of Cayce's psychically "searching" for thepatient.Life Readings: 1,920 extant readingsIn a life reading, Cayce describes the client's present physical,emotional and mental condition in terms of past life experience. Mostinquirers were assigned past lives from about twelve main "periods"including Atlantis, ancient Egypt at the time of "Ra Ta", ancientPersia, Palestine at the time of Christ, and colonial America. Anumber of people were told of famous past lives. Cayce's son HughLynn, for example, was told that he was the apostle Andrew.Business Readings:747 extant readings.Cayce occasionally gave business readingsincluding advice on business partners, the stock market, businessmodels, etc.Dream Readings: 630 extant readings.Edgar Cayce encouraged everyone to interpret and use his or her owndreams in day-to-day life. A dream reading involved Cayceinterpreting the dreams of clients. As he did with readings on manysubjects, Cayce would often interrupt the person reading the dreamand give an interpretation before the dream had been completely read.He would sometimes fill in parts of dreams that the dreamer hadsupposedly forgotten. Unlike Jungian or Freudian dreaminterpretation, Cayce did not emphasize highly the importance ofsymbols. He said that every individual has his or her own uniquesymbols. Cayce claimed that in dreams people could receive valuableinsight into their own lives and that the insight was always of useto the dreamer. Besides regular daily insight into one's life, heclaimed people could communicate with loved ones dead or alive,remember past life experiences, see a possible future and experiencemany other psychic phenomena. He stated that these paranormalabilities were something anyone could learn.Other Readings: 954 extant readingsOther Readings are miscellaneous subject matter that does not fitinto an above category. The subject matter included missing persons,buried treasure, readings given to a spiritual development group,psychic abilities, auras, prophecy, structure of reality, geology andmany other topics.Cayce readings are usually referenced using a numeric tag in whichthe first number is a code representing the recipient (most of theiridentities remain secret), while the second counts which reading itis, in the case of a person who receives more than one. 5749-14 forexample is the fourteenth reading given for person # 5749 (whoseassigned number is essentially arbitrary).Political Predictions - World Wars I and IICayce predicted the beginning and end of both the First and SecondWorld Wars, and the lifting of the Depression in 1933. In the 1920s,he first warned of coming racial strife in the United States, and in1939 he predicted the deaths of two presidents in office;"Ye are to have turmoils -- ye are to have strife between capital andlabor. Ye are to have a division in thy own land, before ye have thesecond of the Presidents that next will not live through hisoffice... a mob rule!"President Franklin D. Roosevelt died in office in April 1945. InNovember 1963, President John F. Kennedy was assassinated in Dallas,Texas, when racial tensions in the United States were at theirheight."Unless there is more give and take and consideration for those whoproduce, with better division of the excess profits from labor, theremust be greater turmoil in the land."In October 1935, Cayce spoke of the coming holocaust in Europe. TheAustrians and Germans, he said, and later the Japanese, would takesides."Thus an unseen force, gradually growing, must result in an almostdirect opposition to the Nazi, or Aryan theme. This will graduallyproduce a growth of animosities. And unless there is interference bywhat many call supernatural forces and influences -- which are activein the affairs of nations and peoples -- the whole world as itwere... will be set on fire by militaristic groups and people who arefor power expansion."Two of Cayce's major predictions concerned the futures of China andthe Soviet Union, the world's great Communist giants. In 1944, heprophesied that China would one day be "the cradle of Christianity asapplied in the lives of men." Through Russia, he said "comes the hopeof the world. Not in respect to what is sometimes termed Communism orBolshevism -- no! But freedom -- freedom! That each man will live forhis fellow man. The principle has been born there. It will take yearsfor it to be crystallized; yet out of Russia comes again the hope ofthe world." Russia, he said, would be guided by friendship with theUnited States. Its attempt to rule "not only the economic, but themental and spiritual life" of its people was doomed to failure.Cayce also predicted the possibility of a third world war. He spokeof strifes arising near the Davis Straits, and in Libya, and inEgypt, in Ankara, and in Syria; through the straits around thoseareas above Australia, in the Indian Ocean and the Persian Gulf."When asked in June 1943 whether it would be feasible to work towardsan international currency or a stabilization of internationalexchange levels when the war had ended, Cayce replied that it wouldbe a long, long time before this would happen. Indeed, hesaid, "there may be another war over just such conditions."Other Major ThemesOrigin and destiny of humanity - "All souls were created in thebeginning, and are finding their way back to whence they came." Caycebelieves that human souls were created with a consciousness of theironeness with God. Some "fell" from this state; others - led by theJesus soul - volunteered to save them. The Earth, with all itslimitations, was created as a suitable arena for spiritual growth.Duality - According to Cayce, Atlantean society was divided into twolong-lived political factions - a "good" faction called the "Sons ofthe Law of One," and an "evil" faction called the "Sons of Belial."According to the readings, a major source of turmoil was the Sons ofBelial's desire to exploit the Things, sub-humans with animalappendages and low intelligence, and the movements to protect andevolve them by the Sons of the Law of One.Universal laws - Souls incarnated on the earth are subject to certainspiritual laws such as, "As ye sow, so shall ye reap" (karma) or "Asye judge (others), so shall ye be judged." Properly regarded, suchlaws represent an aspect of God's mercy whereby no matter what ourcircumstances, he has promised to guide us in our spiritual path.Jesus and Christ ConsciousnessFollowing New Thought precedent, Cayce distinguishes between Jesusand Christhood. Briefly, Jesus was a soul like us, who reincarnatedthrough many lifetimes (and made many mistakes). "Christhood" issomething which he achieved, and to which we also ought to aspire.Cayce accordingly calls Jesus our "elder brother."From Cayce's perspective, we are not simply physical bodies, insteadwe are spiritual beings who are having a physical experienceentailing personal growth and development. Many individuals haveincorrectly assumed that the goal of being in the earth is to simplyreach heaven, find enlightenment, or somehow "get out of the earth."And yet, this is a perspective quite different from that contained inthe Cayce material. Instead, Cayce believed that as children of God,our mission was to somehow bring spirit into the earth.The dynamics of our deep and literal connection to God can be foundthroughout scripture, beginning with Genesis when we are told thatGod made humankind in the Creator's image. But our relationship withGod as our Parent is perhaps no more clearly illustrated than in theParable of the Prodigal Son (Luke 15:11-24). This parable describesthe journey of the soul: we were with God in the beginning, throughthe power of our free will we were able to make choices that were notnecessarily in perfect accord with the Creator. And, at some point,we will "arise" and decide to return to God, regaining ourinheritance and experiencing our true relationship with Him.One of the readings beautifully describes the spiritual nature ofhumankind in this way:"For ye are a corpuscle in the body of God; thus a co-creator withHim, in what ye think, in what ye do." - Edgar Cayce reading #2794-3The readings state that God desires to be expressed in the worldthrough us. The example set by Jesus is apparently a "pattern" ofwholeness for each and every soul.Regardless of an individual'sreligious or personal beliefs, this Christ pattern exists inpotential upon the very fiber of their being. It is that part of eachof us that is in perfect accord with the Creator and is simplywaiting to find expression in our lives.This Christ pattern was further described as "the awareness withineach soul, imprinted in pattern on the mind and waiting to beawakened by the will, of the soul's oneness with God" (5749-14), andits manifestation is the eventual destiny of each and every soul.With this in mind, the readings present Jesus as our "Elder brother,"a soul who came to show each one of us the way back to our spiritualSource by perfectly manifesting the laws of the Creator in the earth.Just as an older sibling can sometimes provide insight and counselinto some of life's difficulties (because he or she went through themfirst) Jesus as Elder brother can assist us in facing life'schallenges. What may surprise individuals is that this fact hasnothing to do with religion, it has to do with spirituality anddiscovering our true relationship with God - a relationship we sharewith Jesus. The readings not only affirm that Jesus was the Son ofGod, but they also state the same thing about each and everyone ofus. In other words: Jesus was like each one of us and, ultimately,each one of us is destined to be like Him.Q. What is the main purpose of Jesus' incarnation?EC: To glorify the Christ Consciousness in the Earth . in the livesof those with whom ye come in contact, and to live the same thyself. -Reading 2441-4Q. What is the meaning and significance of the words Jesus andChrist...?EC: Just as indicated. Jesus is the man, the activity, the mind, therelationships that He bore to others. Yea, He was mindful of friends,He was sociable. He was loving. He was kind. He was gentle. He grewfaint, He grew weak and yet gained that strength that He haspromised, in becoming the Christ, by fulfilling and overcoming theworld! Ye are made strong in body, in mind, in soul and purpose bythat power in Christ. The power, then, is in the Christ. The patternis in Jesus. - Reading 2533-7This transformative power of the Christ Consciousness is awakened asindividuals act in accord with the pattern set by the example ofJesus' life. In fact, this awakening is the essential purpose forwhich each soul enters into life.From Cayce's perspective, Jesus is the Elder brother for all ofhumankind, deeply committed to assisting all souls in reawakening tothe awareness of their oneness with God. This Jesus is not interestedin religious conversion, denominationalism, or even mighty personalaccomplishments. Instead, He is simply interested in how we treat oneanother. With this in mind, even in the midst of our diversity as ahuman family, we share a common spiritual heritage. We are allChildren of the same God. We are all part of the one spiritualSource. And, we are all destined to return to our Creator, ourMother/Father, our God.Unknown Life of Jesus - Cayce presented narratives of Jesus' previousincarnations, including a mysterious Atlantean figurecalled "Amilius" as well as the more familiar biblical figures ofAdam, Enoch, Melchizedek, Joshua, Asaph, and Jeshua. Cayce describesJesus as an Essene who traveled to India in his youth in order tostudy Eastern religions. Read more [scroll down]Reincarnation Past LivesEdgar Cayce found that the concept of reincarnation was notincompatible with any religion, and actually merged perfectly withhis own beliefs of what it meant to be a Christian. Eventually thesubject of reincarnation was examined in extensive detail in over1,900 Life Readings.Reincarnation is the belief that each of us goes through a series oflifetimes for the purpose of spiritual growth and soul development.Cayce's approach does not include the concept of transmigration,which states that it is possible for human beings to be born again asanimals. From the standpoint of the Cayce material, souls only occupyhuman bodies through their spiritual growth and developmentalprocess.In essence, the Cayce approach to reincarnation provides aphilosophical setting to the past focusing on practical ways ofdealing with this life: living, growing, and being of service to oneanother in the present.For him it wasn¹t nearly as important to who individuals had oncebeen, or even what they had been doing, as it was paramount that theyfocus on the present and the opportunities and challenges that facedthem in this time, in this place, right now.In terms of remembering your own past lives, the Edgar Cayceinformation provides a variety of approaches. In fact, oftentimesindividuals who received readings would ask about such things asmemorable dreams that were on their mind, personal traits and talentsthat they had always been drawn to, and even intense positive ornegative relationships with other people in their lives ¬ Caycedescribed how each of these things could be tied to past-lifememories. With these things in mind, in order to remember your ownpast lives the Cayce readings recommend such things as personalinventories of your talents, abilities, likes, and dislikes; workingwith meditation and dreams; taking part in imaginative past-lifereveries or self-hypnosis, and so forth.From Cayce's perspective, the reason for believing in reincarnationis not so that we can dwell upon the past or brag about thepossibility of once having been someone famous, instead it is toenable a soul to understand the consequences of previous choices andto know that each individual is ultimately responsible for shapingand creating his or her life in the present. From the Cayce readings¹perspective, the past merely provided a framework of potentials andprobabilities. An individual¹s choices, actions, and free will in thepresent would determine the actual experience lived this time around.Rather than being a fatalistic approach to life, it is much more oneof nearly limitless opportunities.Cayce teaches the reality of reincarnation and karma, but asinstruments of a loving God rather than blind natural laws. Itspurpose is to teach us certain spiritual lessons. Animals haveundifferentiated, "group" souls rather than individuality andconsciousness. Once the soul evolves through a succession of animalincarnations and achieves human status, it is not then reborn inanimal form. Cayce's view arguably incorporates Theosophicalteachings on spiritual evolution. Each person, in his view, existedin a self-conscious form before birth and would exist again afterdeath.As well as his health readings, Cayce gave many hundreds of so-called "life" readings, during which he would describe his subject'spast lives. A number of those readings referred to past incarnationsin the legendary lost land of Atlantis. In all, Cayce referred toAtlantis no fewer than seven hundred times in his readings over aspan of twenty years.From Cayce's perspective, we are not simply physical bodies or evenphysical bodies with souls, but are instead spiritual beings who arecurrently having a material experience. As souls, we have manifestedin the earth in order to learn lessons that will enable us to returnto our former state of spiritual awareness. At the same time, onepurpose we all have in common is to bring the spirituality of theCreator into the earth.A soul can choose to be born into either a male or a female body inany given lifetime or, as Cayce called it, an incarnation. A soulselects that environment (parents and family, location, personalobstacles, etc.) which will best allow for the learning of lessons itneeds for completeness. The goal is to fully express love in all thechallenges which physical life offers.One's experiences are subject to the choices made with free will. Asone grows, he or she learns-or rather remembers-his or her truerelationship with God and one's heritage as a spiritual being. Withfree will, we can turn the challenges life presents to us intostepping-stones toward growth, or we can see them as obstacles andstumbling blocks. Either way, we reap what we have sown. Weconstantly meet the consequences of previous deeds and attitudes.One frequently misunderstood concept regarding reincarnation has todo with karma. From the standpoint of the Cayce material, karma isnot destiny; it is only memory. These memories are generallyunconscious and influence our abilities, our faults, even ourrelationships with others, but with free will we can meet this memoryas a positive or a negative experience. Karma provides us with thepotential to learn a lesson we need in order to grow at a soul level,and free will determines whether or not we choose to learn it at thistime. The choices we make determine the next set of potentialexperiences we encounter.Much more than simply a concept that applies to a limited segment ofthe world, reincarnation is a philosophy that has-at one time oranother-been embraced by all the major religions of the world. It's aconcept that can allow us to have compassion for one another becauseultimately we are all equal-there is only one God, and we are all Hischildren.From Cayce's viewpoint, it doesn't really matter if an individualbelieves in reincarnation or not. For some it can be a helpfulconcept, for others confusing. The main purpose is to allowindividuals to become aware of their true spiritual nature and theirultimate relationship with one another. In fact, if we can think fora moment about the one person in our life whom we love most of all.then we will get an inkling of the goal of reincarnation: to be ableto love every single soul, even ourselves, with the very same love.Atlantis and Cayce Atlantean ChannelingsThe Cayce readings affirm the existence of Atlantis, a vast continentwith an advanced technology whose refugees peopled ancient Egypt aswell as pre-Columbian America.Land Mass - The size of Atlantis was equal to that of Europe,including Asia in Europe. He saw visions of a continent which hadgone through three major periods of division; the first two about15,600 BCE, when the mainland was divided into islands. The threemain islands Cayce named Poseida, Og and Aryan.Atlantean Souls - Many people living today are the reincarnations ofAtlantean souls, who must now face similar temptations as before.Blue Stone - Cayce may or may not have predicted the coming of acertain 'blue stone' of Atlantean origin, that was to be found on "anisland in the Caribbean" and was to have the power to heal. In 1974 aVolcanic blue pectolite now known as the Larimar was found in theDominican Republic. References to Blue Stones are also a metaphor forthe color blue which goes to this file and on to blue apples, bluegrapes, stargates, etc. Everything is connected andmost of what youread that is channeled contains metaphoric content.Crystals - The Atlanteans had constructed giant laser-like crystalsfor power plants, and that these had been responsible for the seconddestruction of the land. In metaphysical circles this coloredgemstone is said to have healing powers; as with most crystals andgemstones, there is no scientific evidence that it has any specialproperties. The final destruction was in part to due to theovercharging of the Crystal which caused a massive explosion. Cayceblamed the final destruction on the disintegration of the Atlanteanculture through greed and lust. But before the legendary landdisappeared under the waves, Cayce believed there was an exodus ofmany Atlanteans through Egypt and further afield. Cayce attributedhistory's Great Flood in part to the sinking of the last hugeremnants of Atlantis.Atlantis Rising - Cayce most specifically timed forecast was thatAtlantis would rise again in 1968 or 1969. Needless to say, Cayce waswrong on that count. [Note: However, it was in that time frame thatthe "Bimini Road" was located in the Atlantic Ocean. Whether this isa "road" or "natural, geologic erosion" is cannot be proven. Atlantissuffered 3 major destructions one of which was the deluge.Egypt - Next to biblical times, the most significant era forthe "life readings" was a pre-dynastic Egyptian civilizationconsisting of Atlantean refugees. Cayce purported to have been anotherwise unknown pharoah named "Ra Ta" who built a spiritually-basedhealing center (the "Temple of Sacrifice") and educationalinstitution (the "Temple Beautiful"). His diagnostic readings andnarratives about the past and future were supposed to be acontinuation of his ancient work. This civilization also builtmonuments on the Giza plateau, including the Great Pyramid, and leftrecords of Atlantis in a "hall of records" located somewhere beneaththe Sphinx. These readings bear a close resemblance to books by AMORCfounder H. Spencer Lewis.Earth Changes and Cayce on Earth ChangesSome Cayce readings allude to massive Earth changes - perhaps inconjunction with a pole shift - in the 1930s, 1960s, or 1990s. Caycepeople have developed several creative ways of interpreting suchpassages, although some were disappointed with the failure of 1998 tobring either the rising of Atlantis, the sinking of California, orthe Second Coming of Christ. Other predictions were about dramaticchanges in the Earth's surface in the period from 1958 to 1998 due toa tilting in the Earth's rotational axis which would begin in 1936.The first sign of this change in the Earth's core would bethe "breaking up of some conditions" in the South Pacificand "sinking or rising" in the Mediterranean or Etna area. Cayceforecast that, by the end of the century, New York, Los Angeles andSan Francisco would be destroyed. He said that "the greater portionof Japan must go into the sea" at this time, and that northern Europewould be "changed as in the twinkling of an eye."In 1941, Cayce predicted that lands would appear in the Atlantic andthe Pacific in the coming years, and that "the coastline now of manya land will be the bed of the ocean. Even many of the battlefields of1941 will be ocean, will be the sea, the bays, the lands over whichthe new order will carry on their trade as with one another.""Watch New York, Connecticut and the like. Many portions of the eastcoast will be disturbed, as well as many portions of the west coast,as well as the central portion of the United States. Los Angeles, SanFrancisco, most of all these will be among those that will bedestroyed before New York, or New York City itself, will in the maindisappear. This will be another generation though, here; while thesouthern portions of Carolina, Georgia, these will disappear. Thiswill be much sooner. The waters of the Great Lakes will empty intothe Gulf of Mexico."Cayce prophezied that the Earth's axis would be shifted by the year2001, bringing on reversals in climate, so that where there has beena frigid or semi-tropical climate, there will be a more tropical one,and moss and fern will grow. By this time, he indicated, a new cyclewould begin.Astrology - Edgar Cayce's view of astrology was based on the conceptof reincarnation. He felt that it was not the positions of theplanets that influence the soul at birth, but that the soul choosesthe time in which it wishes to be born. Most of us, according toCayce, have had lives before this one, and we bring with us talents,abilities, and influences from those past lives. These influences,part of the universal law of cause and effect, are called "karma" inSanskrit. Cayce also tells us that not only have we had previouslives, but that, between lifetimes, the soul has a life outside thephysical world. During these interim periods, the soul experienceslevels of consciousness that correspond to the vibratory levels ofthe different planets.Cayce referred to these interim lifetime experiences as "planetarysojourns." Because we have had experiences with the vibrations of thedifferent planets between lifetimes, the planets have an internalinfluence on us when we reincarnate into the earth plane. Theseinfluences of the planets are felt by us in the formof "inclinations, tendencies, and urges" (781-5). However, Caycesaid, no influence is greater than the human will and the choices wemake in our lives every day:Not that there are not definite helps tobe attained from astrology, but those who live by same the more oftare controlled rather than controlling their own lives and destinies.Astrology is a fact, in most instances. But astrological aspects arebut signs, symbols. No influence is of greater value or of greaterhelp than the Will of an individual. Reading 815-6

Helena Petrovna Blavatsky prophecy

2009-07-11T13:04:00.000-07:00

Helena Blavatskywas a very controversial figure. Some people feel shewas a prophet, others feel she was a fraud. Whatever one's opinion,there is no doubt that Blavatsky was an important figure in modernhistory. Her founding of the Theosophical Society reintroduced manyideas into Western civilization that had been forgotten or abandonedfor centuries.PropheciesWe are at the close of the cycle of 5,000 years of the present AryanKali Yuga or dark age. This will be succeeded by an age of light.Even now under our very eyes, the new Race or Races are preparing tobe formed, and that is in America that the transformation will takeplace, and has already silently commenced. This Race will be alteredin mentality and will move toward a more perfect spiritual existence.That the periodical sinking and reappearance of mighty continents,now called Atlantean and Lemurian by modern writers, is not fictionwill be demonstrated. It is only in the 20th century that portions,if not the whole, of the present work will be vindicated.A world destruction as happened to Atlantis 11,000 years ago, willoccur. Instead of Atlantis, all of England and parts of NW Europeancoast will sink into the sea, in contrast, the sunken Azores region,the Isle of Poseidonis, will again be raised from the sea.